Finisher - B1sm PDF

FINISHER-B1
PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1
REVISION 0
NO PARTS CATALOGUE AVAILABLE
MAY 1997 FY8-13EW-000

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON FINISHER-B1 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
IMPORTANT
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN.

SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY
FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED
MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO

THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE COMPANY.
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
Use of this manual should be strictly

supervised to avoid disclosure of
confidential information.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
7-5-1, Hakusan, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan
INTRODUCTION
This manual is compiled to provide the service technician with basic facts and figures
about the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1, thereby ensuring the machine’s quality and
performance through servicing in the field.
This Service Manual consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1, “General Description,” gives the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1’s fea-

tures, specifications, names of parts, and an outline of how to operate it.
Chapter 2, “Operations and Timing,” explains the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1’s

mechanical and electrical mechanisms by function.
Chapter 3, “Mechanical System,” discusses the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1’s

mechanical construction, and shows how to disassemble, assemble, and adjust it.
Chapter 4, “Maintenance and Servicing,” contains tables of periodically replaced

parts and tables of durables and consumables; the chapter also contains a scheduled
servicing chart.
Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting,” sets forth steps used to troubleshoot possible faults in

the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1 organized in a tabular format, and provides stan-
dards/adjustments tables, self diagnosis codes tables, electrical parts charts, and service
mode charts.
Appendix provides signals lists, general circuit diagram, printed circuit diagrams, spe-
cial tools table, and solvents/oils table.
For installation, see the Installation Procedure, which comes with the Finisher-
B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1.
The contents of this manual may be updated from time to time to reflect improve-
ments rendered to the machine; a Service Information bulletin will be issued as neces-
sary to cover major changes.
All service technicians are expected to be thoroughly familiar with the information
contained in this manual and Service Information bulletins for quick response to the
user’s needs.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. FEATURES ..............................................1-1 A. Control Panel ...................................1-10
II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................................1-2 B. Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch
A. Finisher-B1.........................................1-2 Panel Display ...................................1-11
B. Paper Folding Unit-A1 .......................1-5 C. Making User Mode Settings.............1-13
III. NAMES OF PARTS..................................1-6 D. Supplying the Stapler with Staples ..1-15
A. Exterior View......................................1-6 E. Removing Jammed Staples .............1-18
B. Cross Section.....................................1-8 F. Removing Paper Jams ....................1-22
IV. OPERATING THE MACHINE ................1-10
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING

I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION ........................2-1 E. Front Gripper Drive System ...........2-128
A. Functional Construction .....................2-1 F. Jams ..............................................2-150
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry .......2-2 G. Sequence of Operations ................2-157
C. Inputs to the Finisher Controller VI. STACKER UNIT ...................................2-159
PCB....................................................2-3 A. Outline............................................2-159
D. Outputs from the Finisher Controller B. Stacker Unit Up/Down Drive
PCB .................................................2-13 System ...........................................2-160
E. Communication between Copier and C. Stacker Tray Drive System ............2-170
Finisher ............................................2-20 D. Leading Edge Stopper Drive
II. BASIC OPERATION ..............................2-21 System ...........................................2-183
A. Outline..............................................2-21 E. Lift Wall Drive System....................2-186
B. Basic Operation ...............................2-26 F. Emergency Stop Button .................2-190
C. Emergency Operation Mode ............2-33 G. Internal Lamp .................................2-192
III. FEEDING DRIVE SYSTEM ...................2-38 H. Sequence of Operations ................2-193
A. Outline..............................................2-38 VII. CONTROL PANEL ...............................2-195
B. Feeding Path....................................2-40 A. Outline............................................2-195
C. Controlling the Feeding Speed ........2-42 B. Operation .......................................2-195
D. Controlling the Feeding Motor .........2-44 VIII. POWER SUPPLY.................................2-198
E. Paddle ..............................................2-47 A. Outline of the Power Supply ..........2-198
F. Limitless Sorting...............................2-49 B. Power Supply Circuit .....................2-199
G. Overstacking ....................................2-53 C. Protection Mechanisms for the Power
H. Jams ................................................2-57 Supply Circuit.................................2-202
IV. BIN UNIT DRIVE SYSTEM....................2-67 D. DC Power Supply Rated Outputs ..2-202
A. Outline..............................................2-67 IX. PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1 .................2-203
B. Bin Unit ............................................2-69 A. Outline............................................2-203
C. Controlling the Guide Bar ................2-85 B. Outline of the Electrical Circuit ......2-204
D. Controlling the Bin Cover.................2-89 C. Inputs to and Outputs from the Paper
V. STACK PROCESSING UNIT .................2-91 Folding Unit....................................2-205
A. Outline..............................................2-91 D. Basic Operations............................2-207
B. Up/Down Drive System....................2-92 E. Feeding Drive System ...................2-209
C. Side Gripper Drive System ..............2-99 F. Detecting Jams ..............................2-219
D. Stapler Unit Drive G. Power Supply.................................2-222
System ...........................................2-113
CHAPTER 3 MECHANICAL SYSTEM
I. USING THE DOOR SWITCH C. Side Gripper...................................3-102
ACTUATORS ...........................................3-1 D. Bin Rear End Wall Open/Close
A. Outline................................................3-1 Unit.................................................3-109
B. Using the Door Switch Actuators .......3-2 E. Stapler Front/Rear Shift Drive
C. Using the Stapler ...............................3-4 System............................................3-111
II. RELOCATING THE MACHINE ................3-5 F. Removing the Stapler Unit.............3-120
A. Fixing the Stack Processing Unit and G. Front Gripper..................................3-124
the Stacker Unit in Place ...................3-5 H. Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor
B. Separating from the Copier................3-9 (M10)..............................................3-128
C. Taping the Covers in Place ..............3-12 I. Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Drive
III. EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS ............3-13 System ...........................................3-134
A. External Covers ...............................3-13 J. Stack Processing Unit Screen .......3-138
B. Separating the Finisher and the VII. STACKER UNIT ...................................3-142
Copier ..............................................3-20 A. Stacker Unit ...................................3-142
C. Display .............................................3-21 B. Removing the Stacker Tray Drive
D. Bin Cover Switch Assembly.............3-24 System ...........................................3-150
E. Access Door Switch Assembly ........3-26 C. Removing the Leading Edge Stopper
F. Installing the Service Screen ...........3-28 Drive System..................................3-159
IV. BIN MODULE.........................................3-30 D. Removing the Lifter Wall Drive
A. Bin ....................................................3-30 System ...........................................3-165
B. Bin Shift Motor .................................3-38 E. Adjusting the Tension of the Stacker
C. Lead Cam ........................................3-46 Unit Shift Brake 2 Belt ...................3-169
D. Guide Bar Unit .................................3-64 F. Adjusting the Orientation of the
E. Guide Bar Motor ..............................3-70 Stack Tray ......................................3-170
V. FEEDING UNIT......................................3-71 VIII. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .......................3-171
A. Upper Feeding Mobile Assembly.....3-71 A. Removing the Finisher Controller
B. Vertical Path Unit .............................3-78 PCB................................................3-171
C. Lower Feeding Assembly ................3-81 B. Removing the Stack Processing Unit
D. Inlet Unit...........................................3-85 Drive PCB ......................................3-172
E. Removing the Common Path C. Removing the Power Supply
Feeding Motor (M1) .........................3-87 PCB................................................3-174
F. Removing the Upper Path D. Noise Filter Unit .............................3-175
Feeding Motor (M2) .........................3-88 IX. PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1 .................3-176
G. Removing the Lower Path A. External Covers .............................3-176
Feeding Motor (M3) .........................3-91 B. Paper Folding Unit .........................3-177
VI. STACK PROCESSING UNIT .................3-93 C. Feeding System .............................3-183
A. Stack Processing Unit......................3-93 D. Drive System..................................3-192
B. Removing the Side Gripper E. Removing the Folder Drive PCB ...3-198
Left/Right Shift Drive Assembly .....3-100
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS ......4-1 III. SCHEDULED SERVICING ......................4-8
II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES ........4-1 A. Finisher-B1.........................................4-8
A. Finisher-B1.........................................4-1 B. Paper Folding Unit-A1 .....................4-20
B. Paper Folding Unit-A1 .......................4-7
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
I. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS .......5-1 IV. SERVICE MODE..................................5-118
A. Mechanical System............................5-1 A. Outline ............................................5-118
B. Electrical System .............................5-25 B. Using Service Mode .......................5-118
II. TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................5-53 C. Checking the Operation .................5-121
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions ..........5-53 D. Adjustment .....................................5-129
III. ARRANGEMENT OF E. Job Mix Switch/Staple Position
ELECTRICAL PARTS ............................5-90 Adjustment .....................................5-147
A. Sensors ............................................5-90 V. SELF DIAGNOSIS ...............................5-154
B. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and A. Jam Alarm......................................5-155
Brakes ..............................................5-98 D. Errors .............................................5-162
C. Switches and Lamps......................5-100
D. Paper Folding Unit-A1 ...................5-102
E. Variable Resistors (VR),
Light-Emitting Diodes (LED),
and Check Pins by PCB ................5-104
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ....................A-1 E. SPECIAL TOOLS ..................................A-13
B. SIGNAL AND ABBREVIATIONS .............A-5 F. SOLVENTS AND OILS ..........................A-13
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..............A-7
D. PAPER FOLDING UNIT GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM...............................A-11
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I. FEATURES ..............................................1-1 A. Control Panel ...................................1-10

II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................................1-2 B. Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch
A. Finisher-B1.........................................1-2 Panel Display ...................................1-11
B. Paper Folding Unit-A1 .......................1-5 C. Making User Mode Settings.............1-13
III. NAMES OF PARTS..................................1-6 D. Supplying the Stapler with Staples ..1-15
A. Exterior View......................................1-6 E. Removing Jammed Staples .............1-18
B. Cross Section.....................................1-8 F. Removing Paper Jams ....................1-22
IV. OPERATING THE MACHINE ................1-10
I. FEATURES
1. Uninterrupted copying work.
• The two bin modules are operated independently of each other, enabling uninter-
rupted copying work.
2. Shorter stapling time.

• The bins are divided into two groups (upper/lower), shortening the processing time
through simultaneous sorting and stapling.
3. Three modes of auto stapling.

• In staple sort mode, the copies delivered to the bins may automatically be stapled
either at the front (single), rear (single), or both front and rear (double)–as many as
100 sheets may be stapled (98 sheets of 80 g/m2 + 2 sheets of 200 g/m2).
4. Easier jam removal.

• A jam may be removed from the front without having to separate the machine from
the copier.
• The bins may be moved up or down by a press on a switch, making removal of a jam
between a bin and the feeding assembly very easy.
• The finisher’s display shows instructions on how to remove jams.
5. Better paper feeding.

• Paper as thick as 200 g/m2 may be fed.
6. Easier access to copies.

• The stacker may be drawn to the front, providing easy access to the delivered
copies.
7. Folding function (accessory).

• Installation of the Paper Folding Unit-A1 (accessory) will enable folding copies of A3,
A4, or 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11" × 17") in Zs. (Paper must be of 64 to 80 g/m2).
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON FINISHER-B1 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-1
II. SPECIFICATIONS
A. Finisher-B1
Item Specifications
Stacking Sorter Face up, moving bins, two-way sorting
Stacker Face up, tray drop, gripper feeding
Paper type Plain paper (64 to 200 g/m2)
Mode Non-sort, sort, staple sort
Delivery (number of bins) Non-sort delivery assembly, bins (6 × 2 modules), stacker tray
Paper size Non-sort delivery assembly : STMTR to A3/279.4 × 431.8 mm
(11" × 17")
Bins : B5R to A3/279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"
× 17")
Stacker tray : B5R to B4/LGL
Stack Stack without Non-sort delivery assembly : 250 sheets (thick paper at 80 g/m2)
folded sheets Bins : 100 sheets (B5R to A4) 50 sheets
(A3, 279.4 × 413.8 mm (11" × 17"),
B4, LGL)
Stacker tray : 2000 sheets equivalent (about
260 mm high; or, 100 sheets for
stapling)*
Stack with Non-sort delivery assembly : 50 sheets (of which 10 or fewer
folded folded sheets)
sheets** Bin † : 100 sheets (of which 10 or fewer
folded sheets)
Stacker tray : 10 sheets
Control panel Access key, display (bin up/down movement for jam removal)
Display Copy End indicator, stacker tray stack level indicator, LCD (jam
removal, guide, service mode)
Paper detection Provided (non-sort tray, bin, stacker)
Stacker tray stacking Front/rear offset position (by 20 mm, approx.)
condition
* Stacking will be to the upper bin module in excess of 1200 sheets.

** Each folded sheet is counted as 10 spread sheets.
† Folding sheets may be stacked only in the first bin of each bin module.
1-2 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON FINISHER-B1 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Item Specifications
Stapling Punching by rotating cam
Stapling position
Stapling Position
Corner A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 279.4 ×
431.8mm (11"× 17") LGL, LTR, LTRR
Sheet size
A3, A4, A4R, B4,
B5, B5R,
279.4 × 431.8mm
11.5 ±2mm
(11" × 17"), LGL, Feeding direction
LTR, LTRR
6±2mm
Double A3, A4 B4, B5
88.5 ±2mm 88.5 ±2mm
68.5 ±2mm 68.5 ±2mm

6±2mm 6±2mm
Sheet size
A3, A4, B4, B5,
279.4 × 431.8mm
(11" × 17"), LTR
Feeding Feeding
279.4 × 431.8mm (11" × 17"), LTR

6±2mm 80 ±2mm 80 ±2mm
Feeding
Single
A4R, B5R, LTRR
11.5 ±2mm
6±2mm
Sheet size
A4R, B5R, LTRR
Feeding
Item Specifications
Manual stapling Not provided
Number of sheets 100 sheets, 98 sheets (80 g/m2)/2 sheets (200 g/m2)
Staples Special (in cartridge of 5000 staples)
Staple absent detection Provided (indicator on if about 55 or fewer staples remain at the
end of stapling)
Sheet size B5R to A3/279.4 × 431.8mm (11" × 17")
Operating Temperature Same as copier
environment Humidity Same as copier
Power supply 100V
Serial number LGF xxxxx
Maximum power consumption 300 W or less
Weight 230 kg (approx.)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 1127 × 787 × 1411 [mm]
Specifications subject to change without notice.
B. Paper Folding Unit-A1

Item Specifications
Folding Roller pressure folding
Paper type Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), A3, B4, 279.4 × 431.8 mm
(11" × 17")
Folding Z-folding
Operating Temperature Same as copier
environment Humidity Same as copier
Power supply 24 V (from Finisher-B1)
Serial number ZFX xxxxx
Weight 40 kg (approx.)
Dimensions (W × D × H) 244 × 727 × 938 [mm]
Specifications subject to change without notice.
III. NAMES OF PARTS
A. Exterior View
1. Finisher-B1
q w e r t y u i
!5 !4 !3 !2 !1 !0 o
q Bin cover o Front door

w Upper bin module !0 Access key
e Contrast adjusting dial !1 Stack Tray Removal indicator
r Copy End indicator !2 Stack Tray Stack Level indicator
t Non-sort tray !3 Access door
y Upper cover !4 Display
u Stack tray !5 Lower bin module
i Emergency Stop button
Figure 1-301
2. Paper Folding Unit-A1
q Folding unit upper cover

w Folding unit
Figure 1-302
B. Cross Section
1. Finisher-B1
q w e r t y ui
!4 !3 !2 !1 !0 o
q Upper bin module i Path switching flapper

w Upper bin module guide bar o Leading edge stopper
e Side gripper !0 Stacker tray
r Stapler !1 Stacker unit
t Front gripper !2 Lift wall
y Stack processing unit !3 Lower bin module guide bar
u Non-sort path switching flapper !4 Lower bin module
Figure 1-303
2. Paper Folding Unit-A1
q w e r t
!1 !0 o i u y
q No. 2 stopper u No. 1 stopper

(A3/279.4 × 431.8 mm or 11” × 17”) (A3/279.4 × 431.8 mm or 11” × 17”)
w No. 2 stopper (B4) i No. 1 stopper (B4)
e Inlet flapper o Folding roller A
r Pressure roller !0 Folding roller C
t Skew correcting roller !1 No. 2 folding roller
y Folding roller B
Figure 1-304
IV. Operating the Machine
A. Control Panel
q w e
Figure 1-401
Ref. Name Description

1 Contrast adjusting dial • Use it to adjust the brightness of the display.
2 Display • Normally, remains off. Touch the screen to bring up the
guide screen for instructions on how to supply staples.
• Shows how to remove jams in response to a jam in the
finisher.
3 Access key • Use it to open the access door.
Table 1-401
B. Adjusting the Brightness

of the Touch Panel
Display
1) Open the bin cover.
2) If the display is off, touch it so that the

? key appears.
3) Turn the Contrast adjusting dial to

adjust the brightness of the display.
• To make it brighter,
Turn the dial counterclockwise.
CONTRAST
• To make it darker,
Turn the dial clockwise.
CONTRAST
4) Close the bin cover.
C. Making User Mode Settings

Reference:
Connecting the finisher will add ‘feed staple’ and ‘set staple width’ functions to settings
items of the copier’s user mode.
1. Staple Feed Function

Whenever you have removed a staple jam, you must execute the staple punch
function.
For instructions, see E. “Removing Staple Jams in the Stapler.”
2. Set Staple Width Function

In the set staple width function, you can specify the intervals (A) of double stapling in
units of 1 mm (1/8 in).
Rang: 40 to 160 mm (1-5/8 to 6-1/6 in)
Default: 120 mm (4-5/8 in)
Figure 1-402
Additional Function
1) Press the key on the control panel. Reset
1 2
Guide
4 5
Additional Function
7 8
Interrupt
ID 0
2) Press the [CUSTOM SETTING] key.
3) Press s / t until ‘change width of

double stapling’ appears.
4) Press + or – , and enter the appro-

priate stapling width; then, press
OK .
• You may press ‘inch’ to enter the
width in inches.
5) When done, press the [END] key.
D. Supplying the Stapler

with Staples
The display of the copier’s control
panel shows a message when the stapler
runs out of staples. Perform the following
steps to supply it with staples.
Caution:
You must be sure that the message
has appeared before performing the
following steps. Otherwise, do not
remove the staple cartridge, as such
is likely to cause damage.
Reference:
You may use the finisher’s display to
find out how to go about supply
staples. Press the display; when the
? key has appeared, press ‘how to
supply staples’.
1) Open the upper cover.
2) Release the stapler locking lever.
3) Remove the empty staple cartridge.
Caution:
Do not remove any staples remaining
inside the stapler unit.
4) Obtain a new staple cartridge.

Remove the transparent cover from
the new staple cartridge.
5) Set the new staple cartridge.
6) Lock the stapler locking lever in

position.
Reference:
Shift up the lever until you hear a click,
indicating that the lever has been
secured in position.
7) Open the front door.
8) Remove the staple chip case.

Dispose of the staple chips collected
inside the case.
Reference:
• Be sure to dispose of the staple chips
whenever you have supplied staples.
(Otherwise, they can overflow.)
• You can remove the staple chip case
when the stack processing unit is at
home position.
If the stack processing unit is not at
home position, close all doors of the
finisher, and turn off and then on the
copier.
9) Set the staple chip case.

Be sure to push it in until a click is
heard.
10) Close the front door.
11) Close the upper cover.
E. Removing Jammed Staples

The control display of the copier’s
control panel shows a message in
response to a staple.
You can suspect a staple jam if
stapling operation fails.
Perform the following steps, making
sure to remove all staple jams.
1) Touch the touch panel, and press the

? key when it has appeared.
2) Press ‘if stapling fails’.
3) Press ‘move bin’.
Reference:
Be sure to close the bin cover. The
bins will not shift if it is open.
5) Holding the grip, move the staple unit.

Move it until t and s match.
6) Release the stapler locking lever.
7) Remove all staple jams.
8) Lock the stapler locking lever.

• Shift up the lever until a click is
heard, indicating that the lever has
been secured in place.
Caution:
You must always execute ‘feed sta-
ple’ as follows whenever you have
removed staple jams.
Additional Function
10) Press the key on the copier’s Reset
1 2
control panel.
Guide
4 5
Additional Function
7 8
Interrupt
ID 0
11) Press ‘adjust/clean’.
12) Select [REPOSITIONING STAPLES].
13) Press ‘start’.

Copy paper will automatically be
drawn in from the tray, and stapled
five times.
The display returns to the Basic
screen when the ‘feed staple’ function
has ended.
Reference:
• Paper in the side tray top will be
given priority.
• The sheets used in the feed staple
function will not be counted.
14) Press the Access key, and open the

access key. Then, remove the stapled
sheet.
Reference:
If the paper on the copier’s tray is A3
only, A3 paper will be used for stapling.
If such is the case, open the bin cover
when removing the stapled paper.
F. Removing Paper Jams

A message will appear in response to a paper jam in the finisher, indicating the
location of the jam and how to remove it.
When the message has appeared, check both copier and finisher for a paper jam.
q Paper Jam at F2, F3, or F4 t Paper Jam at F6, F7, F8, o F9
w Paper Jam at F10 or F11 y Paper Jam at F13 or F15
e Paper Jam at F13 u Paper Jam at F15
r Paper Jam on the Stack Tray i Paper Jam behind the Bin Cover
1. Paper Jam at F2, F3, or F4

Suspect a paper jam at either of the
locations indicated on the display.
Perform the following steps to remove the
jam.
2) Slide out F1.
3) Open F2/F3/F4, and remove the

paper jam.
• A jam at F2.
• A jam at F3.
• A jam at F4.
4) Slide in F1 with care until stops.
2. Paper Jam at F6, F7, F8, or F9

jam.
2) Slide out F5.
3) Open F6/F7/F8/F9, and remove the

paper jam.
• A jam at F6.
• A jam at F7.
• A jam at F8.
• A jam at F9.
4) Slide in F5 until it stops.
3. Paper Jam at F10/F11

jam.
1) Open the upper cover.
2) Remove the paper jam.
3) Remove the paper jam trapped in the

delivery slot of the non-sort tray.
• If more than half of the paper has
been delivered, turn the knob in the
direction of the arrow when remo-
ving it.
• If more than half of the paper

remains inside the machine, open
F10 to remove it.
4) Lift F11, and remove the paper jam.
4. Paper Jam at F13 or F15

jam.
Reference:
The side to work on varies depending
on whether the stack tray is at top or
bottom position.
1) Open the upper cover or the front

door.
• If the stack tray is at top position,
q Open the upper cover.
w Open F12.
• If the stack tray is at bottom position,

Open the front door.
2) Turn F15 in the direction of the arrow.
3) Push in F14 until s and t match.
5) Close the upper cover or the front

door.
q Close F12.
w Close the upper cover.

Close the front door.
5. Paper Jam at F13

Perform the following to remove the jam.
Reference:
bottom position.
1) Open the upper cover or the front

door.
q Open the upper cover.
w Open F12.

Open the front door.
2) Push in F14 unti s and t match.
4) Close the upper cover or the front

door.
q Close F12.
w Close the upper cover.

Close the front position.
6. Paper Jam at F15

jam.
Reference:
bottom position.

7. Paper Jam on the Stack Tray

Suspect a paper jam at the location
indicated on the display. Perform the fol-
lowing steps to remove the jam.
8. Paper Jam Behind the Bin Cover

Suspect a paper jam at the location
indicated on the display. Perform the
following steps to remove the jam.
Reference:
If the paper is trapped at the rear and
cannot be removed easily, see 9.
“Paper jam at the Rear of the Sort Bin.”
• A jam in an upper bin.
• A jam in a lower bin.
9. Paper Jam at the Rear of the Sort

Bin
At times, paper gets trapped at the
rear of the bin (finisher) and cannot be
easily removed. If such is the case,
perform the following steps to remove the
paper jam.
1) Press [NEXT STEP] key on the dis-

play.
3) Find out the interval of the bins and

the position of the bin in question.
• If the jam is farther up than the close
interval bins,
Jammed paper
Press the s key so that the bin in

question will lower to the wide
interval bins.
Caution:
Be sure to close the bin cover.
Otherwise, you cannot move the
bins.
• If the jam is farther down than the

wide interval bins.
Jammed paper
Press the s key so that the bin in

question will rise to the wide interval
bins.
Caution:
Be sure to close the bin cover.
Otherwise, you cannot move the
bins.
10. Paper jam in the Folder

Steps to perform to remove a paper jam varies depending on whether Z-folding was
selected or not.
1. In Non Z-Fold Mode

Suspect a paper jam in the location
indicated on the display on the control
panel. Perform the following steps to
remove the jam.
1) Open the upper cover of the folder.
2) Open F12, and remove the paper

jam.
3) Close the upper cover of the folder.
2. In Z-Fold Mode
Suspect a paper jam in the location
indicated on the display of the control
panel. Perform the following to remove
the paper jam.
1) Open the upper cover of the folder.
2) Slide out unit 11.

• If the paper jam is behind the left
cover,
q Open cover 14.
w Remove the paper jam.
e Close cover 14.
• If the paper jam is behind the right

cover,
q Open cover 13.
w Remove the paper jam.
e Close cover 13.
4) Push in unit 11.
5) Close the upper cover of the folder.
CHAPTER 2
OPERATIONS AND TIMING
In outline diagrams, represents mechanical drive paths, and indicates electrical sig-
nal paths.
Signals in digital circuits are identified as ‘1’ for High and ‘0’ for Low. The voltage of signals, how-
ever, depends on the circuit.
Nearly all operations of the product are controlled by a microprocessor; the internal workings of the
processor are not relevant to the serviceman’s work and, therefore, are left out of the discussions. By
the same token, no repairs are prescribed for the PCBs at the user’s premises; for this reason, PCBs
are discussed by means of block diagrams rather than circuit diagrams.
For the purpose of explanation, discussions are divided into the following: from sensors to DC con-
troller PCB input ports; from DC controller output ports to loads; and minor control circuits and functions.
I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION ........................2-1 E. Front Gripper Drive System ...........2-128
A. Functional Construction .....................2-1 F. Jams ..............................................2-150
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry .......2-2 G. Sequence of Operations ................2-157
C. Inputs to the Finisher Controller VI. STACKER UNIT ...................................2-159
PCB....................................................2-3 A. Outline............................................2-159
D. Outputs from the Finisher Controller B. Stacker Unit Up/Down Drive
PCB .................................................2-13 System ...........................................2-160
E. Communication between Copier and C. Stacker Tray Drive System ............2-170
Finisher ............................................2-20 D. Leading Edge Stopper Drive
II. BASIC OPERATION ..............................2-21 System ...........................................2-183
A. Outline..............................................2-21 E. Lift Wall Drive System....................2-186
B. Basic Operation ...............................2-26 F. Emergency Stop Button .................2-190
C. Emergency Operation Mode ............2-33 G. Internal Lamp .................................2-192
III. FEEDING DRIVE SYSTEM ...................2-38 H. Sequence of Operations ................2-193
A. Outline..............................................2-38 VII. CONTROL PANEL ...............................2-195
B. Feeding Path....................................2-40 A. Outline............................................2-195
C. Controlling the Feeding Speed ........2-42 B. Operation .......................................2-195
D. Controlling the Feeding Motor .........2-44 VIII. POWER SUPPLY.................................2-198
E. Paddle ..............................................2-47 A. Outline of the Power Supply ..........2-198
F. Limitless Sorting...............................2-49 B. Power Supply Circuit .....................2-199
G. Overstacking ....................................2-53 C. Protection Mechanisms for the Power
H. Jams ................................................2-57 Supply Circuit.................................2-202
IV. BIN UNIT DRIVE SYSTEM....................2-67 D. DC Power Supply Rated Outputs ..2-202
A. Outline..............................................2-67 IX. PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1 .................2-203
B. Bin Unit ............................................2-69 A. Outline............................................2-203
C. Controlling the Guide Bar ................2-85 B. Outline of the Electrical Circuit ......2-204
D. Controlling the Bin Cover.................2-89 C. Inputs to and Outputs from the Paper
V. STACK PROCESSING UNIT .................2-91 Folding Unit....................................2-205
A. Outline..............................................2-91 D. Basic Operations............................2-207
B. Up/Down Drive System....................2-92 E. Feeding Drive System ...................2-209
C. Side Gripper Drive System ..............2-99 F. Detecting Jams ..............................2-219
D. Stapler Unit Drive G. Power Supply.................................2-222
System ...........................................2-113
I. BASIC CONSTRUCTION
A. Functional Construction
The finisher may be broadly divided into nine functional blocks: control panel,
common feeding drive system, upper feeding drive system, lower feeding drive system,
stack processing drive system, stacker drive system, upper bin module drive system,
lower bin module drive system, and control system.
Control
panel
Upper feeding
drive system
Upper bin module
drive system
Stack processing
drive system
Lower bin module

drive system
Stacker drive system
Control system
Lower feeder
drive system Common feeding drive system
Figure 2-101
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

The finisher’s electrical mechanisms are controlled by the finisher controller PCB.
The major functions of the IC on the finisher controller PCB are as shown in Table 2-101.
The finisher is equipped with two CPUs (IC1, IC8) used to control operating sequences,
each with its own areas of control, and both ICs use a communication IC to control
various operations.
Notation Type Description

IC1 CPU Controls sequence (feeding drive system, bin module drive
system).
IC8 CPU Controls sequence (stack processing unit drive system,
stacker unit drive system).
IC2 ROM Holds programs for sequence (feeding drive system, bin
module drive system).
IC9 ROM Holds programs for sequence (stack processing unit drive
system, stacker unit drive system).
IC3 RAM Stores sensor adjustment values and operating modes.
IC10 RAM Stores sensor adjustment values and operating modes.
IC6 Communication IC Controls communication between IC7 and copier (IPC
communication 2).
IC7 Communication IC Controls communication with IC6.
Table 2-101
Lamp
Sensor
Finisher controller PCB
Sensor
Switch
IC1 CPU IC8 CPU Stack processing Motor
unit driver PCB
Switching PCB
(for service mode) Solenoid
IC2 IC9 Brake

IC803 ROM ROM
CPU
IC804 IC3 IC10 Sensor

ROM RAM RAM
IC806 Motor
RAM IC6 IC7
LCD controller Communication IC Communication IC
PCB Solenoid
LCD touch Brake

panel switch
Copier
Figure 2-102
C. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB

Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (1/10)
SW4 J632 J631

C -1 -1 -1 J3-1 +24V
Access door -1
switch When the access cover
NO -2 -2 -2 -2 24VP is closed, 24 VP is supplied.
-2
J604 +5V
-3 -3 J11-A2
PI 2
-1 -1 -A1 NSPD
Non-sort path When paper is present, '1'.
paper sensor -2 -2 -B20
+5V
-6 -6 -B18
PI 3
Upper path -4 -4 -B19 UPD 1 When paper is present '1'.
paper sensor 1 -5 -5 -A3
+5V
PI 4 -9 -9 -A5
-7 -7 -A4
Upper path UPD 2 When paper is present '1'.
paper sensor 2 -8 -8 -B17
+5V
PI 5 -12 -12 -B15
-10 -10 -B16
Upper path
-11 -A6
UPD 3 When paper is present '1'.
-11
sensor 3 +5V
Upper path PI 6 -15 -15 -A8
-13 -13 -A7
residual URP 1 When paper is present '1'.
+5V
-18 -18 -B12
Upper path PI 7
-16 -16 -B13
residual paper URP 2 When paper is present '1'.
-17 -17 -A9
sensor 2 +5V
-21 -21 -A11
PI 8
Non-sort tray -19 -19 -A10
paper sensor
NSD When paper is present '1'.
-20 -20 -B11
J606 +5V
-3 -3 J11-A14
PI 9
Common path -1 -1 -B10
paper sensor 1
CPD1 When paper is present '1'.
-2 -2 -A12
+5V
-6 -6 -A14
PI 10
Common path -4 -4 -A13 CPD2 When paper is present '1'.
Figure 2-103
+5V
J626
-12 J25-B5
Lower path PI 12
-10 -B6 LPD1 When paper is present '1'.
paper sensor 1 -11 -A21
+5V
J629
PI 13 -3 -A11
Lower path -1 -A10 LPD2 When paper is present '1'.
paper sensor 2 -2 -B15
+5V
J630
PI 14 -3 -B20
Lower path -1 -B21 When paper is present '1'.
paper sensor 3
LPD3
-2 -A6
+5V
PI 15 -6 -A8
Lower path -4 -A7 LPD4 When paper is present '1'.
paper sensor 4 -5 -B19
+5V
J626
Vertical path PI 16 -3 -A17
residual paper -1 -A16 VRP1 When paper is present '1'.
sensor 1 -2 -B10
+5V
PI 17 -6 -B8
Vertical path
residual paper -4 -B9 VRP2 When paper is present '1'.
sensor 2 -5 -A18
+5V
PI 18 -9 -A20
Vertical path
-7 -A19 VRP3 When paper is present '1'.
residual paper
-8 -B7
sensor 3 +5V
J627
Lower path PI 19 -6 -A14
residual paper -4 -A13 LRP1 When paper is present '1'.
sensor 1 -5 -B13
+5V
PI 20 -9 -B11
Lower path
residual paper -7 -B12 LRP2 When paper is present '1'.
sensor 2 -8 -A15
+5V
PI 21 -B17
Lower path
-B18 LRP3 When paper is present '1'.
residual paper
-A9
sensor 3
Figure 2-104
+5V
Upper bin J12-A8
PI 23
upper limit -A7
UBUL When the upper bin module
sensor -B7
+5V reaches the upper limit, '1'.
Upper bin PI 24 J9-A2

lower limit -A1
-B7
UBLL When the upper bin module
sensor reaches the upper limit, '1'.
+5V
Lower bin PI 25 -B5
upper limit -B6
LBUL When the lower bin module
sensor -A3
+5V reaches the upper limit, '1'.
Lower bin J19-A5
PI 26
lower limit -A4
-B7
LBLL When the lower bin module
sensor
+5V reaches the lower limit, '1'.
Upper lead PI 27 J12-B5
cam level -B6
-A9
ULCL When the upper lead cam is
sensor
+5V at the level section, '1'.
(The light-blocking plate is
Upper lead PI 28 -B9 at the sensor.)
cam No. 2 -B10
-A5
ULCL2 When the upper lead cam is
level sensor
+5V at the No. 2 level section, '0'.
Lower lead PI 29 J19-B8 not at the sensor.)
cam level -B9 LLCL When the lower lead cam is
sensor -A3 at the level section, '1'.
+5V (The light-blocking plate is
Lower lead -A9 at the sensor.)
PI 30
cam No. 2 -A8
-B3
LLCL2 When the lead cam is at the
level sensor No. 2 level section, '0'.
+5V
Upper bin shift PI 31 J12-A11 not at the sensor.)
motor clock -A10
-B4
UBCLK Pulses according to the speed
sensor
+5V of the upper bin shift motor.
Lower bin shift PI 32 J19-A2
motor clock -A1
sensor -B10
LBCLK Pulses according to the speed
+5V of the lower bin shift motor.
J607
Upper bin PI 33 -3 J12-B2
guide bar home -1 -B3
-2 -A12
UGBHP When the upper bin guide
position sensor bar is at home position, '1'.
Figure 2-105
+5V
Lower bin guide PI 34 J19-B5
bar home -B6 LGBHP When the lower bin guide bar
position sensor -A6 is at home position, '1'.
+5V
J605
Stacker unit PI 35 -3 J11-B6
UP position -1 -B7 When the stacker unit is at
STUP UP position, '0'.
sensor -2 -A15
+5V
Stacker unit PI 36 J25-A5
home position -A4 STHP When the stacker unit is at
sensor -B22 home position, '0'.
+5V
Stacker unit PI 37 -B23
DOWN position -B24 STLP When the stacker unit is at
sensor -A3 DOWN position, '0'.
+5V
Stacker unit PI 38 -A2
lower limit -A1 STLL When the stacker unit
sensor -B25 reaches the lower limit, '1'.
+5V
J636 J634
PI 39 -5 -12 J5-B8
Lift wall UP -3 -10 -B9 When the lift wall is at UP
position sensor -A6
TWTOP position, '1'.
-4 -11
+5V
PI 40 -8 -15 -A8
Lift wall home -6 -13 -A7 When the lift wall is at home
position sensor -B7
TWHP position, '1'.
-7 -14
+5V
-11 -22 -B3
PI 41
Stacker SET -9 -20 -B4 When the stacker is at SET
sensor -21 -A11
STS position, '0'.
-10
+5V
J635
Stacker tray PI 42 -7 -25 -A13
-5 -23 -A12 STTUL When the stacker tray
upper limit
-6 -24 -B2 reaches the upper limit, '1'.
sensor
J141 J140 +5V

Stacker
+5V +5V J639 J638
-3 -6 -1 -1 -1 -A1 When the stacker tray
tray PI 43
-1 -5 -2 -2 -2 -B13 reaches home position, '1'.
home STTHP
position -2
sensor +5V
-12
Stacker PI 44 When paper is present on
-10 -2 -5 -5 -5 -A3 STTPD
tray paper the stacker tray, '1'.
-11 -1 -6 -6 -6 -B11
sensor
Stacker tray
relay PCB
Figure 2-106
Stacker tray relay PCB

J141 J140 +5V
Stacker
+5V +5V J639 J638 J634
-6 -6 -1 -1 -1 J5-A1 Pulses according to the
tray shift PI 45 -4 -4 -3 -3 -3 -A2 STICLKA
clock speed of the upward
-5 -1 -6 -6 -6 -B11 movement of the stacker
sensor A +5V tray.
J637
Leading edge PI 46 -9 -9 -A5
stopper home -7 -7 -A4 When the front end
-8 -B10
LESHP
position sensor -8 stopper is at home
+5V position, '1'.
J628
-3 J25-B14
Stacker unit PI 47
-1 -B15 Pulses according to the
shift motor
-2 -A12
STCLK
clock sensor speed of the stacker unit
shift motor.
Stack processing unit driver PCB
J106 +5V
J647
Side gripper -7 -B23 J104 J8
PI 48
grip home -5 -B24 -B16 -B16 SGGHP When the gripper assembly
position sensor -6 -A3 of the side gripper is at
+5V home position, '0'.
-10 -A2
PI 49
Side gripper -8 -A1 -A17 -A17 When paper is present
-9 -B25
SGPD
paper sensor at the side gripper, '1'.
+5V
Side gripper -A5
PI 50
left/right shift -A4 -A3 -A3 When the side gripper is
home position -B22
SG(x)HP
at home position for
sensor +5V left/right shifting, '0'.
Side gripper -B20
PI 51
-B21 -B9 -B9 SGMFD When the light-blocking
motor error
-A6 plate is at the sensor, '0'.
sensor +5V
J646
Bin rear end -5 -A12
PI 52
wall OPEN -3 -A11 -B6 -B6 BRP0 When the bin rear end wall
position -4 -B15 is at OPEN position, '0'.
sensor +5V
Bin rear end -8 -B13
PI 53
wall CLOSE -6 -B14 -A13 -A13 BRPC When the bin rear end wall
position sensor -7 -A13 is at CLOSE position, '0'.
J107 +5V
Front gripper -B1
PI 54
left/right shift -B2 -B8 -B8 FG(X)CLK Pulses according to the
motor clock -A8 speed of the front gripper
sensor
left-right shift motor.
Figure 2-107

Stack processing unit driver PCB Finisher controller PCB
J106 +5V
Front gripper PI 55 -B10 J104 J8
left/right shift -B11 -B15 -B15 FG(X)HP When the front gripper is
home position -A16 at home position for
sensor +5V left/right shifting, ’0’.
-A15
Front gripper PI 56
-A14 -B4 -B4 FG(X)LL When the front gripper
left/right shift
left limit sensor -B12 reaches the left limit of
J107 +5V left/right shifting, ’0’.
-B4
Front gripper PI 57
-B5 -A14 -A14 When the front gripper
left/right shift FG(X)RL
right limit sensor -A5 reaches the right limit of
J120B J120A J108 +5V left/right shifting, ’0’.
-8 -8 -A10
Front gripper PI 58
-23 -23 -A9 -A15 -A15 FG(X)S When the front gripper is
left/right shift
safety sensor -24 -24 -B5 within the safety zone for
+5V left/right shifting, ’0’.
Front gripper -15 -15 -B6
front/rear shift PI 59
-19 -19 -B7 -A11 -A11 FG(Y)CLK Pulses according to the
motor clock -16 -16 -A8 speed of the front gripper
sensor +5V front/rear shift motor.
Front gripper PI 60 -4 -4 -B9
front/rear shift -13 -13 -B10 -A4 -A4 FG(Y)HP When the front gripper is
home position -12 -12 -A5 at home position for
sensor +5V front/rear shifting, ’0’.
Relay PCB2
Relay PCB1
-11 J121A -11 -A4

Front gripper PI 61
-9 -9 -A3 -B3 -B3 FG(Y)FL When the front gripper
front/rear shift
front limit sensor -10 -10 -B11 reaches the front limit for
J122B +5V front/rear shifting, ’0’.
-7 -7 -A7
Front gripper PI 62
-17 -17 -A6 -A16 -A16 FG(Y)S When the front gripper is
front/rear shift
-14 -14 -B8 within the safety zone for
safety sensor
+5V front/rear shifting, ’0’.
J122B
-3 -20 -B1
Front gripper PI 63 -4 -6 -B2 -B14 -B14 FGGHP When the gripper assembly
grip home
-8 -21 A13 of the front gripper is at
position sensor
+5V home position, ’0’.
J122B
-6 -5 -B3
PI 64
Front gripper -5 -3 -A11 -B10 -B10 FGPD When paper is present at
paper sensor -7 -22 -A12 the front gripper, ’1’.
J106 +5V
-A18
Stapler front/rear PI 65
-A17 -B7 -B7 STP(Y)CLK Pulses according to the
shift motor clock
sensor -B9 speed of the stapler
J112 +5V front/rear shift motor.
-A6
Stapler front/rear PI 66
-A4 -A5 -A5 STP(Y)HP When the stapler is at
shift home
position sensor -B5 home position for front/rear
shifting, ’0’.
Figure 2-108

J112 +5V
Front gripper PI 67 -B3 J104 J8
shift enable -B1 -B2 -B2 FGSE When the stapler is within the
sensor -A2 J105 J7 shifting range of the front
-24 -24 gripper, '0'.
J466 J643
-3 -8 -B1 J104 J8
Stapler PI 68
-1 -7 -A4 -A8 -A8 STPPE When paper moves to the
leading edge -2 -6 -B2 sensor, '0'.
paper sensor +5V
J642 J107
Stack -3 -A4
PI 69
processing unit -1 -A3 -A12 -A12
shift motor
SPCLK Pulses according to the
-2 -B6 speed of the stack
clock sensor J106 +5V processing unit.
J645
Stack PI 70 -3 -B7
processing unit -1 -B8 -B13 -B13 SPHP When the stack processing
home position -2 -A19 unit is at home position, '0'.
sensor +5V
Stack PI 71 -6 -A24
processing unit -4 -A23 -A2 -A2 SPTP When the stack processing
upper limit -5 -B3 unit reaches the upper
sensor +5V limit, '1'.
Stack PI 72 -9 -B4
processing unit -7 -B5
Logic circnit
lower limit -8 -A22

sensor J107 +5V -B5 -B5 STA When the stack processing
Stacker unit PI 73 -A7 unit reaches the lower limit or
NEAR -A6 moves near the stacker unit, '1'.
POSITION -B3
sensor
+5V
J602
-13 J11-B3
PI 74
Upper cover -11 -B4 UCO1 When the upper cover is
sensor 1 -12 -A18 closed, '1'.
+5V
J610
-20 J16-B4
PI 75
Upper cover -18 -B5 UCO2 When the upper cover is
sensor 2 -19 -A12 closed, '0'.
+5V
-17 -A11
PI 76
Bin cover -15 -A10 BCO When the bin cover is
sensor -16 -B6 closed, '0'.
+5V
J11-A17
PI 77
Front door -A16 When the front door is
-B5
FCO closed, '0'.
sensor
Figure 2-109

+5V
J611 J610
-3 -23 J16-A14
PI 78
Screen -2 -21 -A13 SC When the screen is set, '0'.
sensor -1 -22 -B3

J106 +5V
J645
Stack -12 -A21 J104 J8 When the stack processing
processing unit PI 79 -10 -A20 -A2 -A6 unit is at DOWN position, '0'.
DOWN position -11
SPLP
-B6
sensor
+5V
J614 J610
-12 -27 J16-B1
PI 80
Access door -11 -25 -B2 When the access door is
TODD
sensor -10 -26 -A15 closed, '0'.
Stacker tray
J141 relay PCB J140 +5V
+5V +5V J639 J638 J634
Stacker -9 -6 -1 -1 -1 J5-A1
tray shift PI 81 -7 -4 -4 -4 -4 -B12 STTCLKB Pulses according to the
clock -8 -1 -6 -6 -6 -B11
sensor B up/down operation of the
stacker tray.
Stapler unit Stack processing unit driver PCB
PHOI 1
Staple sensor J643-3 J111-A2 J104-A9 J8-A9

STPE When staples are
present, '0'.
PHOI 2 -2 -B4 -A10 -A10
STPHP When the stapler is at home
position, '0'.
Stapler home
position sensor
+5V
J12-A6 LED1D When '1', LED1 turns
LED1 on.
(light-emitting) -B8
Upper bin
paper sensor J601 -2 J9-B1
PT1 UBIP When paper is present in
(light-receiving) the upper bin, '1'.
-1 -A4
+5V
J9-B3 LED2D When '1', LED2 turns
LED2 on.
Lower bin
paper sensor J601 -4 J19-A7
PT2 LBIP When paper is present in
(light-receiving) the lower bin, '1'.
-3 -B2
Figure 2-110
J105 J7
+5V
J106-A8 -23 -23 LED3D When '1', LED3 turns
LED3 on.
Edge feeding J104 J8
J487-2 J106-B19
sensor -B11 -B11 When paper reaches
PT3 PED
the sensor, '0'.
(light-receiving) -1 -A7
J105 J7
+5V
J488 J106-A9 LED4D When '1', LED4 turns
-1 -21 -21
LED4 on.
(light-emitting) -2 -B17
Paper surface J104 J8
1 sensor J107-B8 -B12 -B12 PF1 When paper surface is
PT4 detected, '0'.
(light-receiving)
-A1
J105 J7
+5V
-3 -22 -22
LED5 on.
-4
Paper surface J104 J8
2 sensor J107-B7 -A7 -A7 PF2
PT5 When paper surface is
(light-receiving) detected, '0'.
-A2
+5V
J635 J634 J5-B5 LED6D When '1', LED6 turns
-1 -18
LED6 on.
(light-emitting) -A10
-2 -19
Stack sensor
-4 -17 -A9
PT6 PD When paper surface is
(light-receiving) -16 -B6 detected, '1'.
-3
+5V
-1
LED7 on.
-2
Upper bin
outside paper J601 J9-B5
-6 UBOP When paper is present
sensor PT7
between upper bin
(light-receiving) -A6
-5 module and feeding
+5V assembly, '1'.
-8 -B1 LED8D When '1', LED8 turns
LED8 on.
(light-emitting) -7 -A7
Lower bin
J601
outside paper -8 J19-B2
sensor PT8 LBOP When paper is present
(light-receiving) -7 -A10 between lower module
and feeding assembly,
'1'.
Figure 2-111
J802 Finisher controller PCB

J616
Control LCD
J803 J801 J18
panel controller
J804 PCB Checks are not possible in the field.
J617
J806-1
-2
J805-1
-2
-3
J956-1
-2
LCD contrast
adjusting volume
Back light J955-1 -3
-2 VR101
power supply -2 -1
J617
J305 J615 J17
Switching PCB
(for service mode)
Checks are not possible in the field.
J612 J610
-1 -1 J16-A1
-2 -2 -B15
Bin unit processing
-3 -3 -A2 At the end of copying, '1'.
end indicator PCB
-4 -4 -B14
-5 -5 -A3
-6 -6 -B7
J614
Stacker unit status -1 -7 J16-B11 When the Stack Tray Access indicator is
indicator PCB -2 -8 -A6 on, '1'.
-3 -9 -B10 When the access key is pressed, '1'.
-4 -10 -A7 When the access key is on, '1'.
-5 -11 -B9 When stack level 5 is on, '1'.
-6 -12 -A8 When stack level 4 is on, '1'.
Stacker access -8 -14 -A9 When stack level 2 is on, '1'.
switch (PSW1) -9 -15 -B7 When stack level 1 is on, '1'.
J23
Paper folding unit
J24 For details, see p. 2-NA.
Copier J15
Figure 2-112
D. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (1/7)

J521 J603
-1 -1 J10-6 +24VP
Non-sort path
switching SL1 -2 -5
-2
solenoid *
SL1D When '0', SL1 turns on.
J522 J606 +24VP

-1 -7 -2
Path switching SL2
solenoid -2 -8 -1
*
SL2D When '0', SL2 turns on.
J523 J613 J614 J620 +24VP

-1 -1 -13 -1 J20-1
SL3 -2 -2 -14 -2 -2
When '0', SL3 turns on.
Access door solenoid
*
SL3D
J525 J602 +24VP

-1 -1 J10-8
Upper paddle SL5
solenoid -2 -2 -7 SL5D
* When '0', SL5 turns on.
J526 +24VP
-1 J23-10
Lower paddle
solenoid
SL6 -2 -9
When '0', SL6 turns on.
*
SL6D
Stack
processing unit
driver PCB
J527 J647 +24V
-1 -1 J101-6
SL7 -2 -2 -5
J7-11 SL7D
Paper
holding solenoid Q20 J105-11 * When '0', SL7 turns on.
J528 J620 +24VP

-1 -3 J20-3
Bin cover
holding SL8 -2 -4 -4 SL8D
solenoid * When '0', SL8 turns on.
J529 J639 J638 J633 +24VP

-1 -7 -7 -1 J4-1
SL9 -3 -8 -8 -2 -2 SL9D
* When '0', SL9 turns on.
Stacker
holding solenoid
Figure 2-113
J530 +24VP
-1 J22-3
Stacker unit
shift brake 1 BK1 -2 -4
BK1D* When '0', BK1 turns on.
(The brake is released.)
Stack
processing unit
driver PCB
Stack J531 J514 +24V
-1 -3 J110-7
processing
unit shift BK2 -2 -4 -8
brake 1
J7-5 BK2D
Q19 J105-5
* When '0', BK2 turns on.
(The brake is released.)
J532 +24VP
Stack J23-19
processing BK3 -20
unit shift BK3D* When '0', the brake (BK3)
brake 2 turns on. (The brake is
J524 +24VP released.)
-21
Stacker unit
shift brake 2
BK4 -22
BK4D* When '0', the brake (BK4)
turns on. (The brake is
released.)
J533 J602 +24VP
-1 -3 J10-10
Upper path CL1
roller clutch -4 -4 -9
CL1D* When '0', CL1 turns on.
J534 J606 +24VP
-1 -9 J10-4
Lower path
roller clutch CL2 -4 -10 -3 CL2D
* When '0', CL2 turns on.
Lamp 1
(LP1) +12V
J535
-1 J112-7
-2 -8 J105-31 J7-31
LP1D* When '0', LP1 turns on.
-32 -32
Stack
processing unit
driver PCB
Figure 2-114
J501 J602 +24VP

-1 -5 J10-14
-4 -8 -12
+5V
-3 -7 -15
Common M1 -7 -10 -13
path feeding For details, see p. 2-44.
-5 -9 -16
motor
-2 -6 -11
J502C J502B J603

-1 -1
-2 -2 J502A +24VP
-3 -3 -1 -3 J10-18
-4 -4 -8 -10 -23
Upper +5V
-5 -5 -3 -5 -20
Upper path path
-6 -6 feeding -4 -6 -19
feeding motor M2 -7 -7 -5 -7
motor -22 For details, see p. 2-45.
-8 -8 controller -6 -8 -21
-9 -9 PCB -7 -9 -24
-10 -10 -2 -4 -17
-11 -11
-12 -12
J503 +24VP
-1 J23-12
-4 -14
+5V
-3 -13
Lower path -6 -15
feeding motor M3 -5 -16
For details, see p. 2-46.
-8 -17
-7 -18
-2 -11
J504
-1 J13-2
Upper bin M4 For details, see p. 2-79.
shift motor -2 -1
J505
-1 J21-1
M5 For details, see p. 2-80.
Lower bin -2 -2
shift motor
Figure 2-115
J506
J12-A1
+24VP
-1
-2 -B13
-3 -A2
Upper bin module M6 -4 -B12 For details, see p. 2-87.
guide bar motor
-5 -A3
-6 -B11
J507 +24VP
-1 J20-5
-2 -6
-3 -7
Lower bin module
guide bar motor M7 -4 -8 For details, see p. 2-87.
-5 -9
-6 -10
Stack processing
unit driver PCB
J508
J101-12
+24VP
Side gripper -1
left/right shift -14
-2
motor
-3 -15
M8 -4 -17 For details,
-5 -16 see p. 2-106.
-6 -18
Side gripper J7
grip motor J8
J509 J647
-1 -3 J101-3 For details,
For details, pp. 2-106 (M8),
M9 see p. 2-109. -109 (M9), and -144 (M10).
-2 -4 -4 J104
J105
J510 +24V
Front gripper -1 J110-1
left/right shift -2 -2
motor
-3 -3
M10 -4 -4 For details,
see p. 2-144.
-5 -5
-6 -6
Figure 2-116
Stack processing
unit driver PCB Finisher controller PCB
J511 J120B J120A J108
-1 -25 -26 -B13 For details,
M11 see p. 2-134.
-2 -26 -25 -A1
Relay PCB 2
Relay PCB 1
Front gripper
front/rear shift
motor
J512 J122B J120A J108 For details,

-1 -1 -2 -A2 see p. 2-147.
M12 -B12
-2 -2 -1
For details, see pp. 2-134(M11),

Front gripper J513 +24V -147(M12), -125(M13),and -96(M14).
grip motor -1 J101-8
-2 -10
-3 -9 For details,
Stapler M13 -4 -11 see p. 2-125.
front/rear
shift motor -5 -7
-6 -13
J514
-2 J109-1 For details,
Stack M14 see p. 2-96.
-1 -2
processing
unit shift motor
J515
-1 J22-1
Stacker M15 -2 -2 For details, see p. 2-167.
unit shift
motor
J516 J639 J638 J633

-9 -9 -9 -3 J4-3
Stacker M16 For details, see p. 2-179.
tray shift -10 -10 -10 -4 -4
motor
Stack
processing unit
J646 J634 driver PCB
-2 -2 J101-1
Bin rear For details, For details, see p. 2-102.
end wall M17 -1 -1 -2
see p. 2-102.
open/close
motor
Figure 2-117

J518 J637 J633 +24V
-1 -1 -5 J4-5
-2 -2 -6 -6
-3 -3 -7 -7
M18 -8 For details, see p. 2-185.
-4 -4 -8
-5 -5 -9 -9
-6 -6 -10 -10
Leading edge
stopper motor
J519 J636 J633

-1 -1 -11 J4-11
M19 -2 -2 -12 -12
Lift wall shift motor
J520-1 J102-1 J105-8 J7-8

Drive
M20 For details, see p. 2-119.
-2 -2 circuit -9 -9
Stapler motor Stack processing

unit driver PCB
Stapler unit
J802 J618 J616

Control LCD controller
J803 J801 J18
panel PCB Checks are not possible in the field.
J804
J619 J617
J806-1
-2
J805-1
-2
-3
J956-1
-2
LCD contrast
adjusting volume
Back light J955-1 -3
-2 VR101
power supply -2 -1
J305 J617 J615

J17
Switching PCB Checks are not possible in the field.
(for service mode)
Figure 2-118
J612 J610
-1 -1 J16-A1
-2 -2 -B15
Bin unit processing -3 -3 -A2 When the copy end indicator turns
end indicator PCB -4 -4 -B14 on, '1'.
-5 -5 -A3
-6 -6 -B13
J614
Stacker unit state -1 -7 J16-B11 When the stack tray removal indicator
indicator PCB -2 -8 -A6 turns on, '1'.
-3 -9 -B10 When the access key is pressed, '1'.
-4 -10 -A7 When the access key is on, '1'.
-6 -12 -A8 When stack level 5 is on, '1'.
-7 -13 -B8 When stack level 3 is on, '1.
Stacker removal -8 -14 -A9 When stack level 2 is on, '1'.
switch (PSW1) -9 -15 -B7 When stack level 1 is on, '1'.
J23
Paper folding unit
J24 For details, see p. 2-204.
Copier J15
Figure 2-119
E. Communication between Copier and Finisher

1. Outline
The finisher exchanges status signals with the copier in IPC communication mode
(using communication ICs).
The status signals are first written in RAM on the finisher controller PCB, and are sent
out in response to control signals from the IPU (IC1).
When an error occurs in IPC communication, the copier’s self diagnosis function turns
on to indicate ‘E500’ or ‘E713’ on the copier’s control panel. (‘E501’ represents a
communication error within the finisher.)
The finisher’s IPC communication may be either IPC communication or IPC
communication 2, which provides a faster means of communication than the former.
IC1 CPU CPU
SSOUT
IC6
SSIN Communication IC
Communication IC
IC7
Communication IC
IC8 CPU
Finisher Copier
Figure 2-120
II. BASIC OPERATION
A. Outline
The finisher sorts, staples, or stacks the delivered copies according to the mode
selected on the copier’s control panel, operating in either of the following three major
modes:
1. Non-sort mode
2. Sort mode
3. Staple sort mode
1. Non-Sort Mode
The copies are delivered to the non-sort tray, and are not sorted.
Non-sort tray
Figure 2-201
2. Sort Mode/Staple Sort Mode
The copies are delivered to the bins; thereafter, they are moved to the stacker unit by
the stack processing unit.
Since the copies are sorted in these modes, the upper bin module or the lower bin
module moves up or down to suit the number of sets specified on the copier.
Stack processing unit

Sort bin
Stacker Unit
a. Upper Bin Module

Figure 2-202a
b. Lower Bin Module
Sort bin
Figure 2-202b
c. Stacker
Repeats for the upper six bins.
1) The copies delivered to the upper bins. 2) The copies in the upper bins are stapled. 3) The copies in the upper bins are moved to the stacker. 4) The copies in the upper bins are stacked. 5) Six sets of copies have been stacked.
Repeats for the lower six bins.
The copies are delivered to the lower bins

(while steps 2 through 5 above are being
performed). 6) The copies in the lower bins are stapled. 7) The copies in the lower bins are moved to the stacker. 8) The copies in the lower bins are stacked. 9) All 12 sets have been stacked.
Figure 2-202c
3. Circulating the Original
The finisher is equipped with two modules, each consisting of six bins. Each bin
module is capable of operating independently of each other so that six groups of copies
may be handled for each set.
When as many as six groups of copies must be processed, the finisher at times would
continue to operate after the copier finishes operation. To limit the period of such a type
of operation, the originals are circulated for specific numbers of times as noted in Table
2-201, so that the last original is circulated for, whenever possible, fewer than two sets
of copies.
Remaining sets Before 2nd last circulation Before last circulation Last circulation
1 – – 1
2 – – 2
3 – – 3
4 – – 4
5 – 3 2
6 – 4 2
7 – 5 2
8 – 6 2
9 – 6 3
10 – 6 4
11 6 3 2
12 6 4 2
13 6 5 2
14 6 6 2
Table 2-201
B. Basic Operation
The finisher operates as follows for each mode.
1. Non-Sort Mode
1) The copier’s Copy Start key is pressed.
2) The copy is delivered to the non-sort tray.
Non-sort tray
Figure 2-203
3) As many copies as set are delivered, and the operation is ended.
2. Sort mode/Staple Sort Mode
2) The guide bar swings to a point ‘paper size + 10 mm’.
Bin
(front) (rear)
Guide bar
Figure 2-204 (upper view)
3) For each delivery, the guide bar is moved to a point ‘+3mm* from paper edge’, and
the copies are put into order, and the bins are shifted by a single bin.
* Varies according to
operation mode.
Delivered copy
3mm
Guide bar
Figure 2-205
4) As many copies as set are made.*
Figure 2-206
5) The original is replaced, and reverse sorting is started.
Figure 2-207
6) Steps 3) through 5) are repeated for the number of originals.
7) The stack is put into order by the guide bar.

Delivered copies
Guide bar
Figure 2-208
8) The stack is held in position by the paper retaining arm, and clasped by the side
gripper.**
Guide bar Paper retaining arm

Delivered copies
Delivered copies
Side gripper
Side gripper
Figure 2-209
9) The bin rear end wall opens, and the stack is drawn out to stapling position by the
side gripper.
Side gripper
Side gripper
Stapler
Stapler Bin rear end wall Bin rear end wall
Figure 2-210
10) The stapler unit is moved to stapling position, and the stack is stapled (in staple
sort mode only).**
Side gripper
Stapler
Figure 2-211
11) The stack is clasped by the front gripper, and the side gripper releases the
stack.**
Side gripper
Stapler
Front gripper
Front ripper
Figure 2-212
12) The stack is moved to the stacker tray by the front gripper.**
Front gripper
Front gripper
Figure 2-213
13) The stack is released by the front gripper, and is dropped on the stacker tray. (The
stack of the second set and later consisting of even-number sets is dropped after
the front gripper has been moved about 20 mm from the previous stack.)**
Front gripper Stacks of 1st, 3rd, and 5th sets

Front gripper
20m
m
Stacker tray Stacks of 2nd, 4th,

and 6th sets
Figure 2-214
14) The bin rear end wall closes.**
15) The guide bar is moved to a point +7 mm from the edge of paper, and the bins
are shifted by a single bin.**
7mm
Figure 2-215
16) Steps 8) through 15) are performed for all stacks, and the operation is ended.
* If five or more sets are specified, six (varying according to selected count) sets will
be delivered to the upper module; then, the remaining sets will be delivered to the
lower module while the sets in the upper module are being stapled and stacked.
** The stacker is used only when the paper in the bins is B4 or smaller. In staple sort
mode, stack is returned to the bin after stapling (for sheets larger than B4).
Reference:
When the count of originals is set to ‘1’, the copies are delivered to the non-sort tray.
When the count of copies is set to ‘1’ in non-sort mode, the copies will be delivered to
the non-sort tray.
C. Emergency Operation Mode
1. Outline
The finisher is provided with emergency mode which initiates non-sort operation in
response to a minor problem.
The operations in emergency mode are the same as those of non-sort mode, and are
executed only when the parts involved are free of the problem in question*, i.e., bin unit,
stack processing unit, stacker unit.
*Represented by an error code.
The finisher switches to emergency mode automatically from the current mode when
any of the conditions given below exists when its power is turned on; the copier’s control
panel will indicate a message when such switching is made, while LED4 on the finisher’s
switch PCB turns on.
Switch PCB
LED4
Figure 2-216
Conditions
The same error has occurred twice continuously. (The error must not affect
operations of non-sort mode, and there may be normal operations between the first and
the second errors.)
See Figure 2-217 to see when the finisher switches to emergency mode.
Pattern 1
An error (A) not An error (A) not The finisher
affecting non-sort affecting non-sort switches to
operation occurs. operation occurs. emergency mode.
Pattern 2
An error (A) not The finisher An error (A) not The finisher
affecting non-sort executes normal affecting non-sort switches to
operation occurs. operation. operation occurs. emergency mode.
Pattern 3
An error (A) not An error (B) not An error (B) not The finisher
affecting non-sort affecting non-sort affecting non-sort switches to
operation occurs. operation occurs. operation occurs. emergency mode.
Figure 2-217
2. Operation
When an error which does not affect non-sort mode occurs, the nature of the most
recent error is stored in RAM (IC10) on the finisher controller PCB. The finisher
compares the nature of the next error against that of the previous error stored in memory.
If they match, the finisher switches to emergency mode, and the copier’s control panel
indicates that a switch-over has been made.
When the finisher switches to emergency mode, only the loads related to non-sort
mode are supplied with power–switching of power is made in response to the emergency
mode ON signal (EMON) from the CPU (Q1a) on the finisher controller PCB.
In normal mode, the emergency mode ON signal (EMON) goes ‘1’, and +24 V
(intended for loads not related to non-sort mode) is supplied.
In emergency mode, the emergency mode ON signal (EMON) goes ‘0’, and +24 V is
not supplied.
+24 VS (intended for loads related to non-sort mode) is supplied at all times
regardless of the state of the emergency mode ON signal (EMON).
Power notation for loads Description

+ 24VI Power from the DC power supply PCB
+ 24VS Power supplied to loads related to non-sort mode
+ 24V Power supplied to loads not related to non-sort mode
+24VS +24VI Q60 +24V
Q29
R582
CPU
(Q1)
EMON
Q28
PG
Finisher controller–––PCB
Figure 2-218
3. Disabling Emergency Mode
The data used to determine whether the finisher should switch to emergency mode
is stored in RAM on the finisher controller PCB, and the user cannot disable it.
To disable emergency mode, you must first remove the cause of the error and erase
specific data units in RAM.
Go through the following if you must erase specific data units, thereby disabling
emergency mode:
Disabling Emergency Mode

1) Turn off the copier’s power switch.
2) Open the finisher’s upper cover; then, remove the two screws, and remove the upper
cover (front).
Screws
Upper cover
Upper cover (front)
Figure 2-219 Figure 2-220
3) Shift bit 8 of the DIP switch (SW3) on the switch PCB to ON.
Switch PCB
Bit-8
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 2-221
4) Turn on the copier’s power switch.

5) Press the push switch (PSW2) on the switch PCB.
• A press on the push switch disables emergency mode. (The switching is
instantaneous.)
• LED4 on the switch PCB turns off when emergency mode is ended.
Switch PCB Push switch (PSW2)
LED4
Figure 2-222
6) Turn on the copier’s power switch.

7) Shift bit 8 of the DIP switch (SW3) on the switch PCB back to OFF.
8) Install the upper cover (front) you removed in step 3), and close it.
You can check whether emergency mode has been disabled or not by referring to
LED4 on the switch PCB.
If LED4 is off, the finisher is in normal mode.
If LED4 remains on, the finisher is in emergency mode.
Switch PCB
LED4
Figure 2-223
III. FEEDING DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Outline
The feeding system uses its appropriate feeding rollers to move the copies from the
copier to each bin or the non-sort tray.
The feeding motors are driven by three motors: common path feeding motor (M1),
upper path feeding motor (M2), and lower path feeding motor (M3).
The drive to each of the feeding roller in the common, upper, and lower path feeding
assemblies is switched by turning on and off the upper path roller clutch (CL1) and the
lower path roller clutch (CL2). To ensure good stacking in bins, the delivery slot is
equipped with paddles: the upper paddle is driven by the upper paddle solenoid (SL5),
and the lower paddle is driven by the lower paddle solenoid (SL6).
Copies are moved through a specific path to suit the mode selected on the copier by
turning on and off the path switching solenoid (SL2) and the non-sort path switching
solenoid (SL1).
Lower path feeding

Lower path feeding motor drive signal
motor drive signal

Lower path roller clutch drive signal
Lower paddle solenoid drive signal

Lower paddle solenoid drive signal
Non-sort path switching solenoid drive signal

Lower path feeding motor
Path switching solenoid drive signal
Lower path roller clutch drive signal

drive signal
Upper path
feeding motor
controller PCB
Upper path Common path

M2 feeding motor M1 feeding motor
Non-sort
path switching
solenoid
SL1
Path switching
solenoid
SL2
SL5
Upper paddle
solenoid
CL2
Lower path
CL1 roller clutch
Upper path
roller clutch
Coupling
M3
Lower path
feeding motor SL6
Lower paddle Coupling
solenoid
Coupling
Figure 2-301
B. Feeding Path
Copies are moved through specific paths to suit the selected mode as follows:
1. Non-Sort Mode
• The copies are delivered to the non-sort tray.
Non-sort tray
SL1
OFF
SL2
OFF
Figure 2-302
2. Sort/Staple Sort Mode
• The copies are delivered to the sort bin of the upper module or the lower module.
a. Upper Module
SL1
ON
Sort bin
SL2
OFF
Figure 2-303a
b. Lower Module
SL1
OFF
Sort bin
SL2
ON
Figure 2-303b
C. Controlling the Feeding Speed

1. Outline
The feeding speed is controlled by the common path feeding motor (M1), upper path
feeding motor (M2), and lower path feeding motor (M3).
The feeding speed may be either of the three types:
a. Process speed
b. Draw-in speed
c. Delivery speed
Each motor controls the feeding speed in its own range:
Motor Range of control Feeding speed

Common path feeding motor (M1) 317 to 528 mm/sec Process speed
Upper path feeding motor (M2) 317 to 528 mm/sec Process speed
1250 mm/sec Draw-in speed
450 to 720 mm/sec Delivery speed
Lower path feeding motor (M3) 317 to 528 mm/sec Process speed
1250 mm/sec Draw-in speed
450 to 720 mm/sec Delivery speed
Table 2-301
2. Process Speed
The process speed is identical to the copier’s process speed, and is controlled by the
common path feeding motor (M1), upper path feeding motor (M2), and lower path
feeding motor (M3).
3. Draw-In Speed
When a copy turns on the upper path paper sensor 2 (PI4) or the lower path paper
sensor (PI14), the feeding speed is raised to increase the distance from the following
copy.
The draw-in speed is controlled at all times by the upper path feeding motor (M2) or
the lower path feeding motor (M3) according to the destination of the copy.
4. Delivery Speed
When the copy has moved past the upper path paper sensor 2 (PI4) or the lower path
paper sensor (PI14) and has moved a specific distance, the feeding speed is lowered to
deliver the copy to a specific bin.
The delivery speed is controlled by the upper path feeding motor (M2) or the lower
path feeding motor (M3) according to the destination of the copy.
5. Sequence of Operations (feeding in sort/staple sort mode)
a. Upper Bin Module
Copy Start key ON

* 1sec
Common path feeding motor (M1)
Upper path feeding motor (M2)

* a * a
Upper path paper sensor 2 (PI4)
: Processor speed : Draw-in speed : Delivery speed

a: The copy is moved about 70 mm.
*: Varies depending on paper size.
Figure 2-304a
b. Lower Bin Module
Copy Start key ON

* 1sec
Lower path feeding motor (M3)

* a * a
Lower path paper sensor 3 (PI14)
: Process speed : Draw-in speed : Delivery speed

a: The copy paper is moved about 40 mm.
*: Varies depending on paper size.
Figure 2-304b
D. Controlling the Feeding Motor

Go through the following for an idea of the control circuitry of each feeding motor.
1. Common Path Feeding Motor
The common path feeding motor (M1) is a DC brushless motor with a built-in clock
pulse generator. The CPU (IC1) on the finisher controller PCB sends to the common path
feeding motor driver PCB the common path feeding motor drive signal (M1 ON) and the
common path feeding motor feeding speed reference pulse signal (M1 SRP).
When the common path feeding motor (M1) rotates, the clock pulse generator sends
clock pulses to the speed control circuit. The speed control circuit in turn compares the
pulse signals (M1 SRP) and the clock pulses of the encoder to control the drive circuit so
that both sets of pulses match.
Clock pulses are also sent to the finisher controller PCB. The CPU (IC1) monitors
these clock pulses. When the number of pulses in a 1-sec period is not a specific value,
the CPU will identify the condition as a common path feeding motor error, thereby
stopping the motor and at the same time indicating ‘E510’ on the copier’s control panel.
J10
-14 +24VS
-12 M1 ON Common path

Finisher
Drive feeding motor
controller
PCB -15 +5V circuit
M1
-16 ML SRP Speed

control Clock pulse
IC1 generator
-13 M1 CLK circuit
Common path feeding motor driver PCB
Figure 2-305
2. Upper Path Feeding Motor (M2)
The upper path feeding motor (M2) is a DC brushless motor with a built-in clock pulse
generator. The CPU (IC1) on the finisher controller PCB sends to the upper path feeding
motor driver the upper path feeding motor drive signal (M2 ON), upper path feeding
motor rotation direction signal (M2 F/R), and upper path feeding motor reference pulse
signal (M2 SRP).
When the upper path feeding motor (M2) rotates, clock pulses (M2CLK) in a number
proportional to the rotation of the motor are sent to the speed control circuit. The speed
controller circuit, in turn, compares the upper path feeding motor reference pulse signal
(M2 SRP) and the clock pulses, and controls the drive circuit so that both sets of pulses
match.
When the rotation speed of the upper path feeding motor reaches a specific value,
the upper path feeding motor controller PCB sends the constant speed state signal
(M2LOCK=0) to the finisher controller PCB.
When a switch-over is made from draw-in speed to delivery speed, the CPU (IC1)
causes the motor to rotate temporarily in reverse by sending the rotation signal (M2 F/R)
to the upper path feeding motor controller PCB, thereby applying the brakes and
instantaneously decreasing the feeding speed.
If the number of clock pulses in a 1-sec period falls short of a specific value, on the
other hand, the CPU (IC1) will identify the condition as a motor error, thereby stopping
the upper path feeding motor and at the same time indicating ‘E560’ on the copier’s
control panel.
J10 J502B
-18 +24V -1
-19 M2 ON -2
-20 +5V
Finisher Upper -3 Upper path
-23 M2LOCK path -4 Drive feeding motor
controller
PCB -21 M2 F/R feeding -5 circuit
motor
controller -6 M2
PCB -7
-8 Speed
-22 M2 SRP -9 control Clock pulse
circuit generator
IC1 -10
-24 M2CLK -11
-12
Upper path feeding motor driver PCB
Figure 2-306
3. Lower Feeding Motor (M3)
The lower feeder motor (M3) is a DC brushless motor with a built-in clock pulse
generator. The CPU (IC1) on the finisher controller PCB sends to the lower path feeding
motor driver PCB the lower path feeding motor drive signal (M3 ON), lower path feeding
motor rotation direction signal (M3 F/R), and lower path feeding motor reference pulse
signal (M3 SRP).
When the lower path feeding motor (M3) rotates, clock pulses in a number propor-
tional to the rotation of the motor are sent to the speed control circuit. The speed control
circuit in turn compares the clock pulses against the lower pulse feeding motor reference
pulse signal (M3 SPR), and controls the drive circuit so that both sets of pulses mach.
When the rotation speed of the upper path feeding motor reaches a specific value,
the upper path feeding motor controller PCB sends the constant speed state signal
(M3LOCK=0) to the finisher controller PCB.
When a switch-over is made from draw-in speed to delivery speed, the CPU (IC1)
causes the motor to rotate temporarily in reverse by sending the lower path feeding
motor rotation direction signal (M3 F/R) to the drive circuit, thereby applying the brakes
and instantaneously decreasing the feeding speed.
The CPU (IC1) monitors the clock pulses (M3CLK). If the number of clock pulses
within a 1-sec period fails to reach a specific value, the CPU will identify the condition as
a motor error, thereby stopping the lower path feeding motor and at the same time
indicating ‘E561’ on the copier’s control panel.
J23
-12 +24V
-14 ON/OFF
-13 +5V Lower path
Finisher
-17 M3LOCK Drive feeding motor
controller
PCB -15 F/R circuit
M3
Speed
-16 Reference pulse control Clock pulse
circuit generator
M3CLK
IC1
-18 Clock pulse Clock pulse
M3CLK
Lower path feeding motor driver PCB
Figure 2-307
E. Paddle
1. Outline
The finisher’s sort bin delivery slot is equipped with a paddle (upper/lower). Each
paddle is used to prevent jams by ensuring proper delivery of copies without collisions.
The paddles are driven by paddle solenoids (SL5, SL6) and used to hold the trailing
edges of copies in the bins.
Upper paddle
solenoid (SL5) Upper paddle
Lower paddle
Lower paddle
solenoid (SL6)
Figure 2-308
2. Operation
The paddle is operated when copy paper is delivered to a bin in fold mode.
When copy paper has been delivered to a bin, the guide bar is operated to keep it in
order. The guide bar is then returned to escape position, and the paddle solenoid is
turned on for about 100 msec, operating the paddle to make sure that the copy paper is
pushed inside the bin if its trailing edge is on the bin rear end wall.
Copy
Bin rear end wall
Bin
Figure 2-309
Top module
1st sheet delay 2nd sheet delivery 3rd sheet delivery
Upper path paper sensor 3 (P15)
Upper bin guide bar motor (M6)

On Off On Off On Off
Upper handle solenoid (SL5)
100msec 100msec 100msec
Bottom module
1st sheet delay 2nd sheet delivery 3rd sheet delivery
Lower bin guide bar motor (M7)

On Off On Off On Off
Lower handle solenoid (SL6)
100msec 100msec 100msec
Note: All times are approximate.
Figure 2-310
F. Limitless Sorting
The finisher is provided with a limitless sorting function, and does not impose a limit
to the copy count in sort and staple sort modes. (However, the originals set in the feeder
must be a specific number according to the maximum number of copies to be stacked in
each bin.)
EX : If 110 A4 originals are to be copied for 2 sets and stapling is desired,
100 copies each will be sorted into bin 1 and bin 2 of the upper bin module; then,
the remaining 10 copies each will be sorted into bin 6 and bin 5 of the lower bin
module. Thereafter, the operation will be ended without stapling.
The finisher’s limitless sorting may be of either of two types according to the copy
size:
1. maximum size is B4 or smaller.
2. maximum size is larger than B4
1. Maximum Size is B4 or Smaller
The finisher starts limitless sort mode when the following is set on the copier:
1. In sort mode, the copy count is set in such a way that 2000 copies or more (about
260 mm or more) will be stacked on the stacker tray (or, 100 sets or more).
2. In staple sort mode, the copy count is set in such a way that 2000 copies or more
(about 260 mm or more) will be stacked on the stacker tray (or, 100 sets or more).
3. In folded paper mode, the copy count is set in such a way that 10 sets or more will
be stacked on the stacker tray.
When copying is started under any of the above conditions, the operation will be
stopped when the maximum number for the stacker tray is reached. The operation will
automatically be resumed when the copies are removed from the stacker tray. As many
copies as set are made by repeating this series of operations.
Go through the following to learn how the finisher operates in each mode.
Mode Settings
• A4 original
• A4 copy
• Staple sort mode
• Copy count set to 105 sets
1) The Copy Start key is pressed.
2) The originals set in the feeder are copied for 6 sets in staple sort mode and
delivered to the upper bin module.
3) The 6 sets of copies delivered to the upper bin module are stapled and stacked
for each bin.
4) While step 3) is performed, the 6 sets of copies are made in staple sort mode and
delivered to the lower bin module.
5) The 6 sets of copies delivered to the lower module are stapled and stacked for
each bin.
6) While step 5) is performed, 6 sets of copies are made in staple sort mode and
delivered to the upper bin module.
7) Steps 2) through 6) are repeated until as many as 2000 copies (260 mm high) or
100 sets are stacked on the stacker tray, and the operation is stopped. (The
copier’s copy count indicator will automatically be ‘1’ at the end of the operation.)*
8) When all copies are removed from the stacker tray, copying starts once gain
automatically.
9) The remaining 5 sets are made in staple sort mode, and the operation ends.
*When more than 1200 copies (about 156 mm) are stacked on the stacker tray, sorting
will be in the upper module only, and the lower bin module will not be used. For details,
see p. 2-173.
2. Maximum Size is Larger than B4
The following setting will turn on limitless sort mode. The operation will stop
temporarily when as many copies as there are bins (12 sets) have been made; the
operation will automatically resume as soon as the copies are removed from the bins. As
many copies as set are made by repeating these series of operations:
1. In sort or staple sort mode, the copy count is set to ‘13’ sets or higher (more than the
number of bins).
Go through the following to learn how the finisher operates in each mode.
Mode Settings
• A3 original
• A3 copy
• Staple sort mode
• Copy count set to ‘15’ sets
1) The Copy Start key is pressed. (The copier’s copy count indicator will
automatically be ‘6’, and copying will start.)
2) The originals in the feeder are copied in staple sort mode (6 sets to the upper bin
module, and 6 sets to the lower bin module), and the operation is ended after
stapling. (Thereafter, the copier’s copy count indicator will indicate ‘3’.)
3) The operation will automatically be resumed when all copies are removed from
the bins.
4) The remaining 3 sets are copied in staple sort mode, and the operation is ended.
G. Overstacking
1. Outline
Each delivery slot has its own limit as to how many sheets may be stacked as shown
in Tables 2-302 and -303, and any excess will be identified as an overstacking condition:
a. Without Folded Paper

Maximum number of sheets
Paper size
Non-sort tray Bin Stacker tray
A3, 279.4mm × 250 sheets 50 sheets
431.8mm (11”×17”)
B4, LGL Equivalent of 2000 sheets (about
A4, B5, A4R, LTR, LTRR 100 sheets 260 mm high) or 100 sets (in
staple sort mode)
Table 2-302
b. With Folded Paper
Maximum number of sheets

Folded paper size
Non-sort tray Bin Stacker tray
A3, 279.4mm × 50 sheets 100 sheets 10 sets
431.8mm (11”×17”), B4 (with 10 or (with 10 or
fewer folded fewer folded
sheets) sheets)*
Table 2-303
*Each folded sheet is counted as 10 spread sheets.
2. Operation in Response to Overstacking
When the number of sheets exceeds the limit imposed on each delivery slot in a
specific mode, the finisher will operate as follows:
a. Non-Sort Mode
Operation
Settings
• Feeder in use
• 10 A3 originals
• A3 copy paper
• Without folded sheet
2) A set of 30 copies are delivered to the non-sort tray for each original.
3) The operation is stopped as soon as the 250th copy is delivered to the non-sort
tray.
4) When the copies delivered to the non-sort tray are removed, copying will start
automatically once again to make the remaining number of copies (50) for
delivery to the non-sort tray.
Note:
If with folded paper mode is selected for non-sort mode, the operation will stop
when
• The 10th folded sheet has been delivered, or
• The 50th copy has been delivered to the non-sort tray (if 9 or fewer folded sheets
exist).
b. Sort/Staple Sort Mode

Operation 1
Settings
• Feeder in use
• 55 A3 originals (to suit capacity of feeder)
• A3 copy paper
2) Copies of as many as 50 originals set in the feeder are delivered to each bin of
the upper bin module. (Stapling will not be performed even in staple sort mode.)
3) Copies of the remaining originals (5) are delivered to each bin of the lower bin
module. (Stapling will not be performed even in staple sort mode.)
4) After step 3), the operation will be stopped. (At this time, the copier’s copy count
indicator indicates ‘9’.)
5) When all the copies delivered to each of the bins of the finisher are removed,
copying will start automatically once again.
6) The operation will be ended after repeating steps 2) through 5) for as many copies
as set.
Note:
If with folded paper mode is selected for sort/staple sort mode, the modules are
switched when
• The 10th folded sheet has been delivered to each bin.
• The 100th copy has been delivered to each bin (if 9 or fewer folded sheets exist,
a single folded sheet counted as 10 copies).
Operation 2
Settings
• Feeder in use
• 105 small-size originals (to suit capacity of feeder)
• Small-size copy paper
2) Copies of as many as 100 originals set in the feeder are delivered to each bin of
the upper bin module.
3) Stacking operation is repeated for each bin for the stacks delivered to the upper
bin module. (Stapling will not be performed even in staple sort mode.)
4) While step 3) is being performed, copies of the remaining originals (5) are
delivered to the lower bin module.
5) Stacking operation is repeated for each bin for the stacks delivered to the lower
bin module. (Stapling is not performed even in staple sort mode.)
6) While step 5) is being performed, as many as 100 copies are delivered to each
bin of the upper module.
7) The operation will be ended after repeating steps 3) through 6) for as many copies
as set.
Note:
When as many as 1200 copies (about 156 mm high) have been stacked on the
stacker tray while the above steps are performed, the use of the lower bin module
will be ended; thereafter, as many as 2000 copies (about 260 mm high) will be
handled by the upper bin module. (For details, see p. 2-173.)
H. Jams
1. Outline
A jam in the finisher may be either a "copy paper jam" or a "copy paper stack jam."
Here, discussiond will be on copy paper jams; for copy paper stack jams, see p. 2-148.
The finisher is equipped with 18 sensors and 2 pairs of sensors as shown in Figure
2-308 to find out whether copy paper is moved properly. The CPU identifies a jam
condition at such times as programmed in advance in reference to the signals from these
sensors. When the CPU identifies a jam, it sends the jam signal to the copier, which in
response will stop copying operation and at the same time indicate the Jam message on
its control panel and the finisher’s control panel.
The CPU identifies a jam condition for the following:
a. Paper exists at a specific sensor at time of power-on, at the end of warm-up, or
during standby. (power-on jam)
b. The copy does not reach a specific sensor within a specific period of time. (delay
jam)
c. The copy does not move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time.
(stationary jam)
d. The bin outside paper sensor turns on while the copy is being fed. (bin outside jam)
e. When the front cover, upper cover, bin cover (while being locked), access door (while
not being accessed), folder unit upper cover, or folder unit is opened while the
finisher is in operation. (door open jam)
When the Copy Start key is pressed after any of the above conditions has occurred,
the jam recovery function will turn on to automatically make the remaining number of
copies, excluding the copies which have reached each bin by then. (This, however, does
not apply to bin outside jams power-on jams, and door open jams.)
LED7
PI 5 PI 4
PI 7
PI 6 PI 3
PI 2
PI 10
PI 9
PT 7
LED8 PI 12
PI 16
PI 15 PI 17
PI 14
PI 18
PI 21
PT 8
PI 20 PI 19 PI 13
Figure 2-311
Sensor Type of jam Sensor Type of jam

PI2 Non-sort path sensor Delay/ PI16 Vertical path stationary paper sensor 1 Power-on jam
PI3 Upper path paper sensor 1 stationary jam PI17 Vertical path stationary paper sensor 2
PI4 Upper path paper sensor 2 PI18 Vertical path stationary paper sensor 3
PI5 Upper path paper sensor 3 PI19 Lower path stationary paper sensor 1
PI6 Upper path stationary paper sensor 1 Power-on jam PI20 Lower path stationary paper sensor 2
PI7 Upper path stationary paper sensor 2 PI21 Lower path stationary paper sensor 3
PI9 Common path paper sensor 1 Delay/ LED7 Upper bin outside sensor Upper bin outside
PI10 Common path paper sensor 2 stationary jam PT7 stationary jam
PI12 Lower path paper sensor 1 LED8 Lower bin outside paper sensor Lower bin outside
PI13 Lower path paper sensor 2 PT8 stationary jam
PI14 Lower path paper sensor 3
PI15 Lower path paper sensor 4
Table 2-304
2. Checking for Jams
a. Non-Sort Path Delay Jam
Delivery signal (copier)

a a
Normal Error
Common path paper sensor 1 (PI9)
a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
Non-sort path sensor (PI2)
a: Varies depending on paper size.
Figure 2-312
b. Non-Sort Path Delay Jam

a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
Non-sort path sensor (PI2)
a: Time equivalent to 'paper length+ about 60 mm'.
Figure 2-313
c. Upper Path Delay Jam


a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
Figure 2-314
d. Upper Path Stationary Paper Jam

a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
a: Time equivalent to 'paper length + about 60 mm'.
Figure 2-315
e. Lower Path Delay Jam

a a
Normal Error
a a
Lower path paper sensor 2 (PI13) Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
lower path paper sensor 3 (PI14)
a a
Normal Error
Figure 2-316
f. Lower Path Delay Jam

a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
a a
Normal Error
a: Time equivalent to 'paper length + about 60 mm'.
Figure 2-317
g. Upper Bin Outside Jam

a a
Normal Error
Upper bin outside paper sensor (LED7, PT7)
a: End of delivery.
Figure 2-318
h. Lower Bin Outside Jam
Lower feeding motor (M2)

a a
Normal Error
Lower bin outside paper sensor (LED8, PT8)
a: End of delivery.
Figure 2-319
3. Operation in Response to a Jam
a. Outline
In addition to a sheet feeding system, the finisher is equipped with a stack feeding
system, which consists of the stack processing unit and the stacker unit. (For stack jams,
see p. 2-150.)
The finisher operates differently for a sheet jam and a stack jam. A jam may take any
of the following forms:
1. A single jam of a sheet.
2. A single jam of a stack.
3. A jam of both sheet and stack.
b. Single Jam of a Sheet

When a sheet jam occurs, the finisher stops the drive to the sheet feeding system. If
a stack is being fed, it will be moved as needed and both the stack processing unit and
the stacker unit will be returned to home position. Thereafter, the Jam message (sheet
feeding system) will be indicated on the copier’s control panel and the finisher’s display.
Jam Stops
In operation In operation
Stops
Home
position
Jam message
(sheet feeding system)
Figure 2-320
c. Single Jam of a Stack

When a stack jam occurs, the finisher stops the drive to the stack feeding system. If
a sheet is being fed, it will be moved as needed. Thereafter, the Jam message (stack
feeding system) will be indicated on the copier’s control panel and the finisher’s display.
In operation In operation
Jam Stops
End of operation
Jam message
(stack feeding system)
Stops
Figure 2-321
d. Simultaneous Jams of a Sheet and a Stack

When both sheet and stack jams occur at the same time, the finisher stops the drive
to both sheet feeding system and stack feeding system. Thereafter, the Jam message
(stack feeding system) will be indicated on the copier’s control panel and the finisher’s
display.
When the user finishes jam access and closes the finisher’s covers, the finisher will
return the harness unit and the stacker unit to home position. Thereafter, the jam
message (sheet feeding system) will be indicated on the copier’s control panel and the
finisher’s display.
Jam
2
Jam message
(stack feeding system)
Jam
1
Jam 1 removed
Jam
2
Home position
Jam message
(sheet feeding system)
Figure 2-322
IV. BIN UNIT DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Outline
The finisher’s bin unit consists of two bin modules (upper bin module and lower bin
module), and these modules are designed to operate independently of each other.
The drive system of the bin unit consists of the following:
• Upper bin module drive system
• Lower bin module drive system
• Upper bin module guide bar drive system
• Lower bin module guide bar drive system
The bin unit is equipped with a cover used to protect both modules, and the cover is
closed while the bin unit is in operation.
The bins in the upper bin module are driven by the upper bin shift motor (M4), and is
designed to move up and down. The guide bar is driven by the upper bin guide bar motor
(M6), and is deigned to put the copies delivered in each bin into order.
The bins in the lower bin module are driven by the lower bin shift motor (M5), and is
designed to move up and down. The guide bar is driven by the lower bin guide bar motor
(M7), and is designed to put the copies delivered to each bin into order.
Upper bin shift motor clock signal

PI 31
Upper bin shift motor drive signal
M4
Upper bin guide bar motor drive signal
M6
Upper bin upper limit signal
PI 23 Upper bin lead cam level section signal
PI 27
Upper bin lead cam No. 2 level section signal
PI 28
Upper bin guide bar home position signal
PI 33
Upper bin module
LED ON signal
LED1
Upper bin module guide bar
Upper bin module lead cam
Bin cover locking solenoid drive signal
SL8
To bin paper detection signal

PT1
Upper bin lower limit detection signal
PI 24 Bin cover open/closed detection signal
PI 76 Lower bin upper limit detection signal
PI 25
Lower bin side bar home position sensor
PI 34
LED ON signal
LED2
Lower bin module
Lower bin module guide bar

Lower bin module lead cam
Lower bin paper detection signal

PT2
Lower bin lead cam No. 2 level section signal
PI 30
Lower bin lead cam level section signal
PI 29
Lower bin lower limit detection signal
PI 26
Lower bin guide bar drive signal
M7
M5 Lower bin shift motor dive signal
Lower bin shift motor clock signal
PI 32
Figure 2-401
B. Bin Unit
1. Construction of the Bin Unit
Both the upper bin module and the lower bin module consist of six bins each, and they
are fixed in place by engagement of rolls at front and rear and three lead cams as shown.
The position of the upper bin module is monitored by the upper limit sensor PI23 and
the lower limit sensor PI24 while that of the lower bin module is monitored by the upper
limit sensor PI25 and the lower limit sensor PI26.
Lead cam
Lead cam
Lead cam
PI 23
Upper bin
module
PI 24
PI 25
Lower bin
PI 26
module
Figure 2-402
2. Operation of the Bin Modules
a. Outline
Both the upper bin module and the lower bin module move up and down for sorting,
stapling, and paper removal. If folding paper exists, however, they stop at a specific
position and will not move:
Each module may stop at either of the following:
• Home position
• Delivery reception start position (without folded paper)
• Delivery reception start position (with folded paper)
• Stack removal start position
b. Home Position
The home position of the upper bin module is the point away in upward direction by
a single bin from where the upper bin lower limit sensor (PI24) detects the upper bin
module.
PI24 PI24
Home position of the upper bin

module
Figure 2-403
The position of the lower bin module is the point away in upward direction by six bins
from where the lower bin limit sensor (PI26) detects the lower bin module.
PI26 PI26
Home position of the lower bin
module
Figure 2-404
c. Delivery Reception Start Position (without folded paper)

The delivery reception start position (without folded paper) of both upper bin module
and the lower bin module is the same as the home position of each module.
Upper Bin Module Lower Bin Module
PI26 PI26
Figure 2-405
d. Delivery Reception Start Position (with folded paper)

The delivery reception start position (with folded paper) of the upper bin module is the
point away in downward direction by a single bin from the home position. In this position,
the lower limit sensor (PI24) of the upper bin module detects the upper bin module.
PI24
Figure 2-406
The delivery reception start position (with folded paper) of the lower module is the
point away in downward direction by six bins from the home position. In this position, the
lower limit sensor (PI21) detects the lower bin module.
PI26
Figure 2-407
The finisher shifts the position of the delivery slot as soon as the delivery of copy
paper starts. It moves up the bin module by a single bin during delivery, and returns the
bin module to the initial position after delivery. This operation is also executed when the
stack expects folded paper.
Figure 2-408
Upper Bin Module
Delivery without folding Delivery with folding Delivery without folding

700 msec (approx.) 700 msec (approx.) 700msec (approx.)
Upper bin shift motor (M4)

Up by single bin Down by single bin Up by single bin Down by single bin
Down by single bin
Up by single bin
Figure 2-409
Lower Bin Module

Delivery without folding Delivery with folding Delivery without folding

700 msec (approx.) 700 msec (approx.) 700msec (approx.)
Lower bin shift motor (M4)

Up by single bin Down by single bin Up by single bin Down by single bin
Down by single bin
Up by single bin
Figure 2-410
The operation is performed so as to prevent copies from sliding into the fold of a
folded copy.
Figure 2-411
e. Stack Removal Start Position

The finisher removes the copies from the bins for stacking. Such removal is possible
only when the upper bin module or the lower bin module is at a single specific position.
The stack removal position of the upper bin module is the point where it has moved
down for a single bin in relation to the delivery slot.
The stack access position of the lower bin module is the point where it has moved up
for three bins in relation to the delivery slot.
Upper Bin Module Lower Bin Module
Figure 2-412
f. Summary of Bin Module Operations

Go through the diagrams for how each bin module is positioned for a specific
operation.
Position Upper bin module Lower bin module
Home position
Exit
Exit
PI24
PI26
Delivery start
position (without
folding) Exit
Exit
PI24
PI26
Delivery position
for folded paper
Exit
Exit
PI24 PI26
Spread sheets
with folded
Exit
paper
Delivery slot PI26
The bin module moves up for a The bin module moves up for a
single bin during delivery; it moves single bin during delivery; it moves
down for a single bin at the end of down for a single bin at the end of
delivery. delivery.
Access position Delivery slot
Delivery slot
The bin module moves down for a
single bin in relation to the delivery The bin module moves up for three
slot. bins in relation to the delivery slot.
3. Movement of the Lead Cam
a. Outline
The lead cams are mounted so that they engage with the rolls of the bin unit, and are
driven by the bin shift motor, which is capable of rotating in both clockwise and
counterclockwise directions.
The finisher is equipped with two bin modules, and each module is provided with a
drive motor (upper bin shift motor M4 and lower bin shift motor M5) for independent
operation.
When the lead cams rotate and, as a result, the rolls move up or down along the
sloping grooves of the lead cams, the bin connected to the rolls move up or down
accordingly.
Roll
Lead cam
Roll
Lead cam
M4
M5
Figure 2-413
b. Checking the Position of the Lead Cam

Each bin module of the finisher is equipped with two sensors used to check the
position of the lead cams.
• Upper lead cam slope section sensor (PI27)
• Upper lead cam No. 2 level section sensor (PI28)
• Lower lead cam level section sensor (PI29)
• Lower lead cam No. 2 level section sensor (PI30)
PI 28 PI 27
PI 30 PI 29
Figure 2-414
The groove of the lead cam consists of a sloping section and a level section. The
sloping section is used to move up or down the bin, while the level section is used to keep
the bin stationary. The lead cam level section sensor serves to make sure that the roll is
at the level section of the lead cam.
The ratio of the level section to the slope section on the lead cam differ between
areas near the bin and areas away from the bin. In areas near the bin, both take up the
same length, and the level section sensor (PI27, PI29) checks such an area.
In areas away from the bin, the level section is shorter than the slope section, and the
No. 2 level section sensor (PI28, PI30) checks such an area.
The slope section is made longer for a gentler slop, limiting the load imposed on the
bin shift motor.
Level section Level section
Lead cam Lead cam
Level section Level section
(area near the bin) (area away from the bin)
Figure 2-415
4. Controlling the Bin Shift Motor
a. Outline
Figure 2-415 and -416 show the circuits used to control the upper bin shift motor and
the lower bin shift motor. The upper bin shift motor (M4) and the lower bin shift motor are
both DC motors, and the circuit has the following functions:
• Controlling the speed of the motor.
• Controlling the direction of the motor
• Monitoring the operation of the motor
• Controlling the current
The circuit possesses a logic circuit used to determine whether to start or stop the
motor based on combinations of signals from sensors.

+24VP
Logic circuit
Q10 Upper bin
unit shift motor
A
Q19 Q20 J13-2
-1 M4
CW*
IC1
CPU
M4PWM B Q23 Q24
PI 31
CCW* Upper bin shift

motor clock sensor
Q11
C
D Current control
circuit
J12-A10
A: Upper bin shift upper limit signal (PI 23) B: Operation disable signal (from CPU)
C: No. 2 level section signal (PI 28) D: Upper bins shift lower limit signal (PI 24)
Figure 2-416

+24VP
Logic circuit
Q12 Lower bin unit
shift motor
A
Q21 Q22 J21-1
-2 M5
CW
IC1
CPU
M5PWMB Q25 Q26
PI 32
Lower bin shift
CCW motor clock sensor
Q13
C
D Current control
circuit
J19-A1
A: Lower bin shift upper limit signal(PI 25) B: Operation prohibit signal (from CPU)
C: No.2 level section signal (PI 30) D: Lower bin shift lower limit signal (PI 26)
Figure 2-417
b. Controlling the Speed and the Direction of the Bin Shift Motor
1. Upper Bin Module
The speed and the direction of rotation of the upper bin shift motor are controlled
based on combinations of the following three types of signals:
CW: Upper bin shift motor clockwise rotation signal (upper bin module moves up)
CCW: Upper bin shift motor counterclockwise rotation signal (upper bin module
moves down)
M4PWM: Upper bin shift motor rotation speed signal (0: maximum, 1: minimum)
Direction of rotation of upper bin shift motor CW CCW M4PWM

Upper bin module moves down 1 0 Variable pulse
Upper bin module moves up 0 1 Variable pulse
Stops 1 1 1
Brakes on 1 1 0
Table 2-401
The circuit possesses a logic circuit, and requires the conditions shown in Table 2-
402 for the upper bin shift motor to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. The upper bin
shift motor is allowed to rotate only when specific conditions are met.
Upper bin module moves up

Condition 1 Condition 2
Flag over Flag over
Sensor name (notation) sensor I/O display sensor I/O display
The upper bin module is not at the upper No P131-6 : 0 No P131-6 : 0
limit. (PI23)
The operation prohibit signal is not * P127-5 : * * P127-5 : *
generated, i.e (PI-24)
The bin rear end wall is not at stapling Yes P145-3 : 1 * P145-3 : *
position. (PI53)
The stack processing unit is not at * P147-0 : * No P147-0 : 1
DOWN position. (PI71)
*Either.
For I/O display, use the copier’s service mode.
Upper bin module moves down
Condition 1 Condition 2
Flag over Flag over
Sensor name (notation) sensor I/O display sensor I/O display
The upper bin module is not at the upper * P131-6 : * * P131-6 : *
limit. (PI23)
The operation prohibit signal is not No P127-5 : 0 No P127-5 : 0
generated, i.e., (PI24)
The bin rear end wall is not at stapling No P145-3 : 0 * P145-3 : *
position. (PI53)
The stack processing unit is not at * P147-0 : * No P147-0 : 1
*Either.
Table 2-402
1. Lower Bin Module

The speed and the direction of rotation of the lower bin shift motor are controlled
CW: Lower bin shift motor clockwise signal (lower bin module moves up)
CCW: Lower bin shift motor counterclockwise signal (lower bin module moves down)
M5PWM: Lower bin shift motor rotation speed signal (0: maximum, 1: minimum)
Direction of lower bin shift motor CW CCW M4PWM

Lower bin module moves down 1 0 Variable pulse
Lower bin module moves up 0 1 Variable pulse
Stop 1 1 1
Brakes on 1 1 0
Table 2-403
The circuit possesses a logic circuit, and requires the conditions shown in Table 2-
404 for the lower bin shift motor to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. The lower bin
shift motor is allowed to rotate only when specific conditions are met.
Lower bin module moves up

Condition 1
Flag over
Sensor name (notation) sensor I/O display
The upper bin module is not at the upper No P131-7 : 0
limit. (PI25)
The operation prohibit signal is not * P126-3 : *
The bin rear end wall is not at stapling Yes P145-3 : 1
position. (PI53)
The stack processing unit is not at No P147-4 : 1
*Either.
Lower bin module moves down

Condition 1
Flag over
The upper bin module is not at the upper * P131-7 : *
limit. (PI23)
The operation prohibit signal is not No P126-3 : 0
position. (PI53)
The stack processing unit is not at No P147-4 : 1
*Either.
Table 2-404
c. Monitoring the Operation of the Motors

The motors operate more or less the same way for both upper bin module and the
lower bin module; here, discussions will be in reference to the upper bin module.
The upper bin shift motor is equipped with an encoder, and the bin shift motor clock
sensor (PI31 for the upper bin module, and PI32 for the lower bin module) sends clock
signals to the finisher controller PCB by way of communicating the state of the motor. The
finisher controller PCB assumes that the motor is rotating when it receives these clock
signals.
If the finisher controller PCB does not receive clock signals in the presence of the
motor drive signal, it will assume the condition to be an upper bin shift motor error and
indicates ‘E541’ on the copier’s control panel (‘E54’ in the case of the lower bin module).
d. Controlling the Current

The current is controlled more or less the same way for both upper bin module and
lower bin module; here, the discussions will be in reference to the upper bin module.
When an overcurrent is about to flow into the upper bin shift motor, the current control
circuit turns on to instantaneously cut off the upper bin shift motor drive signal, preventing
overcurrent from flowing into the upper bin shift motor.
If overcurrent occurs in succession, the upper bin shift motor drive signal will also be
interrupted accordingly, not allowing the upper bin shift motor to move the upper bin
module to a specific position within a specific period of time. As a result, the finisher
controller PCB identifies the condition to be an upper bin shift motor error and indicates
‘E541’ on the copier’s control panel (‘E543’ in the case of the lower bin module).
To reset, remove the cause from the load, and turn off and then on the finisher.
5. Detecting Paper
Each bin module has two pairs of sensors used to detect the presence/absence of
paper. One pair of sensor serves to check for paper in bins, while the other pair serves
to check for paper outside bins.
Bin module Paper inside bin Paper outside bin

Upper bin module Upper bin paper sensor Upper bin outside paper sensor
(LED1, PT1) (LED7, PT7)
Lower bin module Lower bin paper sensor Lower bin outside paper sensor
(LED2, PT2) (LED8, PT8)
The bin paper sensor and the bin outside paper sensor consist of a LED and a
phototransistor.
LED7
LED1
PT 7
LED8
PT 1
LED2
PT 8
PT 2
Figure 2-418
C. Controlling the Guide Bar

1. Outline
The finisher is equipped with a guide bar in its upper bin module and lower bin
module, and the bars are used to put the copies delivered to the bins in order.
The guide bars are driven by the upper bin guide bar motor (M6) or the lower bin
guide bar motor (M7). The upper bin guide bar home position sensor (PI33) is used to
detect the home position of the upper bin guide bar, while the lower bin guide bar home
position sensor (PI34) is used to detect the home position of the lower bin guide bar.
Upper bin guide motor Upper bin guide bar

(M6) home position sensor (PI33)
Upper bin
guide bar
Lower bin
guide bar
Lower bin guide bar motor

(M7)
Lower bin guide bar home
position sensor (PI34)
Figure 2-419
2. Putting the Copies into Order
The guide bar is operated each time a copy is delivered.

The guide bar is made to move over a distance (A) determined by the paper size
signal from the copier for the number of drive pulses sent by the guide bar motor.
Upper bin guide bar

home position sensor (PI33)
A
Upper bin guide
bar motor (M6)
Lower bin guide

bar motor (M7)
A
Lower bin guide bar
Figure 2-420
3. Controlling the Guide Bar
a. Outline
Figures 2-421 and -422 show the circuits used to control the upper bin guide bar
motor (M6) and the lower bin guide motor (M7). These guide motors are 4-phase control
stepping motors, and the circuits have the following functions:
• Switching current when driving or not driving the motors.
• Controlling the rotation and the speed of the motors.
+5V +24V
Upper bin guide bar motor
Motor phase control signal
A J12-A2
-A1
Motor phase control signal M6
IC1 IC45
CPU Motor A* -B12
driver
+5v B -A3
-B13
Current switching Q30 B* B11

signal
Figure 2-421
+24V +5V

J20-7 A Motor phase control signal
-5
M7 Motor phase control signal IC1
IC46 CPU
-8 A* Motor
driver
-9 B +5V
-6
-10 B* Q33
Current switching
signal
Figure 2-422
b. Operation
The CPU (IC1) on the finisher controller PCB sends each phase control signal of the
motor to the motor driver.
In response to these phase control signals, the motor driver controls the output timing
of the pulse signals used to switch the direction and the speed of rotation of the guide
bar motor.
The current switching signal is used to switch the current levels according to whether
the motor is in operation or at rest, thereby preventing overheating of the motor when it
is at rest.
D. Controlling the Bin Cover

1. Outline
The bin cover covers upper bin unit and the lower bin unit, and remains closed while
the bin unit is in operation.
When the finisher is in operation, the bin cover locking solenoid (SL8) is on to hold
the bin cover in place, thereby preventing it from opening.
The display is a LED consisting of five blocks, indicating the operating status of the
finisher in reference to whether the LED remains on or flashes. All blocks will remain on
or off when the bin cover may be opened.
Copy End indicator

Bin cover locking
Bin cover solenoid (SL8)
Figure 2-423
2. Operation
While the finisher is in operation, the finisher controller PCB generates the bin cover
locking solenoid drive signal (SL8D*) to turn on the bin cover locking solenoid (SL8) to
keep the bin cover closed.
The Copy End indicator LEDs will flash in sequence or at the same time to indicate
that the bin cover cannot be opened. When the Copy End indicator LEDs flash in
sequence, both finisher and copier are in operation; when all LEDs flash at the same
time, only the finisher is in operation.
Copy End indicator
Bin cover locking solenoid drive signal

(SLBD*)
Bin cover locked Bin cover
locking
solenoid (SL8)
Figure 2-424
Flash in sequence Flash at the same time
Copy End indictor Copy End indicator
Figure 2-425
When all specific operations of the finisher are over, the bin cover locking solenoid
releases the bin cover in the absence of the drive signal (SL8D*). At this time, all LEDs
of the Copy End indicator turn on, indicating that the bin cover may be opened.
Table 2-405 shows the status of the finisher and the copier in relation to the Copy End
indicator.
Copy End indicator Opening the bin cover Status of finisher Status of copier
Sequential flashing Not possible In operation In operation
Simultaneous flashing Not possible In operation End of operation
Simultaneous flashing Possible End of operation End of operation
Simultaneously off Possible End of operation End of operation
Table 2-405
V. STACK PROCESSING UNIT
A. Outline
The stack processing unit is designed to remove the stacks of copies delivered to the
upper bin module or the lower bin module and move them to the stacker unit. The stack
processing unit consists of the following drive systems:
• Up/down dive system
• Side gripper drive system
• Stapler drive system
• Front gripper drive system
The up/down drive system is used to move up or down the stacker unit to a specific
position to enable the removal of stacks from the upper bin module or the lower bin
module.
The side gripper is designed to move the stack from the bin to the stapler and to hold
the stack in place for stapling.
The stapler serves to staple the stack of copies.
The front gripper is designed to move the stack from the stapler to the stacker unit.
Side gripper
drive system Front gripper
drive system
Stapler drive
system
Up/down drive
system
Figure 2-501
B. Up/Down Drive System

1. Outline
Figure 2-502 shows the construction of the up/down drive system.

The stack processing unit is moved up or down by the stack processing unit shift
motor (M14) using pinion gears and rack gears.
When the stack processing unit is to be kept stationary, the stack processing unit shift
brake 1 (BK2) and the stack processing unit shift brake 2 (BK3) turn on to securely hold
it in place. The stack processing unit shift motor clock sensor (PI69) is used to check the
status of the motor (operation/rest).
Brake drive signal
Motor drive signal
Clock signal
(BK2)
Stack proccessing (PI69)
unit shift brake 1 (M14)
Stack proccessing
unit shift Motor
Pinion gear
Rack gear
Brake drive signal

(BK3D*)
Stack proccessing
unit driver PCB
Stack proccessing
unit shift brake 2
Figure 2-502
2. Operation
The up/down movement is executed in sort or staple sort mode, and the movement
differs accordingly; the up/down movement is initiated as shown in Table 2-501.
Up/down movement Stapling Copy size

Yes Yes B5, A4, B4, A3, A4R, B5R, LTR, LGL, 279.4 × 431.8mm
(11" × 17"), LTRR
No B5, A4, B4, A4R, B5R, LTR, LGL, LTRR
No No A3, 279.4 × 431.8mm (11" × 17")
Table 2-501
The stack processing unit shift motor (M14) operates in response to signals from the
finisher controller PCB. The stack processing unit may stop either at home position or at
DOWN position, and these two positions are checked by two sensors. The stack
processing unit operates as shown in Table 2-502 at each of these positions:
Stop position Sensor (notation) Description

Home position Stack processing unit home Where stacks are removed from
position sensor (PI70) the upper bin unit
DOWN position Stack processing unit DOWN Where stacks are removed from
sensor (PI79) the lower bin unit
Table 2-502
The up/down drive system uses the following three sensors to control the range of
movement:
• Stack processing unit upper limit sensor (PI71)
• Stack processing unit lower limit sensor (PI72)
• Stacker unit NEAR sensor (PI73)
The stack processing unit upper limit sensor (PI71) sends the upper limit signal to the
finisher controller PCB when the stacker unit moves past the home position and still
continues to move up. In response, the finisher controller PCB stops the stack unit shift
motor (M14) immediately; since the stack processing unit does not reach its specific
position within a specific period of time after the stack processing unit shift motor (M14)
has stopped, the finisher controller will assume an error in the stack processing shift
motor (M14) and indicate ‘E575’ on the copier’s control panel.
The stack processing unit lower limit sensor (PI72) sends the lower limit signal to the
finisher controller PCB if the stack processing unit moves past the lower limit and still
continues to move down. In response, the finisher controller PCB stops the stack unit
shift motor (M14) immediately; since the stack processing unit does not reach its specific
position within a specific period of time after the stack processing unit shift motor (M14)
has stopped, the finisher controller will assume an error in the stack processing shift
motor (M14) and indicate ‘E575’ on the copier’s control panel.
The stacker unit NEAR sensor (PI73) sends the NEAR signal to the finisher controller
PCB when the stack processing unit and the stacker unit have moved more than a
specific distance. In response, the finisher controller PCB stops the stacker unit in ascent
and the stack processing unit in descent.
Home position sensor (PI70)
Upper limit sensor (PI71)
Lower limit sensor (PI72)

Stack processing unit DOWN sensor (PI79)
NEAR sensor (PI73)
Stacker unit
Figure 2-503
Upper limit
Stack processing unit Stack processing unit DOWN position
position detecting flag upper position detecting flag lower
PI 70
PI 70
PI 71
PI 72 PI 71
PI 72
PI 79
PI 79
PI 70 PI 70
PI 71 PI 71
PI 72 PI 72
PI 79 PI 79
Home position
Lower limit
Figure 2-504 (rear view)
3. Controlling the Stack Processing Unit Shift Motor (M14)
a. Outline
Figure 2-505 shows the circuit used to control the stack processing unit shift motor.
The motor (M14) is a DC motor, and the circuit has the following functions:
• Controlling the power to the motor.
• Controlling the direction of rotation of the motor.
• Controlling the current.
The circuit has a logic circuit used to determine whether to start or stop the rotation
of the motor based on combinations of signals from sensors.
Finisher controller PCB Stack processing unit driver PCB

+24VP
Logic circuit
CW A Q24
Q3 Q4
IC8
CPU M14
+5V
Stack processing
RY1 unit shift motor
CCW B Q1 Q2
C
D
Q25
Current control
circuit
A: Stack processing unit upper limit signal C: Bin rear end wall CLOSED signal
B: NEAR signal D: Side gripper left/right home position signal
Figure 2-505
b. Controlling the Power to and the Direction of the Stack Processing Unit Motor
The power to and the direction of rotation of the stack processing unit shift motor are
controlled based on the combination of the following two signals:
CW: Stack processing unit shift motor clockwise signal (stack processing unit moves
up)
CCW: Stack processing unit shift motor counterclockwise signal (stack processing unit
moves down)
Stack processing motor status CW CCW

Stack processing unit moves down 1 Variable pulse
Stack processing unit moves down 0 1
Stops 1 1
Table 2-503
Since the weight of the unit itself encourages the downward movement, the motor
does not need maximum power to move down the stack processing unit so that less
power is applied than when moving it up.
The power is controlled by varying the duty ratio (ratio between periods of ON and
OFF) of the pulses of the voltage applied to the motor. When much power is needed, the
ON period is increased, while when little power is needed the ON period is decreased.
Duty ratio 0 Time unit Time unit Time unit

(minimum power: stop)
ON
Voltage
OFF
Duty ratio 0.5

(1/2 power) ON
Voltage
OFF
Duty ratio 1
(maximum power)
ON
Voltage
OFF
Figure 2-506 Duty Ratio
The circuit possesses a logic circuit, and the stack processing shift motor rotates only
when all the conditions in Table 2-504 are met.
Stack processing unit moves up
Condition 1
Flag over
The stack unit is not at the upper limit. (PI71) No P147-5 : 0
The stack unit is not at the upper limit. (PI67) Yes P148-6 : 1
The bin rear end wall is closed. (PI53) Yes P145-3 : 1
The side gripper is at left/right home position. (PI50) Yes P144-0 : 1
The stack unit is not at the lower limit. (PI72) *
P145-5 : *
The stack processing unit is not near the stacker unit. (PI73) *
*Either.
Stack processing unit moves down

Condition 1
Flag over
The stack unit is not at the upper limit. (PI71) * P147-5 : *
The stack unit is not at the upper limit. (PI67) Yes P148-6 : 1
The bin rear end wall is closed. (PI53) Yes P145-3 : 1
The side gripper is at left/right home position. (PI50) Yes P144-0 : 1
The stack unit is not at the lower limit. (PI72) No
P145-5 : 0
The stack processing unit is not near the stacker unit. (PI73) No
*Either.
Table 2-504
c. Controlling the Current

The circuit is equipped with a current control circuit to prevent current in excess of a
specific level from flowing into the stack processing shift motor.
When an overcurrent is about to flow into the stack processing shift motor, the current
control circuit turns on to interrupt the stack processing shift motor drive signal, thereby
preventing the overcurrent from flowing into the stack processing shift motor.
When an overcurrent occurs in succession, the stack processing shift motor drive
signal is interrupted accordingly, preventing the stack processing shift motor to move the
stack unit to a specific position within a specific period of time. The finisher controller
PCB will identify such a condition to be a stack processing shift motor error, and indicate
‘E575’ on the copier’s control panel.
To reset, remove the cause of the error, and turn off and then on the finisher.
C. Side Gripper Drive System

1. Outline
The side gripper moves the stacks of the bins to the stapler unit, initiated by the
following operations:
• Opening/closing the bin rear end wall.
• Moving the side gripper left/right.
• Clasping the stack.
The bin rear end wall is opened/closed by the bin rear end wall open/close motor
(M17).
The side gripper is moved left/right by the side gripper left/right shift motor.
The stack is clasped by the gripper from above and below, operated by the side
gripper grip motor (M9).
Bin rear end wall open/close unit
Bin
M17
M9
M8
Side gripper Side gripper left/right

shift unit
Figure 2-507
2. Opening/Closing the Bin End Wall
a. Outline
The finisher removes the stack from the bin through the rear end of the bin, and
moves the stack as far as the stacker unit.
The rear end of the bin is equipped with a bin rear end wall, which must be opened
for the side gripper to remove the stack from inside the bin. The bin rear end wall is
opened/closed by the bin rear end wall open/close motor (M17).
Bin Stack of copies Bin rear end wall
M17
Bin rear end open/close motor
M17
Figure 2-508
b. Operation
When the bin shifts and stops at a specific position (if upper bin module, down by 1
bin; if lower module, up by 3 bins in relation to delivery position), the opening/closing arm
of the bin rear end wall open/close unit becomes engaged with the hook on the bin rear
end wall.
When the bin rear end wall open/close motor (M17) rotates in this condition, the
opening/closing arm makes an arc movement, and the bin rear end wall opens/closes in
conjunction with the movement.
The status of the bin rear end wall is monitored b the bin rear end wall OPEN position
sensor (PI52) and the bin rear end wall CLOSE position sensor (PI53).
Opening/closing arm
Bin rear end wall Bin rear end wall

CLOSE position
sensor (PI53)
Hook
Bin rear end wall

OPEN position
sensor (PI52)
Bin rear end wall
open/close
motor (M17)
Figure 2-509
c. Controlling the Bin Rear End Wall Open/Close Motor (M17)

Figure 2-510 shows the diagram used to control the bin rear end wall open/close
motor (M17). The motor (M17) is a DC motor, and is designed to rotate in one direction
only, and the circuit is used to turn on or off the motor.
When the finisher controller PCB sends the motor drive signal (M17D) to the stack
processing unit driver PCB, the bin rear end wall open/close motor starts to rotate. If the
bin rear end wall OPEN position sensor (PI52) or the bin rear end CLOSE position sensor
(PI53) sends signals (M17D) to the finisher controller PCB while the bin rear end wall
open/close motor is rotating, the motor drive signal will be cut to stop the motor.
Bin rear end wall +5VS +24VP +24VP

open/close motor
drive signal
(M17D)
Q36 Q11
Q23 M17
Bin rear end

open/close motor
Bin rear end wall Q16
OPEN position
signal PI 52
(BRPO) Bin rear end wall
CLOSE position sensor
Bin rear end wall
CLOSED position
signal
(BRPC) PI 53
Bin rear end wall
CLOSE position sensor
Figure 2-510
d. Sequence of Operations (bin rear end wall open/close motor M17)

Motor start signal Motor start signal Motor start signal
Motor ON Bin open Motor ON Bin open Motor ON Bin open
Bin rear end wall

open/close motor (M17)
Bin rear end wall OPEN

Bin rear end wall
CLOSE position sensor (PI52)
Figure 2-511
4. Moving the Side Gripper Left/Right
a. Outline
The side gripper is moved left/right in sort, staple sort, or group mode, and its
movement differs accordingly. The finisher moves its side gripper left/right under the
conditions shown in Table 2-505 (same as the conditions for moving the stack processing
unit).
(11" × 17"), LTRR
No No A3, 279.4 × 431.8mm (11" × 17")
Table 2-505
The side gripper is moved left/right by the side gripper left/right shift motor (M8). The
home position of the side gripper is checked by the side gripper left/right shift home
position sensor (PI50). The side gripper left/right shift motor error sensor (PI51) is used
to monitor the status of the side gripper left/right shift motor.
Side gripper
M8
Side gripper left/right shift

Side gripper left/right shift home position sensor (PI50)
motor error sensor (PI51)
Figure 2-512
b. Operation
When the side gripper left/right shift motor starts to rotate, the side gripper drive arm
makes a swinging movement. In response, the side gripper starts to make a left/right
shift.
Side gripper
Side gripper drive arm
Figure 2-513
The side gripper left/right shift motor operates in response to signals from the finisher
controller PCB. The stop position of the side gripper is controlled by varying the number
of clock pulses of the side gripper left/right shift motor (M8).
The left/right stop position (for clasping the stack inside the bin) is determined by the
number of motor drive pulses (travel distance of about 65 mm) from the home position.
The stop position at the right (for releasing the stack) is determined by the number of
motor drive pulses (travel distance of about 10 mm) in reference to when the stapler
leading edge paper sensor (PI68) detects the leading edge of the stack.
Stapler leading
edge paper sensor 10mm
(PI68)
Stack of copies

Figure 2-514
c. Controlling the Side Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor (M8)
1) Outline
Figure 2-515 shows the circuit used to control the side gripper left/right shift motor
(M8). The motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor, and the circuit has the following
functions:
• Switching the current (with motor in operation or at rest).
• Controlling the direction and the speed of the motor.
• Checking for a motor error.
+5V +24V +24V

Side gripper left/right
Motor phase shift motor
control signal IC25 A J101-15
(M8 PC) Motor
Rotation direction drive
-12
signal pulse M8
genera- IC27
(M8 F/R)
ting
Motor A* -17
Finisher circuit
controller driver
PCB B -16
-14
Current switching
Q31 B* -18
signal
(M8 DCC)
Motor error signal J106-B21

(SGMED) PI 51
Stack processing unit driver PCB shift motor error sensor
Figure 2-515
2) Operation
The finisher controller PCB sends the motor rotation direction signal and the motor
phase control signal (M8PC) to the motor drive pulse generation circuit on the stack
processing unit driver PCB.
In response to these signals, the motor drive pulse generation circuit sends the
appropriate phase control signal to the motor.
The motor driver is designed to control the output timing of the pulse signals based
on the phase control signal of the motor. In response to the output of the pulse signals,
the side gripper left/right shift motor switches its direction and speed of rotation.
The current switching signal from the finisher controller PCB, on the other hand, is
used to switch the current to suit the status of the motor (in operation or at rest), thereby
preventing heating while the motor remains at rest.
3) Detecting a Motor Error

The side gripper left/right shift motor error sensor (PI51) is located where it can
monitor the movement of the arm of the drive system of the side gripper, and it sends a
signal to indicate the arrival of the arm to the finisher PCB.
The finisher PCB measures the time (A) between when the side gripper left/right shift
motor starts to operate and when the signal arrives. At the same time, the finisher
controller PCB computes the expected time of arrival (B) of the arm at the side gripper
left/right shift motor error sensor (PI51) in relation to the signal sent to drive the side
gripper left/right shift motor for comparison against time A.
A and B must match if the side gripper left/right shift motor is operating normally.
Arm
Rotation speed signal

Side gripper arrival
Side gripper left/right shift signal
motor (M8)
Side gripper
estimated time
of arrival

shift motor error sensor
(PI51)
Figure 2-516
An error, if any, results in a discrepancy between the times. If such is the case, the
finisher controller PCB will assume a side gripper left/right shift motor (M8) error, and
indicate ‘E572’ on the copier’s control panel and stop the operation of the finisher
immediately.
Arm
Rotation speed signal

Side gripper arrival
Side gripper left/right signal absent
shift motor (M8)
Side gripper
estimated
arrival time

Figure 2-517
5. Clasping the Stack
a. Outline
The clasping movement is executed after a left/right shift of the side gripper, and is
driven by the side gripper grip motor (M9). The clasping home position sensor (PI48) is
used to detect the home position for clasping operation.
The side gripper paper sensor (PI49) is used to find out the presence/absence of a
stack when clasping operation is initiated.
The paper retaining solenoid (S7) is used to hold the stack in place before the stack
is clasped by the gripper to help ensure proper clasping.
Paper holding solenoid (SL7)
Side gripper grip motor (M9)
Front gripper paper

sensor (PI49)
Clasping home position

sensor (PI48)
Figure 2-518
b. Controlling the Side Gripper Motor (M9)

Figure 2-519 shows the circuit used to control the side gripper grip motor (M9). The
motor is a DC motor, and rotates in one direction only. The circuit is used to turn on and
off the motor.
When the finisher controller PCB sends the motor drive signal to the stack processing
unit driver PCB, the side gripper grip motor starts to rotate. While the side gripper grip
motor is rotating, the side gripper clasping home position signal varies its status (ON to
OFF/OFF to ON), thereby causing the side gripper grip motor drive signal to go ‘1’ and,
as a result, to stop the motor.
Side gripper grip +5V +24VP +24VP

motor drive signal
(M9D)
J7-6 J105-6 Q34 Q09 J101- 3
Q21 -4 M9
Side gripper
grip motor
Q14
Clasping home
position signal
(SSGHP) J106-B24
J8-B16 J104-B16 PI 48
Clasping home
position sensor
Figure 2-519
c. Sequence of Operations (side gripper grip motor)
Gripper Releasing Clasping Releasing Clasping

Side gripper
grip motor (M9)
Side gripper clasping
Figure 2-520
d. Holding the Stack in Place

When the side gripper clasps a stack, the stack may have curling. If the side gripper
clasped the stack as it is, the sheets in the stack could become displaced. To prevent
such a problem, the finisher is equipped with two arms (A, B) which serve to hold down
the stack, thereby straightening the curl.
The paper holding arms A and B are driven by the paper holding solenoid (SL7). The
paper holding arm A holds down the stack from above, and the paper holding arm B
holds down the stack in the lower bin to prevent contact between the lower jaw of the
side gripper and the stack.
Stack of copies
Paper holding arm A

Paper holding solenoid
(SL7)
Paper holding arm B
Stack of copies
Stack in the lower bin
Lower jaw
Paper holding arm B
Figure 2-521
e. Detecting Paper
After the side gripper has clasped the stack, the side gripper paper sensor (PI49) is
used to find out the presence/absence of paper within the side gripper.
Clasping operation causes the paper detecting arm to move out of the side gripper by
the work of the rack gear which engages with the gripper gear. If a stack exists within the
side gripper, the paper detecting arm will be pushed back, and the side gripper paper
sensor detects the movement of the arm.
When the finisher controller PCB identifies the absence of a stack, it will indicate the
Jam message on the copier’s control panel and immediately stop the operation of the
finisher.
Side gripper
Side gripper
paper sensor (PI 48)
Side gripper released
Stack of copies
Rack gear
Side gripper gripping

Paper detecting (Stack absent)
arm
Side gripper gripping

(Stack present)
Figure 2-522
f. Sequence of Operations (clasping by side gripper)
Normal
Solenoid ON signal
Motor ON signal
Stack present signal Error
Side gripper grip
motor (M9)
sensor (PI48)

Side gripper paper
sensor (PI49)
Figure 2-523
Error
Solenoid ON signal
Motor ON signal
No stack present signal
Jam indicator
Side gripper grip
motor (M9)
sensor (PI48)

Side gripper paper
sensor (PI49)
Figure 2-524
D. Stapler Unit Drive System

1. Outline
The stapler unit is designed to staple the stack of copies delivered to the bin, and
stapling may be any of three types: corner, double, or single.
Stapling Corner Double Double

Paper size A3, B4, A4, B5, A3, A4, B4, B5 A4R, B5R, LTRR
A4R, B5R 279.4 × 431.8mm
279.4 × 431.8mm (11" × 17"), LTR
(11" × 17")
LGL, LTR, LTRR
Position
Copy paper
Copy paper Copy paper
Feeding
Feeding Feeding direction
direction direction
Table 2-506
The finisher’s stapler unit performs the following:

• Stapler unit front/rear shifting
• Stapling
The stapler unit is shifted to the front and the rear by the drive of the stapler front/rear
shift motor (M13).
The stapler is driven by the stapler motor (M20).
The stapler front/rear shift motor clock sensor (PI65) detects the distance of travel
made by the stapler unit in reference to the clock plate mounted to the stapler front/rear
shift motor.
The stapler front/rear shift motor home position sensor (PI66) serves to detect the
home position of the stapler unit.
The front gripper shift enable sensor (PI67) serves to find out whether the stapler unit
is where the front gripper may be safely moved to the left or to the right.
The stapler leading edge paper sensor (PI68), on the other hand, is used to detect
insertion of paper into the stapler assembly, thereby preventing problems otherwise
caused by idle punching. The stapler leading edge paper detection signal is used to
control the movement of a stack by the side gripper.
Stapler front/rear
Stapler leading edge paper detection signal
Stapler front/rear
shift motor clock

shift motor drive
signal
Stapler home position signal
signal
Staple detection signal
Stapler motor drive signal

Interlocking signal
M13
Stapler font/rear shift home position signal

Stapler PCB PI 65
Front gripper shift enable signal

Stapler front/rear shift
motor clock sensor
M20
Interlock-
ing
switch PI 66
MSW1 Stapler Stapler front/rear
motor shift home position
PI 68 sensor
Staple
PHOI 2 sensor PHOI 1
Stapler home
position sensor
Stapler leading edge PI 67
paper sensor Front gripper
shift sensor
Figure 2-525
2. Stapler
a. Outline
Figure 2-526 shows the construction of the stapler.
Stapling is executed by the stapler motor (M20). Specifically, the rotation of a cam
initiates stapling, and the stapling home position sensor (PHOI1) detects the end of a
single stapling operation.
The staple sensor (PHOI2) is used to detect the presence/absence of staples inside
the staple cartridge.
The interlocking switch (MSW1) is used to find out whether the stapler cover used for
jam access is open or closed.
Interlocking switch Stapler motor
M20
MSW1
PHOI 2
PHOI 1
Staple sensor Stapler home position sensor
Figure 2-526
b. Operation
The stapler is driven by the stapler motor (M20) operated by two types of cams (cam
A and cam B). The cam A is used to drive the head assembly, while the cam B is used
to drive the clincher assembly.
The head assembly consists of a shaper and a driver. The shaper serves to bend a
staple into a specific shape, and the driver serves to punch the bent staple into a stack
of copies.
In the clincher assembly, the staple punched by the driver is cut to suit the thickness
of the stack of copies and then bent.
The chips of the staple are collected by the staple chip case, and most jam staples
occuring as a result of an error are moved through the stapler unit for collection in the
staple jam case.
Motor
Cam A
Shaper
Head assembly
Clincher assembly
Staple jam case
Driver Cam B
Staple chip case
Figure 2-527
Stapling is executed as follows:

Shaper
1) The driver forces the first staple
against the upper surface of the stack
of copies. At the same time, the Driver
former starts to bend the second
staple of the stapled sheet.
Staple sheet
2nd staple
1st staple
2) The driver pushes in the first staple Shaper

farther into the stack of copies. At the
same time, the shaper ends bending
the second staple fully.
Driver
2nd staple
1st staple
3) The driver pushes in the first staple

even farther so that it penetrates
through the stack of copies and its
ends bend.
Ends bend
Figure 2-528
4) The cutter cuts the excess ends

Cutter
off the staple. The staple chips are
collected to the staple chip case.
Staple after cutting
Staple chip case
5) The clincher bends the ends of the

staple fully.
Clincher
6) The driver and the shaper return to Shaper

home position, and the 2nd staple is
positioned against the lower of the
driver in preparation for the next Driver
stapling operation.
3rd staple
2nd staple
Figure 2-529
c. Controlling the Stapler Motor (M20)

Figure 2-530 shows the circuit used to control the stapler motor. The stapler motor is
a DC motor, and the circuit has the following functions:
• Turning on and off the stapler motor
• Controlling the direction of rotation of the stapler motor
• Controlling the current
+24VP
Finisher
controller
PCB Stapler
+5V motor
Q7 Q8
CW M20
CCW Q5 Q6
Interlocking
switch signal
Current control
circuit
Figure 2-530
• Turning On And Off the Stapler Motor and Controlling the Direction of Rotation
The stapler motor is turned on/off and its direction is controlled based on the
combination of the following two control signals:
1. Stapler motor clockwise rotation (M20 CW)
2. Stapler motor counterclockwise rotation (M20 CCW)
Stapler motor direction Clockwise rotation signal Counterclockwise rotation

of rotation (M20 CW) signal (M20 CCW)
Clockwise 0 1
Counterclockwise 1 0
Stop 1 1
• Controlling the Current

To prevent current above a specific level from flowing into the stapler motor, the
circuit is equipped with a current control circuit.
If an overcurrent is about to flow into the stapler motor, the current control circuit
turns on to cut out the stapler motor drive signal, thereby preventing the overcurrent
from flowing.
If an overcurrent occurs in succession, the stapler motor drive signal will also be cut
in succession, not enabling the stapler to move back to its home position within a
specific period of time. The finisher controller PCB will identify such a condition as
a stapler motor (M20) error, and will indicate ‘E531’ on the copier’s control panel.
d. Controlling the Stapler Motor in Response to a Staple Jam

When a staple jam or an error occurs in the stapler unit, the stapler motor (M20) will
be controlled as follows:
1) A staple jam or an error imposes an overload on the stapler motor.
2) The stapler cannot return to its home position within 0.5 sec after it starts
punching a staple.
3) The stapler motor rotates in reverse to return the stapler to stapling home
position.
4) ‘E531’ is indicated on the copier’s control panel.
e. Detecting Staples
The presence/absence of staples within the staple cartridge is checked by the
reflecting type staple sensor (PHOI2) built into the lower part of the stapler.
The staples inside the staple cartridge are forced down by the work of a spring and a
holding plate. Further, the staples are moved to the end of the stapler by the work of a
staple feeding belt.
When staples exist, the staple sensor (PHOI2) receives the light reflected by the
staples at the lower part of the staple cartridge so that the finisher controller PCB can
identify the presence of staples.
When the staple cartridge starts to run out of staples (about 55 staples remaining),
the staple sensor (PHOI2) becomes free of light, causing the finisher controller PCB to
identify the absence of staples.
When the absence of staples is detected, the finisher controller PCB will indicate the
Add Staple message on the copier’s control panel and the finisher’s display.
The absence of staples will prevent any further stapling; however, if the condition is
detected during continuous stapling, stapling will be continued until all stacks within bins
have been stapled.
Reference:
After the absence of staples has been detected, about 23 stapling operations are still
possible. Thereafter, the staple sheet will be displaced off the staple feeding belt, most
likely preventing proper stapling operation.
Staple cartridge
Spring
Holding plate
Staple feeding belt
PHOI 2 PHOI 2
Staple
Staple sensor
Staples Present Staples Absent
Figure 2-531
3. Shifting the Stapler Unit
a. Outline
Since the finisher executes all stapling operations while keeping the stapler unit in
home position, the stapler unit must always be shifted to the front or the rear in staple
mode.
b. Operation
The stapler unit is shifted to the front or the rear by the stapler front/rear shift motor
(M13) using a belt, and its position is determined in relation to the pulses from the stapler
front/rear shift motor (M13).
The stapler unit drive system is equipped with the following sensors to check the
position of the stapler unit:
• Stapler front/rear shift motor clock sensor (PI65)
• Stapler front/rear shift home position sensor (PI66)
• Front gripper shift enable sensor (PI67)
• Stapler leading edge paper sensor (PI68)
(front)
(PI 66)
(PI 67)
(PI 65)
(PI 68)
home position detection signal
Stapler unit
Front gripper shift enable
paper detection signal


Stapler leading edge
Stapler
Stapler front/rear
shift motor drive
front/rear
clock signal
shift motor (M13)

signal
signal
Figure 2-532
The stapler front/rear shift motor clock sensor (PI65) monitors the number of rotations
made by the clock plate mounted to the stapler font/rear shift motor (M13), checking for
an error in the motor operation.
The stop positions for stapling are as shown in Table 2-507, varied according to the
size of copy paper and the type of stapling.
Stop position (distance from home position; mm)

Double
Copy paper size Corner Single Front Rear
B5 79.5 136.5 256.5
A4 79.5 156.5 276.5
B4 79.5 136.5 256.5
A3 79.5 156.5 276.5
B5R 79.5 238.5
A4R 79.5 266.5
LTR 79.5 148.0 267.4
LGL 79.5
279.4 × 431.8mm (11” × 17”) 79.5 148.0 267.4
LTRR 79.5 272.4
Table 2-507
The stapler front/rear shift home position sensor (PI66) is used to detect the home
position of the stapler unit.
The front gripper shift enable sensor (PI67) is used to find out that the stop position
of the stapler unit is not in the path taken by the front gripper moving to the left or the
right. The front gripper is allowed to move to the left or to the right when the front gripper
enable sensor (PI67) is on and, at the same time, the front gripper front/rear shift safety
sensor (PI62) is on.
If the front gripper was allowed to move to the left or to the right when the stapler unit
is outside the area of detection by the front gripper shift enable sensor (PI67), it could
collide with the stapler unit while moving.
Front gripper
Collides
Stapler unit
Figure 2-533
The stapler leading edge paper sensor (PI68) is used to find out whether a stack of
copies has been drawn out as far as stapling position, thereby preventing problems
otherwise caused by idle punching. The stapler leading edge paper detection signal is
used to control the movement of a stack by the side gripper.
Stapler leading edge Stapler

Stack of copies paper sensor (PI68)
Side gripper
Figure 2-534
c. Controlling the Stapler Front/Rear Shift Motor (M13)
1) Outline
Figure 2-535 shows the circuit used to control the stapler front/rear shift motor (M13).
The stapler front/rear shift motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor, and the circuit has
the following functions:
• Switching the current (with motor in operation or at rest)
• Controlling the direction of rotation and the speed of the motor
• Checking the status of the motor
Stapler
+5V +24V +24V Stapler
front/rear
front/rear
Motor phase shift motor shift motor
control signal IC23 A clock sensor
Motor PI65
(M13 PC)
drive M13
Motor rotation
Finisher pluse
direction signal IC26
controller generation A*
(M13 F/R) Motor
PCB circuit driver
B
Current
switching B*
signal Q30
(M13 DCC)
Clock pulse
Figure 2-535
2) Operation
The finisher controller PCB sends the motor rotation direction signal (M3 F/R) and the
motor phase control signal (M13 PC) to the motor drive pulse generation circuit on the
stack processing unit driver PCB.
In response, the motor drive pulse generation circuit sends the appropriate phase
control signal for the motor to the motor driver.
The motor driver controls the output timing of pulse signals to suit the phase control
signal for the motor.
The staple front/rear shift motor switches its direction of rotation and speed in
response to the output of the pulse signals. The current switching signals from the
finisher controller PCB, on the other hand, are used to switch the current to suit the status
of the motor (in operation or at rest), thereby preventing excess heating.
3) Detecting a Motor Error

The stapler front/rear shift motor clock sensor (PI54) keeps count of the rotation of
the disc on the encoder mounted to the drive system used to shift the stapler to the front
and the rear, and sends the result to the finisher controller PCB in the form of pulses (A).
The finisher controller PCB, on the other hand, compares these incoming pulses against
the pulses (B) of the rotation speed signal sent to drive the stapler front/rear shift motor.
As long as the operation of the stapler front/rear shift motor is normal, the ratio
between pulses A and B per unit time remains constant.
Unit time Unit time
Pulses (B) of rotation

speed signal
Pulses (A) of encoder
Figure 2-536 (motor operation normal)
If an error occurs in the operation of the stapler front/rear shift motor, the ratio of
pulses A and B per unit time will show a discrepancy from a specific ratio; the finisher
controller PCB will identify such a condition as a stapler front/rear shift motor (M13) error,
and indicate ‘E532’ on the copier’s control panel.
Unit time Unit time
Pulses (B) of rotation speed

signal
Pulses (A) of encoder
Figure 2-537 (motor operation faulty)
4. Sequence of Operations (double stapling)
Stapler Shift Unit

Stapler front/rear Forward Forward Reverse
shift motor (M13)
Stapler front/rear
shift motor clock
sensor (PI65)
Stapler front/rear
shift home position
sensor (PI66)
Front gripper shift

sensor (P67)
Stapler Unit
a
sensor (PI68)
Stapler motor (M20)
Interlocking switch
(PI2)
Stapler home position

sensor (PHOI1)
Staple absent sensor

(PHOI2)
Figure 2-538
E. Front Gripper Drive System

1. Outline
The front gripper is designed to move the stack of copies carried by the side gripper
from the bin to the stacker, and it executes the following operations:
• Shifting to the front and the rear
• Shifting to the left and the right
• Clasping
The front gripper is moved to the front and the rear by the front gripper front/rear shift
motor (M11).
The front gripper is moved to the left and the right by the front gripper left/right shift
motor (M10).
The front gripper executes clasping operation by the work of the front gripper grip
motor (M12).
Front gripper left/right

shift motor
Front gripper front/rear

shift motor
M10
M11
M12
Front gripper grip motor
Figure 2-539
2. Shifting the Front Gripper to the Front and the Rear
a. Outline
The front gripper is shifted to the front and the rear for the following purpose:
• To ensure that it always clasps the stack of copies at its middle.
Front gripper
Middle
Copy paper
Figure 2-540
• To stagger stacks on the stacker tray.
The front gripper is moved to the front and the rear by means of a belt operated by
the front gripper front/rear shift motor (M11). The front gripper front/rear shift motor clock
sensor (PI59) monitors the rotation of the clock plate mounted on the front gripper
front/rear shift dirve system to find out the movement (travel distance) of the front gripper.
The front/rear shift home position sensor (PI60) is used to monitor the front/rear home
position of the front gripper. In addition, the following two sensors are used to check the
front/rear position of the front gripper:
• Front gripper front limit sensor (PI61)
• Front gripper front/rear shift safety sensor (PI62)

shift motor clock sensor
(PI59)
Front gripper front/rear shift home
Front gripper front/rear position sensor (PI60)
shift motor

shift safety sensor (PI62)
M11
Front gripper front limit

sensor (PI61)
Figure 2-541
b. Operation
The front gripper is controlled so that it always clasps the middle of each stack, and
it is stopped in reference to the count of the rotation of the encoder disc (mounted to the
front gripper front/rear shift motor shaft) kept by the front gripper front/rear shift encoder
sensor (PI59). It is stopped at a specific point (A) as determined according to paper size
as shown in Table 2-508.

motor clock sensor (PI 59)
Figure 2-542
Copy paper size Stop position (A; distance from home position)
A4 0 mm (home position)
B5 20 mm
B4 20 mm
B5R 57.5 mm
A4R 43.5 mm
LTR 8.8 mm
LGL 40.6 mm
LTRR 40.6 mm
Table 2-508
When the stack tray is used, the front gripper is shifted starting with stacking of the
second stack, and the shift is about 20 mm to the front from where the first stack is
placed.
Front gripper
1st stack
20m
m
2nd stack
Figure 2-543
c. Detecting the Position of the Front Gripper (front/rear)

The finisher is equipped with a front gripper front limit sensor (PI61) and a front
gripper front/rear safety sensor (PI62) to monitor the position of the front gripper in its
path.
The front gripper front limit sensor (PI61) serves to detect an excess movement of the
front gripper outside its range of travel. The finisher controller PCB will identify such a
condition as a front gripper front/rear shift motor (M11) error, and indicate ‘E574’ on the
copier’s control panel and stop the operation of the finisher.
Flag
PI 62
PI 61
Figure 2-544
The front gripper front/rear safety sensor (PI62), on the other hand, serves to check
whether the front gripper is at a point from which it may move to the left or to the right.
The front gripper is allowed to move to the left or to the right when the front gripper
front/rear safety sensor (PI62) is on and, at the same time, when the front gripper shift
sensor (PI67) is on.
If the front gripper was allowed to move to the left or to the right while it is outside the
range of detection by the front gripper front/rear safety sensor, it could collide with the
stapler unit.

safety sensor (PI62)
Collision
Front gripper shift

enable sensor (PI67) Front gripper
Stapler unit
Figure 2-545
d. Controlling the Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Motor (M11)
1) Outline
Figure 2-546 shows the circuit used to control the front gripper front/rear shift motor
(M11). The motor is a DC motor, and the circuit has the following functions:
• Turning on and off the motor.
The circuit possesses a logic circuit used to determine whether to drive or stop the
motor based on combinations of signals from sensors.

+24VP
+24VP
Logic circuit
CW
A
Q12 Q13
Q28 M11
+24VP
CCW Front gripper front/rear
B shift motor
Q17 Q18
Q29
C
PI 59
shift motor clock sensor
A: Front gripper front/rear shift home position signal (PI 60)

B: Front gripper front/rear limit signal (PI 61)
C: Front gripper front/rear shift safety signal (PI 61) , front gripper left/right safety signal (PI 58) ,
front gripper shift signal (PI 67) ; combination of these signals.
Figure 2-546
2) Turning On and Off the Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Motor and Controlling the
Direction of Rotation
The front gripper front/rear shift motor is turned on or off and its direction of rotation
is controlled based on combinations of the following two types of signals:
CW: Front gripper front/rear shift motor clockwise signal (front gripper moves to the
rear)
CCW: Front gripper front/rear shift motor counterclockwise signal (front gripper moves
to the front)
Front gripper front/rear shift motor status CW CCW

Front gripper is moved to the front 0 1
Front gripper is moved to the rear 1 0
Stopped 1 1
Table 2-509
The logic circuit calls for the conditions shown in Table 2-510 for the front gripper
front/rear shift motor to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. The motor is allowed to
rotate only when each of the conditions is met:
Front gripper is moved to the rear

Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Flag over Flag over Flag over
Sensor name (notation) sensor I/O display sensor I/O display sensor I/O display
Front gripper front/rear shift home No P144-3 : 0 No P144-3 : 0 No P144-3 : 0
Front gripper front/rear shift front limit * P148-4 : * * P148-4 : * * P148-4 : *
sensor (PI61)
Front gripper front/rear shift safety Yes P148-5 : 0 No P148-5 : 1 Yes P148-5 : 0
sensor (PI62)
Front gripper shift enable sensor Yes P148-6 : 0 * P148-6 : * No P148-6 : 1
(PI67)
Front gripper left/right shift safety * P148-3 : * Yes P148-3 : 0 Yes P148-3 : 0
sensor (PI58)
*Either.
Front gripper is moved to the front
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3

Flag over Flag over Flag over
Sensor name (notation) sensor I/O display sensor I/O display sensor I/O display
Front gripper front/rear shift home * P144-3 : * * P144-3 : * * P144-3 : *
Front gripper front/rear shift front limit No P148-4 : 1 No P148-4 : 1 No P148-4 : 1
sensor (PI61)
Front gripper front/rear shift safety Yes P148-5 : 0 No P148-5 : 1 Yes P148-5 : 0
sensor (PI62)
Front gripper shift enable sensor Yes P148-6 : 0 * P148-6 : * No P148-6 : 1
(PI67)
Front gripper left/right shift safety * P148-3 : * Yes P148-3 : 0 Yes P148-3 : 0
sensor (PI58)
*Either.
Table 2-510
3. Shifting the Front Gripper to the Left and the Right
a. Outline
The front gripper is shifted to the left or the right so that the stack carried from the bin
by the side gripper may be moved to the stack tray.
The front gripper is shifted to the front and the rear by a belt operated by the front
gripper left/right shift motor (M10).
The left/right shift home position sensor (PI55) is used to detect the home position of
the front gripper.

shift motor (M10)
Front gripper left/right shift

home position sensor
(PI 55) Belt
Figure 2-547
b. Operation
The stop position of the front gripper is determined in reference to the count taken of
the rotation of the encoder disc (mounted to the front gripper left/right shift drive system)
by the front gripper left/right shift clock sensor (PI54).
The stop position in left direction is the same regardless of copy size (about 220 mm
from the home position).
Front gripper
Approx. 220mm
Left direction Home position
Stop position
Figure 2-548
The stop position (A) in right position varies according to copy paper size and
depending on the presence/absence of folded paper. The stop position of the front
gripper in relation to copy paper size and the presence/absence of folded paper is as
shown in Table 2-511
Copy paper size (final size) Folding Stop position (A; from home position)
No 0 mm (home position)
B5
Yes 0 mm (home position)
No 28 mm
A4
Yes 28 mm
B4 No 177 mm
B5R No 75 mm
A4R No 115 mm
No 33.9 mm
LTR
Yes 33.9 mm
LGL No 173.6 mm
LTRR No 97.4 mm
Table 2-511

shift clock sensor (PI54)

shift home position sensor (PI55)
Figure 2-549
c. Detecting the Position of the Front Gripper in Left/Right Direction

The finisher is equipped with the following sensors to check the position of the front
gripper in its left/right shift path:
• Front gripper left shift limit sensor (PI56)
• Front gripper right shift limit sensor (PI57)
• Front gripper left/right safety sensor (PI58)
The front gripper left shift limit sensor (PI56) and the front gripper right shift sensor
(PI57) are used to check excess shifts by the front gripper over its range of travel. When
the front gripper reaches the front gripper limit sensor, finisher controller will identify such
a condition as a front gripper left/right shift motor (M10) error, and indicate ‘E573’ on the
copier’s control panel and stop the operation of the finisher.
If, after having reached the front gripper right limit sensor, the front gripper attempts
to move farther to the right, the finisher controller will assume an error in the front gripper
left/right shift motor (M10), indicating ‘E573’ on the copier’s control panel and, at the
same time, stopping the machine’s operation.

safety sensor (PI58)
Front gripper left shift Front gripper right shift
limit sensor (PI56) limit sensor
(PI57)
Figure 2-550
The front gripper left/right shift safety sensor (PI58) is used to check whether the
stapler is at a point from which it may be shifted to the front or the rear. If the front gripper
was allowed to move when it is outside the range of detection by the front gripper
front/rear shift safety sensor (PI58), it could collide with the front gripper.
PI 58
Front gripper
Stapler
Figure 2-551

shift safety sensor
ange of detection
shift safety sensor (PI58)
Front gripper
Stapler unit
Figure 2-552
d. Safety Area of the Front Gripper and the Stapler Unit

Both the front gripper and the stapler unit move within the stack processing unit.
The front gripper moves in front/rear and left/right directions (about 397 mm in
front/rear; about 77.5 mm in left/right).
The stapler unit moves only in front/rear direction (about 276.5 mm).
There is an area where two overlap (A of the figure), making collision a possibility if
not controlled properly. Safety areas are provided to avoid such collision.
397
276.5
77.5
A
Figure 2-553 (top view)
The safety areas of the front gripper refer to the areas where the front gripper stops
but will not affect the movement of the stapler unit. These areas are found in both
front/rear and left/right directions for the front gripper.
The area in the front/rear direction is found about 18 mm from the home position
(YHP) in the front direction, where collision will not occur even when the stapler unit
executes corner stapling. This area (B) is monitored by the front gripper front/rear safety
sensor (PI62).
The safety area in the left/right direction is about 15 mm to the left and about 177 mm
to the right from the home position (XHP), about 192 mm from the right end of the
movement range of the front gripper, where collision will not occur even when the stapler
unit executes double stapling. This area (C) is monitored by the front gripper left/right
safety sensor (PI58).
The safety area of the stapler unit refers to the area where the stapler unit stops but
will not affect the movement of the front gripper. The safety area of the stapler unit is only
in the front/rear direction, and is about 82.5 mm toward the rear from the home position.
The area is where collision will not occur even when the front gripper moves to collect
stacks of copy paper, and is monitored by the front gripper movement enable sensor
(PI67).
205 15 XHP 177 YHP

yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 18
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
B
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
276.5
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
77.5
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
C
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
D 192
82.5
Safety area B : front gripper front / rear safty sensor (PI 62)
Safety area C : front gripper left / rear safty sensor (PI 58)
Safety area D : front gripper front / rear safty sensor (PI 67)
Figure 2-554 (top view)
e. Controlling the Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor (M10)
1) Outline
Figure 2-555 shows the circuit used to control the front gripper left/right shift motor
(M10). The motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor, and the circuit has the following
functions:
• Switching the current (with motor in operation and at rest)
• Controlling the direction and the speed of rotation of the motor
• Detecting motor errors
+5V +24V +24V

Phase control Front gripper left/right
signal
shift motor
(M10 PC) J110-3
IC24 A
J7-15 J105-15 Motor
drive
pulse -1 M10
Rotation direction
signal genera- IC28
(M10 F/R) tion A* -4
Finisher circuit
Motor
J7-16 J105-16 driver
controller
PCB B -5
Current switching -2
signal B* -6
Q32
(M10 DCC)
J7-17 J105-17
Clock signal
(FG(X) CLK) J107-B2
J8-B8 J104-B8 PI 54
Stack processing unit driver PCB shift motor clock sensor
Figure 2-555
2) Operation
The finisher controller PCB sends the motor rotation direction signal (M10 F/R) and
the motor phase control signal (M10 PC) to the motor drive pulse generation circuit on
the stack processing unit driver PCB.
The motor drive pulse generation circuit sends the appropriate control signal for the
motor according to the incoming signal.
The motor driver controls the output timing of pulse signals according to the motor
phase control signal, thereby switching the direction and the speed of rotation of the front
gripper left/right shift motor.
The current switching signal from the finisher controller PCB is used to switch the
level of current to drive or to stop the motor, thereby preventing excess heating of the
motor.
3) Detecting Motor Errors

The front gripper left/right shift clock sensor (PI54) keeps count of the rotation of the
encoder disc mounted to the front gripper left/right shift drive shaft, and communicates
the count as pulses (A) to the finisher controller PCB, which in turn compares these
pulses against the pulses (B) of the rotation speed signal sent to drive the front gripper
left/right shift motor.
As long as the operation of the front gripper left/right shift motor is normal, the ratio
between pulses A and B per unit time is identical.
Unit time Unit time
Pulses B of rotation
speed signal
Pulses A of encoder
Figure 2-556 (motor operation is normal)
If an error occurs in the operation of the front gripper left/right shift motor, however,
the ratio between pulses A an B will show a discrepancy. The finisher controller PCB will
identify such a condition as a front gripper left/right shift motor (M10) error, and indicate
Unit time Unit time
Pulses B of rotation
speed signal
Pulses A of encoder
Figure 2-557 (motor operation is faulty)
4. Clasping Operation of the Front Gripper
a. Outline
The front gripper clasps a stack of copies after making a left/right shift, and it is
executed by the front gripper grip motor (M12).
The clasping home position sensor (PI63) is used to check home position for
clasping, and the front gripper paper sensor (PI64) checks the presence/absence of a
stack after clasping operation.
Stack processing
driver PCB
Front gripper paper detection signal (PGPD)

signal (FGHP)
Front gripper grip motor drive

signal (M12D)
Front gripper grip

motor (M12)
Front gripper paper
sensor (PI64)

sensor (PI63)
Figure 2-558
b. Controlling the Front Gripper Grip Motor (M12)

Figure 2-559 shows the circuit used to control the front gripper motor (M12). The
motor is a DC motor, and rotates in one direction only, and the circuit is used to turn on
and off the motor.
The front gripper grip motor starts to rotate when the finisher controller PCB sends
the motor drive signal (M12D) to the stack processing unit driver PCB. When the front
gripper clasping home position sensor (PI63) sends signals (FGHP) to the finisher
controller PCB while the front gripper grip motor is rotating, the front gripper grip motor
drive signal (M12D) will be cut out to stop the motor.
+5V +24VP +24VP

Front gripper grip
motor drive signal
(M12D)
Q35 Q10
M12
Q22
Front gripper
grip motor
Q15
Clasping home
position signal
(FGHP) PI 63
Clasping home
position sensor
Figure 2-559
c. Sequence of Operations (front gripper motor)
Gripper Releasing Clasping Releasing Clasping

(M12)
Front gripper clasping home
Figure 2-560
d. Detecting a Stack
The front gripper paper sensor (PI64) is used to detect the presence/absence of a
stack in the front gripper after finishing clasping operation.
When the front gripper ends clasping operation, the detecting arm is pushed by the
stack and the movement is detected by the front gripper paper sensor (PI64). If the front
gripper paper sensor detects the absence of a stack, the finisher controller PCB will
indicate the Jam message on the copier’s control panel and immediately stop the
operation of the finisher.
Front gripper paper

sensor (PI64) PI64
Stack
Figure 2-561
e. Sequence of Operations (detecting a stack)
Normal
Gripper status Released Gripping Released Gripping

Front gripper clasping
motor (M12)
HP sensor (PI48)
Figure 2-562
F. Jams
1. Outline
The finisher’s paper paths include the common path and the special paths formed by
the side gripper and the front gripper. For this reason, the finisher is equipped with the
three sensors and a pair of sensors shown in Figure 2-563 to find out whether paper is
moving properly in the paths formed by the side gripper and the front gripper.
The CPU checks the signals from these sensors at such times as programmed in
advance to check for a jam; and, when it identifies a jam, it will send the jam signal to the
copier, causing the copier to stop copying operation and indicate the Jam message. (The
CPU will also indicate the Jam message on the finisher’s display.)
If a jam occurs while paper is moving through the stack processing unit, the CPU will
indicate the Jam message on the copier’s control panel and the finisher’s display after
having moved all the copies in the stack.
The CPU will identify the following conditions as jams:
a. Paper exists at a specific sensor when the power is turned on or when the doors are
closed. (power-on jam)
b. Copy paper does not reach a specific sensor within a specific period of time. (delay
jam)
c. Copy paper does not move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time.
(stationary jam)
d. The edge feeding sensor turns on when copy paper is moved by the side gripper.
(skew jam)
e. The paper sensor for each gripper does not turn on after “narrow” clasping operation
of the side gripper or the front gripper. (faulty alignment jam)
f. The edge feeding sensor turns on before the side gripper starts to operate. (faulty
stacking jam)
g. The stapler leading edge sensor turns on after the end of operation by the side
gripper. (faulty return jam)
h. The front cover or the non-sort tray is opened while the finisher is in operation. (door
open jam)
The recovery function will not turn on for jams occurring in the stack processing unit.
Notation Sensor Type Notation Sensor Type

PI49 Side gripper paper sensor Power-on jam LED3/PT3 Edge feeding sensor Stationary/
PI64 Front gripper paper sensor skew/faulty
stacking jam
PI68 Stapler leading edge paper
sensor PI49 Side gripper paper sensor Faulty
PI64 Front gripper paper sensor alignment jam
LED3/PT3 Edge feeding sensor
PI68 Stapler leading edge paper Delay/faulty
sensor return jam
Edge feeding sensor

(light-receiving: PT3)
Front gripper paper sensor (PI64)
Side gripper paper sensor

(PI49)
Stack processing
unit
Edge feeding sensor
(light-emitting: LED3)
Stapler leading edge paper sensor (PI68)
Figure 2-563
2. Sequence of Operations (jam detection)
a. Side Gripper Feeding Delay Jam

yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
shift motor (M8) ,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy
Side gripper paper sensor Clasping Releasing Clasping
(PI49)
Stapler leading edge paper Normal Error
sensor (PI68)
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
,,,,,,: Motor reverse rotation
yyyyyy
Figure 2-564
b. Side Gripper Skew Jam

yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy
shift motor (M8) yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
Side gripper paper Clasping Releasing Clasping
sensor (PI49)
Edge feeding sensor Normal Error
(LED3, PT3)
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
,,,,,, : Motor reverse rotation
yyyyyy
Figure 2-565
o a au ty
Edge feeding sensor (PT3)
Edge feeding sensor (LED3)
Figure 2-566
c. Front Gripper Stationary Jam

,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,
Side gripper paper sensor Clasping Releasing Clasping
(PI49)
(LED3, PT3)
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
yyyyyy
Figure 2-567
Normal Faulty
Edge feeding sensor
Figure 2-568
d. Faulty Alignment Jam (during clasping operation by side gripper)

yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy
Clasping Releasing Clasping
Side gripper paper Normal Error
sensor (PI49)
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
,,,,,,: Motor reverse rotation
yyyyyy
Figure 2-569
e. Faulty Alignment Jam (during clasping by front gripper)

yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
shift motor (M10) yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
Clasping Releasing Clasping
Front gripper grip motor (M12)
Front gripper paper Normal Error
sensor (PI64)
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
yyyyyy
yyyyyy
Figure 2-570
f. Faulty Stacking Jam (before clasping by side gripper)

yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
shift motor (M8) yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
(M12)
(LED3, PT3)
yyyyy
,,,,,
,,,,,
yyyyy
,,,,, : Motor reverse rotation
yyyyy
Figure 2-571
Normal Faulty
Edge feeding sensor
Figure 2-572
g. Faulty Return Jam (during stapling of L-size paper)

yyyyyy
,,,,,, yyyyyy
,,,,,,
shift motor (M8) ,,,,,,
yyyyyy ,,,,,,
yyyyyy
Side gripper grip motor Clasping Releasing Clasping
(M9)
Side gripper paper
sensor (PI49)
Stapler leading edge Normal Error
paper sensor (PI68)
yyyyy
,,,,,
,,,,, : Motor reverse rotation
yyyyy
Figure 2-573
G. Sequence of Operations
1. A4, Double Stapling, Sort Mode
Bin shift enable signal Bin unit shift enable signal
Stack processing unit drive signal Bin shift end signal
Stacker tray paper detection signal
1st sack 2nd stack
Stack processing shift

motor (M14)
UP position sensor (PI70)
shift motor (M9) yyyy
,,,, yyyy
,,,,
,,,,
yyyy Fed by about 10 mm
,,,,
yyyy Fed by about 10 mm
Paper leading edge
sensor (PT3)
Paper holding
solenoid (SL7)
Side gripper clasping Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing
motor (M9)
Side gripper clasping
Side gripper paper
sensor (PI49)
Bin rear end wall
Bin rear end wall CLOSE
sensor (PI68)
Stapler shift motor
yyyyyy
,,,,,, yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
(M13) ,,,,,,
yyyyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
Stapler shift home
Stapler motor (M20)

Stapling home position
sensor (PHOI2)
Front gripper front/rear Shift for stacking
shift motor (M11) yyyy
,,,,
Front gripper front/rear shift
,,,,
yyyy
Front gripper left-right
shift motor (M10) yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,, yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy
Front gripper grip
motor (M12)
Front gripper clasping Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing
,,,,
yyyy
yyyy
,,,,
yyyy : Motor reverse rotation
,,,,
Figure 2-574
2. A3, Stapling, Sort Mode
Bin unit shift enable signal Bin unit shift enable signal
Stacking unit drive signal Bin unit shift end signal
1st stack 2nd stack
Stack processing shift

motor (M14)
UP position sensor (PI70)
yyyy
,,,, yyyy
,,,, yyyy
,,,, yyyyy
,,,,,
shift motor (M9)
,,,,Fed by about 10 mm
yyyy ,,,,
yyyy ,,,,Fed by about 10 mm
yyyy ,,,,,
yyyyy
Paper leading edge
sensor (PT3)
(SL7)
Side gripper grip Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing
motor (M9)
Side gripper clasping home
Side gripper paper sensor
(PI49)
Bin rear end wall
paper sensor (PI68)
yyyyyy
,,,,,, yyyyyy
,,,,,,
Stapler shift motor (M13) ,,,,,,
yyyyyy ,,,,,,
yyyyyy
Stapler shift home position ,,,,,,
yyyyyy ,,,,,,
yyyyyy
sensor (PI66)
Stapler motor (M20)

Stapling home position
sensor (PHOI2)
shift motor (M11)
motor (M10)
Front gripper clip motor
(M12)
yyyyy
,,,,,
,,,,,
yyyyy
,,,,,: Motor reverse rotation
yyyyy
Figure 2-575
VI. STACKER UNIT
A. Outline
The stacks of copies carried by the stack processing unit are stacked in the stacker
unit. Once stacked in the stacker unit, the stacks may be removed by opening the access
door even while the copier is making copies.
The stacker unit consists of the following drive systems:
• Stacker unit up/down drive system
• Stacker tray up/down drive system
• Leading edge stopper drive system
• Lift wall drive system
The stacker unit is equipped with an emergency stop button which may be used to
immediately stop any on-going operation of the copier or the finisher. (For details, see
p.2-190.)
Leading edge stopper Lift wall Stacker tray
Emergency stop button
Stacker unit
Access door
Figure 2-601
B. Stacker Unit Up/Down Drive System
1. Outline
Figure 2-602 shows the construction of the up/down drive system of the stacker unit.
The stacker unit moves up and down to receive stacks of copies from the stack
processing unit.
The stacker unit is moved up and down by means of a belt operated by the stacker
unit shift motor (M15).
The stacker unit is suspended by two springs so as to limit the load imposed on the
stacker unit shift motor.
To determine the stop position of the stacker unit, three sensors (PI35, PI36, PI37)
are used.
The stacker unit shift brake 1 (BK1) and the stacker unit shift brake 2 (BK4) used to
make sure that the stacker unit is stopped at a specific position.
The stacker unit shift motor clock sensor (PI47) is used to check the status (in
operation/at rest) and the speed of the motor and to obtain signals for reference when
turning on the stacker unit shift brake 1 (BK1) and the stacker unit shift brake 2 (BK4).
Stacker unit UP position Stacker unit home position

sensor (PI35) sensor (PI36)
Stacker unit DOWN position

sensor (PI37)
Stacker unit
shift brake 2
(BK4)
Stacker unit
Stacker unit shift motor

clock sensor (PI47)
Stacker unit shift

motor (M15)
Stacker unit shift

brake 1 (BK1)
Figure 2-602
2. Operation
Although the stacker unit is moved up/down in sort or staple sort mode, it may not be
moved for certain copy paper sizes. The stacker unit is moved as shown in Table 2-601.

(11" × 17"), LTRR
No No A3, 279.4 × 431.8mm (11" × 17")
Table 2-601
The stacker unit shift motor (M15) is driven by signals from the finisher controller
PCB. The stacker unit stops when it has moved to a specific position and specific
sensors detect it.
In addition to home position, the stacker unit may be stopped at either of three points;
UP position 1/UP position 2 and DOWN position.
Stop position Distance from home position (approx.) Sensor (notation)

UP position 1 129 mm in upward direction Stacker unit UP position sensor
(PI35)
UP position 2 25 mm in upward direction Stacker unit UP position sensor
(PI35)
DOWN position 240 mm in downward position Stacker unit DOWN position
sensor (PI37)
Table 2-602
UP position 1 is the point of reference used when the stacker unit (with contracted lift
wall) receives and places stacks of copies from the stack processing unit located at UP
position.
Lift wall
129mm
Home position
Stacker unit
Figure 2-603
UP position 2 is the point of reference used when the stacker unit (with extended lift
wall) receives and places stacks of copies from the stack processing unit located at UP
position.
Lift wall
25mm
Home position
Stacker unit
Figure 2-604
DOWN position is the point of reference used when the stacker unit receives and
places stacks of copies from the stack processing unit located at DOWN position.
240mm
Home position
Stacker unit
Figure 2-605
The home position of the stacker unit is where the stacks of copies may be removed.
The finisher’s access door can be opened only when the stacker unit is at home position,
as controlled by the access door solenoid (SL3). When the access key (PSW1) on the
finisher is pressed, the access door solenoid (SL3) turns on to open the access door.
Stacker unit home

position sensor
(PI36)
Access key (PSW1)
Access door solenoid
Access door
Figure 2-606
When the door switch is pressed, the access key starts to flash, indicating that the
stacker unit is moving to its home position. The door switch stops flashing and remains
on when the move is complete, turning on the access door solenoid to open the access
door.
The stacker unit drive system is equipped with two sensors to limit the range of
stacker unit movement:
• Stacker unit lower limit sensor (PI38)
• Stacker unit NEAR position sensor (PI73)
The stacker unit NEAR position sensor is mounted on the stack processing unit.
Stacker unit NEAR position

sensor (PI73)
Stacker unit lower limit

sensor (PI38)
Figure 2-607
If the stacker unit moves beyond the lower limit, the stacker unit lower limit sensor
(PI38) sends the lower limit signal to the finisher controller PCB.
In response to the lower limit signal, the finisher controller PCB immediately will stop
the operation of the stacker unit shift motor (M15). If the stacker unit does not reach a
specific position within a specific period of time after the stacker shift motor (M15) has
stopped, the finisher controller will identify the condition as a stacker unit shift motor
(M15) error, indicating ‘E581’ on the copier’s control panel.
The stacker unit NEAR sensor (PI73) is mounted on the stack unit and sends the
NEAR signal to the finisher controller PCB when the stack processing unit or the stacker
unit moves more than a specific distance for possible collision.
When the NEAR signal arrives, the finisher controller PCB will immediately stop the
operation of the stacker unit shift motor (M15) and the stack processing unit shift motor
(M14). If the stacker unit or the stack processing unit is moving up, the stack processing
unit is let to move up first and then the stacker unit; if they are moving down, on the other
hand, the stacker unit is let to move down first and then the stack processing unit.
3. Controlling the Stacker Unit Shift Motor (M15)
a. Outline
Figure 2-608 shows the circuit used to control the stacker unit shift motor. The motor
is a DC motor, and the circuit has the following functions:
• Controlling the speed of rotation of the motor.
• Controlling overcurrent.
The circuit has a logic circuit used to determine whether to rotate or stop the motor.

+24VP
Logic circuit
Q31
IC8 CW Q38 Q39

CPU M15
+5V +5V
CCW
RY2 Stacker unit
Q82 shift motor
Q40 Q41
M15PWM
Current control
circuit
Q32
Q71
Figure 2-608
b. Controlling the Speed and the Direction of Rotation of the Stacker Unit Shift Motor
The speed and the direction of rotation of the stacker unit shift motor are controlled
CW: Stacker unit shift motor clockwise rotation signal (stacker unit moves up)
CCW: Stacker unit shift motor counterclockwise rotation (stacker unit moves
down)
M15PWM: Stacker unit shift motor rotation speed signal (0: maximum, 1: minimum)
Stacker shift motor CW CCW M15PWM

Stacker unit moves down 1 0 Variable
Stacker unit moves up 0 1 Variable
Stops 1 1 1
Table 2-603
Because of the logic circuit, the conditions in Table 2-604 must be met for the stacker
unit shift motor to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise; in other words, the stacker unit
shift motor cannot rotate unless each of the conditions is met.
Stacker unit moves up

Condition 1
Flag over
limit. (PI38)
The operation prohibit signal is not No P145-5 : 0
generated, i.e., (PI73):
position. (PI80)
*Either.
Stacker unit moves down

Condition 1
Flag over
limit. (PI38)
The operation prohibit signal is not * P145-5 : *
position. (P180)
*Either.
For I/O display, use the copier’s service mode
Table 2-604
c. Controlling the Current

If an overcurrent flows into the stacker unit shift motor, the current limit circuit turns
on to cut out the signals used to drive the stacker unit shift motor, thereby blocking out
overcurrent.
If an overcurrent occurs in succession, the signals used to drive the stacker unit shift
motor are cut out accordingly, not allowing the stacker unit shift motor to move the
stacker unit to a specific position within a specific period of time. The finisher controller
PCB will identify such a condition as a stacker unit shift motor (M15) error, and indicate
d. Controlling the Stacker Unit Shift Brake (BK1, BK4)
1) Outline
The stacker unit is rather heavy, and therefore it is difficult to stop it in a short time
(about 24 kg without copy paper).
To stop the stacker unit accurately at a specific point, the finisher controls the stacker
shift motor and the stacker unit shift brake (BK1, BK4) with reference to signals from the
stacker unit shift motor clock sensor (PI47).
2) Operation
When the stacker unit UP position sensor (PI35), stacker unit DOWN position sensor
(PI37), or stacker unit home position sensor (PI36) detects the stacker unit while the unit
is in operation, the finisher immediately decreases the speed of the stacker shift motor.
After decreasing the speed of the stacker shift motor, the finisher controller PCB
starts counting the pulses from the stacker unit shift motor clock sensor (PI47). When the
number of pulses reaches a specific value, the finisher controller PCB stops the drive of
the stacker shift motor and, at the same time, turns on the stacker unit shift brake (BK1,
BK4).
3) Sequence of Operations
Motor drive signal Motor drive signal Motor drive signal
Stacker unit UP Stacker unit DOWN Stacker unit UP

(home position → UP) (UP → DOWN) (DOWN → home position)
Normal
yyy
,,,
Low speed ,,,,
yyyy
Reverse Low speed Normalyyyy
,,,,
Low speed
(M15) ,,,
yyy yyyy
,,,, yyyy
,,,,
,,, Pulse
yyy ,,,,Pulse
yyyy ,,,,Pulse
yyyy
count count count
clock sensor (PI47)
Stacker unit shift brake
(BK1/BK4)
Stacker unit home position
sensor (PI36)
Stacker unit UP position
sensor (PI35)
sensor (PI37)
Figure 2-609
C. Stacker Tray Drive System

1. Outline
Figure 2-610 shows the drive system of the stacker tray.

The stacker tray moves up or down to suit the thickness of the stack of copies placed
on it. The up/down movement is driven by the stack tray shift motor (M16), and stopped
by the locking arm operated by the stacker tray locking solenoid (SL9).
The stacker tray stack sensor (PI44) is used to check the presence/absence of a
stack of copies on the stacker tray.
The stacker tray home position sensor (PI43) and the upper limit sensor (PI42) are
used to limit the range of movement of the stacker tray.
The stacker SET sensor (PI41) turns on if the tray is not properly set after it has
received a stack of copies.
The presence/absence of a stack and the thickness of the stack, if any, are indicated
on the display on the door in 5 levels.
Finisher controller
PCB
Stacker tray retaining solenoid drive signal (SL9D*)
Stacker SET detection signal (STS)

Stacker tray shift motor drive signal
PI 41
PI 42
SL9 Stacker tray upper limit detection signal (STTTP)
M16
Stacker tray home position
PI43
PI 43 detection signal (STTHP)
PI 44 Stacker tray stack detection

signal (STTPD)
Stacking indicator ON signal

Stacker tray removal indicator ON signal
Figure 2-610
2. Up/Down Movement
a. Outline
The stacker tray is moved up or down so that the upper surface of the stack of copies
is a specific distance away from the stack processing unit.
When the stack processing unit drops a stack of copies, the stacker tray moves down
until the two pairs of paper surface sensors (LED4, PT4/LED5, PT5) no longer detect
paper.
Then, the stacker tray is moved up until either of the two paper surface sensors
detects the upper surface of the stack of copies.
Paper surface Paper surface

sensor (light-emitting) Paper surface reference
Stack of copies sensor
(light-receiving)
Stacker tray
Figure 2-611
PT5
PT4
LED5
LED4
Figure 2-612
b. Operation
When the stacker tray has repeated up/down movements and the stacker tray has
reached home position, the stacker unit is moved back to its home position. Thereafter,
the lift wall is extended and the stacker tray is moved up to the paper surface reference
point to be ready for the next stack of copies.
In this condition, the finisher will not handle stacks of copies from the lower bin unit.
Stacking operation is continued using the upper bin module only; then, when the
stacker tray home position sensor (PI43) detects the stacker tray, the finisher stops
operation and causes the copier to indicate the Remove Paper message on its control
panel. At this time, the stack on the stacker tray holds about 2,000 copies (about 260 mm
high).
1) The stacker tray moves 2) The stacker unit moves 3) The lift wall is extended.
down to the lower limit. down to UP position 2.
Lift wall
Stacker tray
Stacker tray home

Stacker unit
4) The stacker tray moves 5) The stacker tray moves 6) The copier indicates the
up. down to the lower limit. Remove Paper message.
approx. 260mm
Remove Paper from

Stacker Tray.
Figure 2-613
When the stacker unit extends the lift wall, the topmost surface of the stacker unit is
higher than the stack access position of the lower bin module, preventing the finisher
from collecting copies from the lower bin module.
Lift wall position higher

than the access position
Lift wall
Stack access position
Figure 2-614
This is why the finisher uses the upper bin module only when handling copies, even
though the speed is not as high as when using both upper and lower bin modules (with
the rate of decrease varying according to copy mode).
Ex.
• If the time for sorting and the time for handling copies by the stack processing unit
(stapling, carrying the stack of copies to the stacker tray) are identical, the rate of
decrease will be about 50%.
c. Detecting the Thickness of the Stack

The finisher is equipped with a stack sensor (LED6/PT6) to control the operation that
follows the removal of copies from the stacker tray. The finisher operates the stacker unit
differently according to the height of the copies inadvertently left behind on the stacker
unit.
Light-emitting side (LED6)
Lift wall
Light-receiving
side (PT6)
Figure 2-615
If some copies are left behind on the stacker tray, the stacker unit will operate as
described:
A: Stack of copies removed
B: Stack of copies left behind on the stack tray
1) With the Lift Wall Contracted

• If the stack B of copies left behind on the stack tray is not detected by the stack
sensor (LED6/PT6),

The stack sensor does The stacker tray moves
Paper sensor Paper sensor not detect the copy up to the paper surface
paper on the stacker tray. reference position.
A B
B B
Stack sensor Stack sensor

(PT6) (LED6)
Stacker tray
Figure 2-616
2) With the Lift Wall Extended

• If the stack copies left behind on the stack tray is detected by the stack sensor
(LED6/PT6),

The stack sensor detects The stacker tray moves
Paper sensor Paper sensor the surface of the copy up to the paper surface
paper on the tray. reference position.
A
B
B B
Stack sensor Stack sensor

(PT6) Stacker tray (LED6)
Figure 2-617
• If the stack of copies left behind on the stacker tray is not detected by the stack
sensor (LED6/PT6),
Stack processing unit The stack sensor does

not detect the copy
Paper sensor Paper sensor paper on the stacker tray. The lift wall is returned
to home position.
B B B
Stack sensor Stack sensor Lift wall

(PT6) (LED6)
Stacker tray
The stacker tray moves

The stacker unit moves
up to the paper surface
up to up position 1.
reference position.
B
B
Figure 2-618
3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Copy Paper and the Level
The finisher detects the presence/absence, and the level if any, of copy paper on the
stacker and indicates the results on the access door.
The presence/absence of copy paper is detected by the stacker tray power sensor
(PI44) of the stacker tray. When the finisher controller PCB receives signals from the
stacker tray stack sensor, it turns on the stack tray access indicator on the access door
to indicate the presence of copy paper on the stacker tray.
The level of copy paper is detected by the stacker tray shift clock sensors A and B
(PI45, PI81), and is indicated by means of the LEDs on the access door in terms of five
levels.
The stacker tray shift clock sensors A and B monitor the rotation of the encoder disc
mounted to the shaft of the stacker tray shift motor (M16), and sends the results to the
finisher controller PCB.
The finisher controller PCB identifies the position of the stacker tray (drop distance)
in reference to the combination of signals from the two sensors. The finisher controller
PCB uses LEDs to indicate the changes in the position of the tray in terms of changes in
the level of copy paper.
Encoder disc
Stacker tray shift clock Stacker tray shift clock

sensor A (PI45) sensor B (PI81)
Finisher controller
PCB
STTCLK B
STTCLK A
STTPD
Stacker tray paper

sensor (PI44)
Stack indicator ON signal

Stacker tray access
indicator ON signal
Figure 2-619
Table 2-605 shows the level of copy paper in relation to the number of LEDs which
are turned on.
Number of LEDs Level (height) of copy paper (approx.) Lift wall

1 Less than 65 mm
2 Less than 130 mm Contracted
3 Less than 195 mm
4 Less than 260 mm
Extended
5 260 mm
Table 2-605
4. Controlling the Stacker Shift Motor (M16)
a. Outline
Figure 2-620 shows the circuit used to control the stacker tray shift motor. The motor
is a DC motor, and the circuit has the following functions:
• Controlling the rotation of direction of the motor.
The circuit has a logic circuit used to determine whether to drive or stop the motor
based on combinations of signals from sensors.
+24VP
+24VP
Logic circuit
CW A Q37
Q36
IC8 Q44 M16
CPU
+24VP
Stacker tray
B shift motor
CCW
Q78 Q79
Q45
A: Stacker tray upper limit detection signal (PI42)

B: Stacker tray home position signal (PI43)
Figure 2-620
b. Turning On and Off the Stacker Tray Shift Motor and Controlling the Direction of
Rotation
The stacker shift motor is turned on or off and its direction of rotation is controlled
based on the combinations of the following two types of signals:
CW: Stacker tray shift motor clockwise signal (stacker tray moves up)
CCW: Stacker tray shift motor counterclockwise signal (stacker tray moves down)
Stacker tray motor CW CCW

Stacker tray moves down 1 0
Stacker tray moves up 0 1
Stops 1 1
Table 2-606
Because of the presence of the logic circuit, the conditions shown in Table 2-607 must
be met for the stacker tray shift motor to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. The
stacker tray shift motor is allowed to rotate only when each of these conditions is met.
Stacker tray moves up

Condition 1
Flag over
The stacker tray has not reached the No P140-4 : 1
upper limit. (PI42)
The stacker tray has not reached home * P145-0 : *
position. (PI43)
*Either.
Stacker tray moves down

Condition 1
Flag over
The stacker tray has not reached the * P140-4 : *
upper limit. (PI42)
The stacker tray has not reached home Yes P145-0 : 1
position. (PI43)
*Either.
Table 2-607
5. Controlling the Access Door
a. Outline
The access door must be opened to remove the copy paper on the stacker tray. The
access door, however, must not be opened to prevent problems as long as the stacker
unit is in operation.
The finisher’s access door is designed so that it can be opened only when certain
conditions are met:
Conditions for Access
• Each unit of the stack processing unit is at home position, and is at rest.
• Each unit of the stacker unit is at rest.
The access door locking solenoid (SL3) is used to lock or release the access door.
The stacker SET sensor (PI41) is used to find out whether the stacker tray is drawn
out to the front.
The access door sensor (PI80) on the other hand is used to find out whether the
access door is open or closed.
Finisher
Stacker SET detection controller PCB
signal (STS)
Access door
switch signal
(PI41)
(SW4) Access door

solenoid drive signal
(SL3D*)
(SL3)
Access door 24VP
(PI80)
Access door open/close signal
Figure 2-621
b. Operation
When the access door switch is pressed (SW4), the finisher controller PCB assumes
that a request has been made for releasing of the access door and, at the same time,
causes the stacker removal indicator to flash.
The finisher controller PCB returns each unit of the stack processing unit to home
position, and stops any ongoing operation (for instance, handing of a stack). Thereafter,
the finisher controller PCB returns the stacker unit to home position, and drives the
access door locking solenoid (SL3); at the same time, it causes the stacker access
indicator to stop flashing and remain on.
When the access door locking solenoid (SL3) turns on, the access cover will open
automatically so that the stacker tray may be slid out to the front. When the stacker tray
is slid out to the front, the stacker tray SET sensor (PI41) turns off so that the finisher
controller PCB can identify the condition.
Copy paper access ready
Access door Access door locking solenoid drive signal
switch (SW4) ON
Stack tray slid out
Flashing
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, On
Stacker removal indicator yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Stack processing unit home
Stacker unit shift motor (M15)

sensor (PI36)
Access door locking
solenoid (SL3)
Front cover sensor (PI77)

Stacker tray SET
sensor (PI41)
Figure 2-622
When the access door is opened, the access door switch (SW4) turns off to cut off
the power (24 VP) to the loads of the stack processing unit and the stacker unit. (The
power to the feeding drive systems and the bin unit drive system will not be cut off.)
SW4 J632 J631

Access door C -1 -1 -1 J3-1 +24V
switch -1
NO -2 -2 -2 -2 24VP
-2
When the access cover is
closed, 24 VP is supplied.
Stack processing 24VP
unit drive system
Stacker unit drive 24VP

system
Figure 2-623
D. Leading Edge Stopper Drive System

1. Outline
Figure 2-624 shows the drive system of the leading edge stopper.
The leading edge stopper is used to determine a specific point of stacking copies on
the stacker tray so that it must be moved to the left or to the right to suit the length
(feeding direction) of the stack of copies and always stopped to suit the copy paper size.
It is moved by the leading edge stopper motor (M18), and the leading edge stopper
home position sensor (PI46) is used to detect the home position of the leading edge
stopper.
Leading edge stopper home

Leading edge stopper

motor (M18)
(front)
Figure 2-624
2. Operation
The point where the leading edge stopper must be stopped is determined based on
the pulses from the leading edge stopper motor (M18) and in relation to the home
position.
The point (A) is also varied according to the size of copy paper sent by the copier and
the need of folding, as shown in Table 2-608.
Leading edge
stopper home
Flag A
Stack of copies
Figure 2-625 (upper view)
Copy paper size (final size) Folding Stop position (A; distance from home position)
No 182 mm
B5
Yes 182 mm
No 154 mm
A4
Yes 154 mm
B4 No 0 mm (home position)
B5R No 107 mm
A4R No 67 mm
No 148.1 mm
LTR
Yes 148.1 mm
LGL No 8.4 mm
LTRR No 84.6 mm
Table 2-608
3. Controlling the Leading Edge Stopper Motor (M18)
a. Outline
Figure 2-626 shows the circuit used to control the leading edge stopper motor (M18).
The motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor, and the circuit has the following functions:
• Turning on and off the motor
• Controlling the direction of rotation of the motor
• Switching the voltage
+24V +5V
Q17
Voltage switching signal
(M18 VC)
+5V
Motor phase motor
IC8 control signal IC61 A
CPU (M18 PC) Motor
Rotation direction drive
signal pulse M18
generat- IC77
(M18 F/R)
ing Motor A*
circuit driver
B
B*
Figure 2-626
b. Operation
The finisher controller PCB sends the motor rotation direction signal (M8 F/R) and the
motor phase control signal (M18 F/R) to the motor drive pulse generation circuit of the
stack processing unit driver PCB.
The motor drive pulse generating circuit sends the appropriate control signal for the
motor according to the input signal.
The motor driver controls the output timing of pulse signals based on the phase
control signal for the motor. The leading edge stopper motor switches its direction and
speed of rotation based on the output timing of the pulse signals. The voltage used when
the motor is driven and when it is kept at rest is monitored to prevent excess heating of
the motor while it is at rest.
E. Lift Wall Drive System

1. Outline
Figure 2-626 shows the drive system of the lift wall.

The lift wall extends upward when the stacker tray reaches the stacker tray home
position sensor (PI43) after repeating up/down movements to suit the existing stack of
copies. The lift wall is driven by the lift wall motor (M19), and the following two sensors
are used to check the position of the extended lift wall:
• Lift wall UP position sensor (PI39)
• Lift wall home position sensor (PI40)
Lift wall UP position

sensor (PI39)
Lift wall home

Stacker tray home
position sensor
(PI43)
Lift wall motor (M19)
Figure 2-627
2. Operation
The lift wall is stopped at either of two points: home position or UP position. Each
position is detected by a specific sensor.
Stop position Sensor (No.)

UP position Lift wall UP position sensor (PI39)
Home position Lift wall home position sensor (PI40)
Table 2-609
When copying is started, the lift wall is at home position. It then extends as far as UP
position when the stacker tray reaches home position.
Lift wall UP position
Lift wall home position
Figure 2-628
3. Controlling the Lift Wall Motor (M19)
a. Outline
Figure 2-629 shows the circuit used to control the lift wall motor (M19). The motor is
a DC motor, and the circuit has the following functions:
The circuit possesses a logic circuit used to determine whether to drive or stop the
motor based on the combinations of signals from the sensors.
+24VP
Logic circuit +24VP

A
B
CW Q43 Q42
IC8 Q46 M19

CPU
+24VP
Lift wall motor
CCW C
Q35 Q34
Q47
PI 39
Lift wall UP
position ensure
PI 40
Lift wall home
position sensor
A: Lift wall home position signal (PI 39) C: Lift wall DOWN signal (PI 40)
B: Stacker unit NEAR signal (PI 73)
Figure 2-629
b. Turning On and Off the Lift Wall Motor and Controlling the Direction of Rotation
The lift wall motor is turned on and off and its direction of rotation is controlled based
on the combination of the following two signals:
CW: Lift wall motor clockwise rotation (extends the lift wall)
CCW: Lift wall motor counterclockwise signal (contracts the lift wall)
Lift wall motor CW CCW

Extends the lift wall 1 0
Contracts the lift wall 0 1
Stops 0 0
Table 2-610
The motor starts to rotate in response to signals from the finisher controller PCB. If
the finisher controller PCB receives signals from the lift wall UP position sensor (PI39) or
the lift wall home position sensor (PI40) while the motor is rotating, it stops the rotation
of the motor.
Because of the logic circuit, certain conditions must be met for the lift wall motor to
rotate clockwise or counterclockwise. The lift wall motor is allowed to rotate only when
each of the conditions in Table 2-611 is met.
Lift wall extends

Condition 1
Flag over
Lift wall UP position sensor (PI39) No P147-6 : 0
Stacker unit NEAR position sensor (PI73) No P145-5 : 0
Lift wall home position sensor (PI40) * P147-7 : *
*Either.
Lift wall contacts

Condition 1
Flag over
Lower bin upper limit sensor (PI25) * P131-7 : *
Lower bin lower limit sensor (PI26) No P126-3 : 0
Bin rear end wall CLOSE position sensor (PI53) Yes P145-3 : 1
Stack processing unit home position sensor (PI70) No P147-4 : 1
*Either.
Table 2-611
F. Emergency Stop Button

1. Outline
The emergency stop button is found on the stacker tray assembly, and may be used
to immediately stop the operation of the finisher and the copier as when removing copies.
Figure 2-630
2. Using the Emergency Button
When the emergency stop button is pressed, power to all loads of the finisher is cut
off so that the finisher will stop operating and, at the same time, the copier will indicate
‘E713’ on its control panel.
To reset the finisher, remove all jams from the finisher and the copier, and turn the red
dial on the emergency stop button clockwise. The red dial will return to its initial position
to reset the condition.
Red dial
(emergency stop operation) (resetting the condition)
Figure 2-631
Emergency
upper button
(SW5)
(200V model only)

AC input
Noise Noise
DC power filter filter
supply PCB (NF1) (NF2)
Circuit
breaker
(CB1)
Figure 2-632
G. Internal Lamp
1. Outline
The finisher is equipped with a lamp (LP1) in its stack processing unit. The lamp is
designed to turn on when the upper cover or the front door is opened (the scanning lamp
will not turn on).
Upper cover
Lamp 1
(LP1)
Front door
Figure 2-633
H. Sequence of Operations
Copier power switch ON

Copy Start key ON
Leading edge stopper stop position command
Stack drop Stack drop Stack drop Stack drop Stack drop Stack drop Stack access request
y
, y
, y
, y
, y
, ,
y y
,
Initial operation ,
y Stacking ,
y ,
y ,
y Lift wall extend ,
y Stackingy
, ,
yStack access request
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
yyyy
,,,, ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,,,,
yyyy ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,
y
(M15) ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y yyyyyyy
,
y
,,,,,,,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y yyyyyyy
,
y
,,,,,,,
,
y ,
y ,
y yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, ,
y
Stacker unit shift brake ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
(BK1/4) ,
y
, ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
Stacker unit UP position y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
sensor (PI35) y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
Stacker unit home position y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
sensor (PI36) y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
Stacker unit DOWN position y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
sensor (PI37) y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
Stacker tray shift motor
y
, y
,,,
yyy
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y y ,
y
,,,
yyy
,
,
y ,,,
yyy
,
y ,
y ,
y ,,
yy
,
,,y
y , ,
y ,
y ,,
yy
,
y ,
y ,
y y
, ,,,
yyy
,
y ,
y ,
y ,,,
yyy
,
,,,y
y , ,
y ,
y
(M16)
,
y y ,
y
,
y
,
y
,
y
,,,
yyy
,
y ,
y
,
y
,
y
,
y
yy
,
y ,
y
,
y
,
y
,
y
,yy
y ,,
,
y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,,,
yyy
,
y ,
y ,
y yyy
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
Stacker tray locking solenoid
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
(SL9)
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y y
,
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
Paper surface sensor
,
y ,
y y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,y
, ,
y
,y
, ,
y
,y
, ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,y
(LED4, PT4/LED5, PT5) , ,
y
,
y y ,
y y ,
y y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y ,y
y , y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
Stacker tray upper limit
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
sensor (PT42) ,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y
sensor (PT43) ,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y
Access door locking
,
y ,
y
solenoid (SL3) ,
y ,
y
,
y ,
y
Leading edge stopper motor ,
y
,
y
(M18) ,
y
,
y
Leading edge stopper home ,
y
,
y
position sensor (PI46) ,
y
,
y
,
y
,
y
,
Lift wall motor (M19) y
Lift wall UP position sensor
(PI39)
sensor (PI40)
yyy
,,,
,,, : Motor reverse rotation
yyy
Figure 2-634
VII. CONTROL PANEL
A. Outline
The finisher’s control panel consists of a transparent touch switch panel, controller
PCB, and a 320x240-dot display, and has the following functions:
q Processing date for the LCD.
w Adjusting LCD contrast automatically.
e Processing inputs on the touch switch.
B. Operation
1. Processing Data for the LCD
The CPU on the controller PCB sends commands to the LCD controller as needed
according to the programs stored in advance in response to the signals from the finisher
controller.
The LCD controller then interprets and executes these commands, by turning on and
off the display and selecting a specific character font.
The LCD controller writes display character codes in sequence into display memory.
The display memory data is then shown on the LCD panel in response to the timing
signals generated by the LCD controller.
Row
driver
Row
LCD display panel
driver
LCD controller PCB
Row
driver
Column Column Column Column

Finisher driver driver driver driver
controller Parallel LCD
CPU Buffer
PCB I/O controller
Back light
ROM Display
memory
Touch switch panel
Figure 2-701
2. Automatic Adjustment of the LCD Contrast
The control panel controller PCB is equipped with a function capable of automatically
correcting the changes in the LCD contrast caused by changes in the ambient
temperature.
The control panel controller PCB is equipped with a thermistor (TH801) used to
monitor the temperature around the control panel. The thermistor varies the voltage
supplied to the LCD according to the changes in the resistance caused by changes in the
ambient temperature so as to keep the LCD contrast at the appropriate level at all times.
When the temperature around the control panel rises, the resistance of the thermistor
lowers, thus increasing the voltage supplied to the LCD. When the temperature around
the control panel lowers, on the other hand, the resistance of the thermistor rises, thus
decreasing the voltage supplied to the LCD.
The user may adjust the contrast to suit his/her preference by using the contrast
adjusting volume found behind the finisher’s bin cover.
-5V
-22V DC/DC
converter
IC809
Contrast
adjusting volume
(VR101) Vo LCD
TH801
Figure 2-702
3. Inputs by the Touch Switch
The keys on the touch panel and the LCD controller panel are connected as shown
in Figure 2-701.
The touch panel consists of two sheets of glass coated with transparent conducting
material glued together with spacers in between, and it has a construction in which 20 ×
15 keys are arranged in a matrix.
When the glass surface is pressed by a finger, the two glass plates come into contact
to provide a path for electricity, enabling the identification of corresponding coordinates
in reference to the electrodes, i.e., the LCD controller PCB can find out which key has
been pressed in relation to the key scan signal from the LCD controller PCB and the input
signal to the LCD controller PCB.
Electrode Spacer Glass plate
Electrode Glass plate
Figure 2-703
VIII. POWER SUPPLY
A. Outline of the Power Supply

Emergency
stop button
(SW5)
(200V model only)

AC input
Noise Noise
filter filter
(NF1) (NF2)
Front Upper Bin Circuit
door switch cover switch cover switch breaker
J14-2
J14-1
(SW3) (SW2) (SW3) (CB1)
DC power supply PCB

J1-3 J3-1 J2-1

RY1 Remote signal J15-5
+24V
J2-2
J1-4 Circuit +24V J3-2 From copier
breaker J15-6
(CB1) POWER ON J2-8 J1-8 LED1
Power supply for loads
J1-2
+5V J2-2 IC3 IC10
J1-1 +5V J2-3
J1-3 RAM RAM +24VI
Fuse J1-7 BT1 BT2
J1-2
(F1) +12V J2-7 J3-1
-2
A +24VP
Power supply for logic B
C Access switch
(SW4)
Q18 IC42
J7
J6
J8
J23
J18
J24
J103
+24V
J105 +5V
J104 +12V
Power supply J801

J802 +5V
for LCD back
light J955 LCD controller PCB
J300
+5V,+12V
J301
+5V,+24V
Folder driver PCB
(if paper folding unit is connected)
A : '0', when front cover or screen is closed.

B : '0', when bin cover is closed.
C : '0', when upper cover is closed.
: AC line
: DC line
: accessory
Figure 2-801
B. Power Supply Circuit

The finisher’s DC power supply PCB generates power fo three different channels: 24
V, 12 V, and 5 V, each DC power type intended for the following:
DC power Destination
24 V Loads (motors, solenoids, brakes, etc.)
12 V Machine internal lighting (to assist clearing jams)
5V Logic devices, sensors, etc.
Table 2-801
When the power plug is connected, and the remote signal (issued at all times while
the copier is operating) is received, LED1 on the finisher controller PCB lights and the
relay (RY1) turns on.
When the relay (RY1) turns on, the AC power is divided into two channels and
supplied to the DC power supply PCB: power in one channel is used to generate power
for loads, while power in the other is used to generate power for logic devices.
The AC power used to generate power for loads is cut off when the bin cover, upper
cover, or front cover is opened (SW1, SW2, or SW3 opens).
The +24 V power supplied by the DC power supply PCB is divided into three types
(+24 VI, +24 V, +24 VP) on the finisher controller PCB according to the type of load. After
division, the power is cut when the access door is opened, when emergency mode is
started, or when the paper folding unit top cover is opened (i.e., when the unit is
connected).
Paper folding unit Paper folding unit

not connected connected
Paper folding unit top Common feeding

cover switch (MS1) motor
Short connecter +24VS M1 Access door

switch (SW4)
+24VS
DC power
supply PCB LED2 LED3
Emergency mode
switching circuit
+24VI +24V
+24VP
+24V
• Loads of bin unit • Loads of stacker unit

• Loads of feeding • Loads of stack
system except processing unit
common feeding
motor

+24 VI : Power from the DC power supply PCB.
+24 V :Power subject to the emergency operation mode switching circuit.
+24 VS : :Power subject to the paper folding unit top cover switch.
+24 VP : :Power subject to the access door switch.
Figure 2-802
When the access door is opened (SW4 opens), the power for loads (+24 VP) for the
stack processing unit and the stacker unit is cut off. When emergency operation mode is
started, on the other hand, power to the loads not related to non-sort mode (+24 V, +24
VP) will be cut. When the paper folding unit top cover is opened (MS1 opens), further,
the power for the common feeding motor (M1; +24 VS) will be cut off.
The power for loads (+24 VI) is turned on and off by the POWER ON signal. When
all the following three conditions are met, the transistor (Q18) will be grounded, and the
light-emitting side (PC5) of the photocoupler will turn on.
The DC power supply PCB generates +24 VI when the light receiving side (PC5)
turns on in response to the activation of light-emitting side.
The emergency stop button is capable of simultaneously cutting AC power for both
loads and logic devices.
No. Condition Associated sensor (sensor No.)

1 A; The front door or the screen in closed. Front door sensor (PI77), screen sensor
(PI78)
2 B: The bin cover is closed. Bin cover sensor (PI76)
3 C: The top cover is closed. Upper cover sensor 1 (PI74), upper cover
sensor 2 (PI75)
Table 2-802
+5V
Light-emitting A
side (PT5) B
C
POWER ON signal IC42
Q18
+24 VI
+24 VI
Light-emitting
side (PT5)
DC power supply PCB
Figure 2-803
When the finisher’s power plug is disconnected, the emergency stop button is
pressed, or the copier is turned off, the DC power supply to the finisher controller PCB
will be cut off. For this reason, the two RAMs (IC3, IC10) on the finisher controller PCB
are equipped with two lithium batteries (BT1, BT2).
Caution:
Replace the lithium battery only with the one listed in the Parts Catalog. Use of a
different battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire
or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of it
in fire.
Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard any used battery promptly.
C. Protection Mechanisms for the Power Supply Circuit
The finisher’s DC power supply PCB is equipped with an overcurrent detection circuit,
which turns on protection mechanisms to cut off the output when a short circuit occurs
because of a fault in any of the loads.
When the output is stopped, disconnect the power plug from the outlet, correct the
load, and connect the power plug to the outlet so that the output recovers automatically.
D. DC Power Supply Rated Outputs
The DC power supply circuit provides the types of DC power shown in Table 2-803 in
return for rated AC inputs (85 to 133 VAC for 100 V model; 187 to 276 VAC for 200 V
models).
Connector No. J2 J3
Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
Output GND + 5V + 5V GND GND GND + 12V Remote + 24V + 24V GND GND
Tolerance – + 3.5 + 3.5 – – – ± 5.0 – ± 5.0 ± 5.0 – –
(%) – 1.5 – 1.5
Table 2-803
IX. PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1
A. Outline
The paper folding unit is designed to fold A3, B4, or 279.4×431.8 mm (11”×17”) paper
into Z according to the mode set on the copier for feeding to the finisher.
Paper
folding
Finisher unit Copier
Figure 2-901
B. Outline of the Electrical Circuit

The finisher is controlled by the finisher controller PCB so that it is not equipped by
any other specific PCB.
The signals from the finisher are received by the folder driver PCB to drive the motor
and the solenoid.
Finisher Sensor
controller
PCB
Folder
driver Motor
PCB
switch
Solenoid
Sensor
Switch
Copier
Figure 2-902
C. Inputs to and Outputs from the Paper Folding Unit

1. Inputs to the Paper Folding Unit
F-MS2
Folder SET NO C J23-3 +24V
switch
Folder driver PCB
+24V
J101-2
+5V
J106-4
F-PI1 J24-B8
Feeding path -6
No. 1 paper F-DP1 When paper is present, '1'.
-5
sensor
J105-5 -B7
Amplifier circuit F-S2D When paper is present, '1'.
Feeding path +5V
No. 2 paper F-S1
-4
sensor -6
+5V
J104-7
F-LED1
-8
Feeding path
No. 3 paper -9
sensor F-PT1
-10 Amplifier circuit -A5
DP3 When paper is present, '1'.
+5V
J105-1
F-PI2
Folding path -3
residual paper -2
sensor 1
Logic circuit
+5V
J107-4
F-PI3
Folding path -6 -B6 When paper is present
residual paper FPD
-5 at any sensor, '1'.
sensor 2
+5V
J106-1
F-PI4
Folding path -3
residual paper -2
sensor 3
+5V
J107-1
Horizontal path F-PI5 -3 -A6
residual paper HPD When paper is present, '1'.
-2
sensor
+5V
-A9
Upper cover F-PI6 When upper cover
-B3
open/closed FUCO is closed, '1'.
-A8
sensor
+5V
-B1
Folder SET F-PI7
-A10
sensor FSET When folder is set, '1'.
-B2
Figure 2-903
2. Outputs from the Paper Folding Unit
Folder driver PCB Finisher controller PCB
J108 J24
Folder
motor F-M1 For details, see p. 2-210.
+24V
J24-A1
J104-1 FSL1D* When '0', F-SL1 turns on.
B4 Z-folding
No. 1 stopper F-SL1 -2
solenoid
-B10
-3 FSL2D* When '0', F-SL2 turns on.
B4 Z-folding F-SL2
No. 2 stopper -4
solenoid
-B9
Locking F-SL3
solenoid -4
-A2
-1 FSL4D* When '0', F-SL4 turns on.
Releasing
F-SL4 -2
solenoid
-A3
Inlet solenoid F-SL5 -6
+24V
F-MS1
NO C J23-7
Upper cover
open/closed -6
switch
Supplies M1 with
power when upper
cover is closed.
J10-14
Finisher common M1
feeding motor
Figure 2-904
D. Basic Operations
The finisher folds delivered copies into Z according to the mode set on the copier.
1. No-Folding Mode
2) The copy is moved through the horizontal path, and is delivered to the finisher.
Figure 2-905
2. Z-Folding Mode
2) The copy paper (capable of being folded) is moved as shown in Figure 2-906
within the paper feeding unit, and is folded into Z. (Fro details, see p. 2-209.)
Figure 2-906
3) The Z-folded copy is delivered to the finisher.
E. Feeding Drive System

1. Outline
The feeding system uses feeding rollers to forward copies from the copier to the
finisher.
The feeding rollers are driven by the finisher’s common path feeding motor (M1).
The skew correcting roller, folding rollers A, B, and C and the No. 2 folding roller are
driven by the folder motor (F-M1).
The feeding paths are switched over by turning on and off the inlet solenoid (SL5)
according to the mode selected on the copier.
Feeding roller
Feeding roller
Inlet
solenoid
F-SL5
B4 Z-folding No. 2
stopper solenoid
M1
F-SL2
Common path
feeding motor Locking
(inside finisher) solenoid
F-SL3
F-SL4
Releasing
solenoid
No.2 folding
rollers Folder Finisher
driver controller
Skew correcting PCB PCB
roller
B
A
Folder
motor
F-M1
B4 Z-folding No. 1
stopper solenoid
F-SL1
Figure 2-907
2. Feeding Path
The feeding path will be as follows according to the selected mode.
a. Non-Folding
Figure 2-908
b. Z-Folding Mode
Figure 2-909
3. Controlling the Feeding Speed
The feeding speed mode in folding mode is controlled by the folder motor (F-M1) and
the common path feeding motor (M1) inside the finisher.
The feeding speed is always identical to the process speed, and copies are moved at
the same speed as the copier’s process speed (between 317 and 528 mm/sec).
The feeding speed in non-folding mode is controlled by the common path feeding
motor (M1) inside the finisher.
4. Controlling the Folder Motor
The folder motor (F-M1) is a DC brushless motor. The CPU (IC1) on the finisher
controller PCB sends reference pulses (FM1SRP) and the folder motor drive signal
(FM1D) to the folder motor controller PCB.
When the folder motor (F-M1) starts to rotate, the encoder starts to send clock pulses
(FM1CLK) to the speed control PCB. The speed control circuit compares the clock pulses
from the encoder against the reference pulses (FM1SRP) to control the drive circuit so
that both match.
The clock pulse signals (FM1CLK) are also sent to the finisher controller PCB. The
CPU (IC1) monitors the clock pulse signals; if the number of pulses within 1 sec fails to
reach a specific value, it will identify the condition as a folder motor error and will stop the
motor while at the same time causing the copier to indicate ‘E518’ on its control panel.
Folder driver
PCB J108
+24v -1
Finisher +5v -3 Folder

J24 Drive motor
controller
PCB -A8 FMID -4 circuit
F-M1
Speed
-A7 FM1SRP -5 control Clock pulse
circuit generator
IC1
-B4 FM1CLK -6 FM1CLK
Folder motor controller PCB
Figure 2-910
5. Movement of the Folding Stoppers
The stoppers operate to suit the size of copy paper, thereby stopping copy paper.
The stoppers shift as shown in Figure 2-911 in response to the activation of solenoids.
Stopper
Stopper
drive
B4 Z-folding solenoid
No. 2 stopper
solenoid
F-SL2 B4 Z-folding
No. 2 stopper
Copy paper
A3/279.4×431. mm
(11"×17")
Z-folding
No. 2 stopper
(fixed)
In contact
A3/279.4×431.8mm
(11"×17")
Z-folding
B4 Z-folding No. 1 stopper
No. 1 stopper F-SL1 (fixed)
B4 Z-folding
No. 1 stopper
solenoid
Figure 2-911
6. Folding Positions
Copy paper is folded at position A or B as shown in Figure 2-912.
n)
tio
ec
dir
ing
ed
(fe
B4 Z-folding
No. 2 stopper
solenoid
B
A
F-SL2 B4 Z-folding
No. 2 stopper
A3/279.4×431.8mm
(11"×17") B
Z-folding
No. 2 stopper
(fixed)
A3/279.4×431.8mm
(11"×17")
Z-folding
B4 Z-folding No. 1 stopper
No. 1 stopper F-SL1 (fixed)
B4 Z-folding
No. 1 stopper
solenoid
Figure 2-912
7. Correcting the Skew
Before folding operation is started, the skew correcting roller and the pressure roller
are used to remove the skew from the paper arriving from the copier.
Releasing
solenoid
F-SL4 Skew correcting roller
Pressure roller
Figure 2-913
1) The copy paper butts against the No. 1 stopper.

2) The copy paper is moved farther so that it butts against the No. 1 stopper and arches.
Skew
Pressure correcting roller
roller
(freed; F-SL2
and 3 are OFF)
No. 1 stopper
Figure 2-914
3) The releasing solenoid (F-SL4) turns on so that the pressure roller moves away from
the copy paper, removing the skew.
Releasing solenoid
F-SL4
Figure 2-915
8. Folding Operation
When skew correction is over, the folding rollers A, B, and C operate to fold the copy
paper into a Z.
Skew correcting
roller
Locking
solenoid
Pressure
Folding F-SL3
roller
roller C
folding
Folding roller B
roller A
Figure 2-916
1) When skew correction is over, the locking solenoid (F-SL3) turns on, causing the
pressure roller to butt against the skew correcting roller; the copy paper is moved
once again and made to arch.
Skew correcting
Pressure roller roller
F-SL3
No. 1 folding
Locking solenoid assembly
Figure 2-917
2) When the copy paper arches more, it is drawn between the folding rollers A and B
and folded.
To folding rollers A and B
Figure 2-918
3) The copy paper is moved to the folding rollers A and B, and is made to butt against
the No. 2 stopper.
To No. 2 stopper
Folding roller A Folding roller B
Figure 2-919
4) The copy paper is moved farther by the folding rollers A and B, and is made to arch.
5) When the copy paper arches more, it is drawn between the folding rollers A and C
and folded.
Butted against the stopper.
No. 2 folding section
To folding rollers A and C
Figure 2-920
9. Sequence of Operations
Copy Start key ON

Arching for Arching for
skew correction Skew correction folding
Folder motor (F-M1)

Feeding path No. 2 paper
sensor (F-S1)
sensor (F-PT1)
B4 Z folding No. 1 stopper *1
solenoid (F-SL1)
B4 Z-folding No. 2 stopper *1
solenoid (F-SL2)
*2 150ms
Releasing solenoid (F-SL4)
100ms
Locking solenoid (F-SL3)
*1: ON only for B4.

*2: Varies depending to paper size.
Figure 2-921
F. Detecting Jams
1. Outline
The finisher is equipped with the seven sensors shown in Figure 2-922 to make sure
that copies are moving properly.
The CPU reads the signals from these sensors at such times as programmed in
advance to check for jams. When it finds a jam, it sends the jam signal to the copier,
which in response will stop the on-going operation and indicate the jam message on its
control panel.
The CPU identifies a jam for the following conditions:
a. Paper exists at a specific sensor at time of power-on, at the end of warm-up, and
during stand-by. (power-on jam)
b. The copy does not reach a specific sensor within a specific period of time. (delay
jam)
c. The copy does not move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time.
(stationary jam)
d. The upper cover is opened while the finisher is in operation. (door open jam)
When any of the above jams has occurred, the jam recover mechanism will turn on
in response to a press on the Copy Start key to make the remaining number of copies.
F-PI 1
F-PI 5
F-PI 4
F-S1
F-PI 2
F-PI 3
F-PT 1
F-LED1
Figure 2-922
Sensor Type of jam

F-PI1 Feeding path No. 1 paper sensor Delay/
F-S1 Feeding path No. 2 paper sensor stationary jam
F-LED1 Feeding path No. 3 paper sensor (light-emitting)
F-PT1 Feeding path No. 3 paper sensor (light-receiving)
F-PI2 Folding path residual paper sensor 1 Power-on jam
F-PI3 Folding path residual paper sensor 2
F-PI4 Folding path residual paper sensor 3
F-PI5 Horizontal path residual paper sensor
Table 2-901
2. Sequence of Operations
a. Feeding Delay Jam

Common path feeding

motor (F-M1)
Feeding path No. 1 paper a a
Normal Error
sensor (F-PI1)
Figure 2-923
b. Feeding Stationary Jam

Common path feeding
motor (F-M1)
Normal Error
sensor (F-PI1)
Figure 2-924
c. Folding Delay jam

Folder motor (F-M1)

Normal Error
sensor (F-S1)
Normal Error
sensor (F-PT1)
Figure 2-925
d. Folding Stationary Jam
Folder motor (F-M1)

Normal Error
sensor (F-S1)
Normal Error
sensor (F-PT1)
Figure 2-926
G. Power Supply
1. Outline
Figure 2-927 shows the route of power supply.

The paper folding unit is supplied with +5 V, +12 V (for operation amplifier), and +24V
by the finisher; +24 V is supplied to the loads by way of the upper cover open/close
switch (F-MS1), and +24V used by loads is cut off as soon as the drawer connector
(J202) becomes disconnected when the folder is slid out (i.e., when the folder SET switch
F-MS2 turns off).
When the upper cover is opened, the upper cover switch (F-MS1) turns off to cut the
power used to drive the finisher’s common feeding motor (M1).
+24V Folder motor
Folder drive (F-M1)
PCB
+24V B4 Z-folding No.1
stopper (F-SL1)
+24V B4 Z-folding No.2

stopper solenoid (F-SL1)
+24V Locking solenoid

(F-SL3)
+24V Releasing
solenoid (F-SL4)
+24V Inlet solenoid

(F-SL5)
+5V Feeding path No.1

paper sensor (F-PI1)
+5V Feeding path No.2

J101-3
J102-A8
J101-2
paper sensor (F-S1)
+5V Feeding path No.3 paper

Drawer connector sensor (F-LED1,F-PT1)
switch (F-MS2)
(J202)
+5V Folding path residual
Folder SET
paper sensor 1 (F-PI2)


J24-A4

+6.5V
J23-1
J23-3
+24V
+5V
+5V Horizontal path residual

paper sensor (F-PI5)
J24-A9 Upper cover open/
+5V closed sensor (F-PI6)
-B1 Folder set
+24VI +5V sensor (F-PI7)
J23-7
Upper cover
-6 switch (F-MS1)
Paper folding unit side
Finisher side
J10-14 Common feeder
Finisher controller motor (M1)
PCB (finisher)
Figure 2-927
CHAPTER 3
MECHANICAL SYSTEM
1. ! Disconnect the power cord for safety before disassembly or reassembly work.
2. Group the screws by type (length and diameter) and location.
3. The fixing screw for the grounding wire and varistors is fitted with a washer to ensure electric con-
tinuity; be sure to use the washer for reassembly.
4. If possible, avoid operating the machine with any of its parts removed.
5. Unless otherwise noted, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly.
I. USING THE DOOR SWITCH C. Side Gripper...................................3-102
ACTUATORS ...........................................3-1 D. Bin Rear End Wall Open/Close
A. Outline................................................3-1 Unit.................................................3-109
B. Using the Door Switch Actuators .......3-2 E. Stapler Front/Rear Shift Drive
C. Using the Stapler ...............................3-4 System............................................3-111
II. RELOCATING THE MACHINE ................3-5 F. Removing the Stapler Unit.............3-120
A. Fixing the Stack Processing Unit and G. Front Gripper..................................3-124
the Stacker Unit in Place ...................3-5 H. Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor
B. Separating from the Copier................3-9 (M10)..............................................3-128
C. Taping the Covers in Place ..............3-12 I. Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Drive
III. EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS ............3-13 System ...........................................3-134
A. External Covers ...............................3-13 J. Stack Processing Unit Screen .......3-138
B. Separating the Finisher and the VII. STACKER UNIT ...................................3-142
Copier ..............................................3-20 A. Stacker Unit ...................................3-142
C. Display .............................................3-21 B. Removing the Stacker Tray Drive
D. Bin Cover Switch Assembly.............3-24 System ...........................................3-150
E. Access Door Switch Assembly ........3-26 C. Removing the Leading Edge Stopper
F. Installing the Service Screen ...........3-28 Drive System..................................3-159
IV. BIN MODULE.........................................3-30 D. Removing the Lifter Wall Drive
A. Bin ....................................................3-30 System ...........................................3-165
B. Bin Shift Motor .................................3-38 E. Adjusting the Tension of the Stacker
C. Lead Cam ........................................3-46 Unit Shift Brake 2 Belt ...................3-169
D. Guide Bar Unit .................................3-64 F. Adjusting the Orientation of the
E. Guide Bar Motor ..............................3-70 Stack Tray ......................................3-170
V. FEEDING UNIT......................................3-71 VIII. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .......................3-171
A. Upper Feeding Mobile Assembly.....3-71 A. Removing the Finisher Controller
B. Vertical Path Unit .............................3-78 PCB................................................3-171
C. Lower Feeding Assembly ................3-81 B. Removing the Stack Processing Unit
D. Inlet Unit...........................................3-85 Drive PCB ......................................3-172
E. Removing the Common Path C. Removing the Power Supply
Feeding Motor (M1) .........................3-87 PCB................................................3-174
F. Removing the Upper Path D. Noise Filter Unit .............................3-175
Feeding Motor (M2) .........................3-88 IX. PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1 .................3-176
G. Removing the Lower Path A. External Covers .............................3-176
Feeding Motor (M3) .........................3-91 B. Paper Folding Unit .........................3-177
VI. STACK PROCESSING UNIT .................3-93 C. Feeding System .............................3-183
A. Stack Processing Unit......................3-93 D. Drive System..................................3-192
B. Removing the Side Gripper E. Removing the Folder Drive PCB ...3-198
Left/Right Shift Drive Assembly .....3-100
CHAPTER 3 MECHANCIAL SYSTEM
I. USING THE DOOR SWITCH ACTUATORS
A. Outline
The finisher is equipped with three types of doors which may be opened to check its
operation. (Do not open the access door while the finisher is in operation.)
• Bin cover
• Upper cover Upper cover
Bin cover
• Front door
Front door
Figure 3-101
Caution:
Do not make checks on the operation by Stack processing
opening the access door. unit
If the stack processing unit operates
while the access door is open, the cover
plate will hit the stack processing unit,
causing problems.
Cover plate Access door
Figure 3-102
Each door is equipped with a switch which turns on and off the AC power and a
sensor which checks the state (open or closed) of the door, requiring multiple door switch
actuators for checks with all the doors open.
The finisher comes with five door switch actuators, each designed for a specific door.
B. Using the Door Switch Actuators

Figure 3-101 shows where the door switch actuators are stored and used and how to
use them.
Door switch actuators
Figure 3-103
1 2 3
5 1) Draw out the screen. 2) Hook the screen on the hook. 3) Insert the door switch actuator.
Figure 3-104
Caution:
Be sure to pull down the service screen before using the door switch actuator in the
front cover assembly.
See the following tables for the switches and sensors found on the doors.
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Door Bin cover Upper cover Upper cover Front cover Access door
Switch Bin cover Upper cover — Front door Access door
(notation) switch (SW1) switch (SW2) switch (SW3) switch (SW4)
Sensor Bin cover Upper cover Upper cover Front door
(notation) sensor (PI76) sensor 1 (PI74) sensor 2 sensor (PI77) —
(PI75)
Table 3-101
C. Using the Stapler

Work as follows using the door switch actuator that comes with the finisher whenever
you have to move the stapler by hand.
counterclockwise: stapler clockwise rotation

clockwise: stapler counterclockwise rotation
Figure 3-105
II. RELOCATING THE MACHINE

You must perform the following when relocating the finisher by truck or other means
of transportation (in the order indicated):
1. Fixing the stack processing unit and the stacker unit in place
2. Separating the finisher from the copier
3. Taping the covers in place
A. Fixing the Stack Processing Unit and the Stacker Unit in

Place
1) Turn off and then on the copier so that the finisher executes initialization.
2) Turn off the copier, and disconnect the finisher’s power plug from the power outlet.
3) Disconnect the finisher cable from the copier.
4) Open the finisher’s upper cover, and remove the two screws; then, detach the upper
cover (front).
Screws
Upper cover
Upper cover (front)
5) Remove the five screws from the finisher’s rear right cover; then, loosen the screw,
and detach it by sliding the cover to the left.
Screws
Loosen
Screws Rear right Screw

cover
Figure 3-203
6) Remove the five screws, and detach the belt cover.
Caution:
When detaching the belt cover, take care not to impose force on the harness.
Screw
Harness
Screw
Belt cover
Screws
Figure 3-204
7) Remove the seven metal fixings and the eleven screws from the finisher’s frame.
Metal fixings (right) of

Metal fixings stack processing unit
Screw
Screw
Screws
Metal fixings
Screws
Screw
Metal fixing Metal fixing (left)
of stacker unit of harness unit
Screw
8) Move to the rear of the finisher. Fix the harness unit and the stacker unit using the
metal fixings and the screws removed in step 7). (See Figures 3-207 and -208 for the
locations; use the metal fixings at the lower part of each unit.)
Metal fixing
Metal fixing
Screw
Screw
9) Open the finisher’s front cover, and fix the stack processing unit and the stacker unit
using the metal fixings and the screws removed in step 7).
Screw Metal fixing (left) Metal fixing (right)

Screw Screw
Screw
Screw
Metal fixing
Figure 3-209
B. Separating from the Copier

1. Finisher and Paper Folding Unit
1) Open the upper cover of the paper folding unit; then, remove the two screws, and
detach the rear cover by lifting.
Screw
Upper cover
Rear cover
Screw
2) Remove the two screws, and detach the inner cover; then, remove the hook (front)
from the copier.
Screws Inner cover
Hook (front)
Figure 3-212
3) Remove the screw, and remove the hook (rear) from the copier.
Screw
Figure 3-213
2. Finisher Only
1) Remove the two screws, and detach the finisher’s upper cover (rear).
Screw
Upper cover (rear)
Screw
Figure 3-214
2) Remove the screw each (one each), remove the finisher’s hooks (front, rear).
Screw
Screw
Hook (rear)
Hook (front)
C. Taping the Covers in Place

1) Fit the hook fixing screws used for joining the finisher to the copier at the appropriate
locations; then, install all covers in their original positions.
2) Tape the following so that they will not become loose during transportation: upper
cover, bin cover, front cover, and the access door of the finisher, upper cover of the
folding unit, and the folder unit.
Bin cover
Upper cover
Upper cover (paper folding unit)
Access door
Folder unit
Front cover
Figure 3-217
III. Externals and Controls
A. External Covers
Remove the covers as necessary when cleaning, checking, or repairing the inside of
the machine. Those covers that may be detached by mere removal of mounting screws
are left out of the discussions.
q w e
r
!0
t !1
u !2
i !3
o
q Bin cover (1) u Front cover

w Front upper right cover i Access door
e Bin upper cover (3) o Front lower left cover
r Bin right cover !0 Rear upper cover (2)
t Upper cover !1 Bin left cover
y Front upper cover (2) !2 Rear left cover (7)
!3 Rear right cover (5)
Figure 3-301
The number in parentheses indicates the number of mounting screws used.
1. Removing the Bin Left Cover
1) Remove the rear left cover.

2) Remove the bin left cover q by removing the three screws w.
Figure 3-302
2. Removing the Bin Right Cover
1) Open the bin cover, and remove the bin upper cover.
2) Remove the bin right cover q by removing the three screws w.
w q
Figure 3-303
3. Removing the Upper Cover
1) Open the upper cover q, and remove the six screws w.
w q w
Figure 3-304

3) Lift to remove the rear of the upper cover e as shown.
Figure 3-305
4. Removing the Front Upper Left Cover
1) Open the bin cover, and remove the bin upper cover.
2) Remove the bin right cover.
3) Disconnect the connector q.
Figure 3-306
4) Remove the front upper left cover w by removing the three screws e.
w e
Figure 3-307
5. Removing the Front Lower Left Cover
1) Remove the front upper left cover.

2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the screw w.
w q
Figure 3-308
3) Remove the four screws e, and remove the front lower left cover r by sliding it to
the left.
e r
Figure 3-309
6. Removing the Front Cover
1) Remove the upper left cover and the lower left cover.
2) Disconnect the connector q, open the harness retainer w, and remove the tie-wrap
with an anchor e.
Figure 3-310
3) Lead out the harness q through the hole w.
w q
Figure 3-311
4) Remove the screw e, and pull out the two hinge pins r; then, remove the front door
t.
t r e
Figure 3-312
B. Separating the Finisher and the Copier

1) Disconnect the finisher cable from the copier.
2) Open the upper cover, and remove the front upper cover and the rear upper cover.
3) Disengage the hook (front) q and the hook (rear) w by removing the screw e (one
each).
e e
w
Figure 3-313
4) Separate the finisher from the copier.
C. Display
1. Removing the Control Panel
1) Remove the front upper left cover and the front lower left cover.
2) Remove the front upper cover.
3) Remove the six screws q.
Figure 3-314
4) Disconnect the connector w, and remove the tie-wrap with an anchor e; then,
remove the control panel r.
r e w
Figure 3-315
2. Removing the Copy End Indicator Display
1) Remove the front upper left cover.

2) Remove the Copy End indicator assembly q by disconnecting the connector w and
removing the two screws e.
3) Remove the Copy End indicator PCB r by removing the two screws t.
q e t
w r
Figure 3-316
3. Removing the Stacker Unit Sate Indicator PCB
1) Remove the cover q by removing the screw w.

2) Remove the four screws e.
q w
Figure 3-317
3) Remove the stacker unit state indicator PCB r by disconnecting the connector t.
r t
Figure 3-318
D. Bin Cover Switch Assembly

1. Removing the Bin Cover Switch Unit
1) Open the bin cover, and remove the front left bin.
2) Remove the rear upper cover, front lower left cover, front upper left cover, upper front
cover, and control panel.
3) Remove the bin cover switch unit q by disconnecting the six connectors w and
removing the tie-wrap with an anchor e and three screws r.
w e
q w
Figure 3-319
2. Adjusting the Stroke of the Bin Cover Locking Solenoid (SL8)
Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and adjust the position of the solenoid w so that
the stroke of the plunger is 5 +0.5, -0 mm.
5 +0.5
- 0 mm
Figure 3-320
E. Access Door Switch Assembly

1. Removing the Stacker Access Solenoid (SL3)
1) Open the front cover.

2) Release the lock, and open the access door q by pushing the hook w.
Figure 3-321
3) Remove the two screws e.

4) Remove the stacker access solenoid (SL3) r by disconnecting the connector t.
e t r
Figure 3-322
2. Adjusting the Position of the Stacker Access Solenoid (SL3)
Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and adjust the height of the solenoid unit w so
that the hinge comes into contact with the bottom of the locking lever groove.
Hinge
Adjusting screws
Bottom of the locking lever
groove
Solenoid unit
Figure 3-323
F. Installing the Service Screen

1) Insert the fixing shaft (longer) w into the shaft q of the screen.
w q
Figure 3-324
2) While holding the shaft q of the screen, turn the fixing shaft (longer) w counter-
clockwise 33 times to provide winding power.
w q
Figure 3-325
3) While maintaining the condition of step 2), install the screen.
Figure 3-326
4) Slide out the screen to check its movement.
IV. Bin Module
A. Bin
1. Removing the Upper Bins
Be sure to move each bin to the bottommost level in advance.

1) Remove the bin cover, rear left cover, bin upper cover, bin left cover, bin right cover,
front upper left cover, front lower left cover, upper front cover, and control panel.
2) Remove the bin roll guide upper q by removing two screws w.
q w
Figure 3-401
3) Remove the stay e by removing the four screws r.
e r e
r r e
Figure 3-402
4) Remove the upper belt cover t by removing the five screws y.
y y
Figure 3-403
5) Remove the reference bar retainer upper u by removing the screw i.

6) Remove the reference bar (upper) o.
Caution:
Take care not to lose the bushing !0.
!0
Figure 3-404
7) Remove the guide bar unit upper !2 by disconnecting the two connectors !3 and
removing the two screws !4.
!2 !4 !2 !4 !3
Figure 3-405
8) Remove the upper bin upper limit sensor (PI23) !5 by removing the screw !6.
!6 !5
Figure 3-406
9) Move the upper bin drive belt !7 by hand to move up the upper bin !8; then, remove
the bins one by one.
!8
!7
Figure 3-407
2. Removing the Lower Bins
1) Remove all the upper bins.

2) Remove the bin left cover.
3) Disconnect all 28 connectors of the finisher controller PCB q and the power supply
PCB w.
4) Remove the PCB unit e by removing the four screws r.
Figure 3-408
5) Remove the lower bin upper limit sensor (PI25) t and the upper bin lower limit
sensor (PI24) y by removing the screw i (one each).
i u
i u
Figure 3-409
6) Remove the bin roll guide lower o by removing the two screws !0.
o !0
Figure 3-410
7) Remove the guide bar mount !1 by disconnecting the connector !2 and removing the
four screws !3.
Caution:
The guide bar !4 will come loose. Take care not to loose the spacer !5 and the
bushing !6.
!3 !1 !3
!5
!6
!4
!3
Figure 3-411
8) Remove the lower belt cover !7 by removing the two screws !8.
!7
!8
Figure 3-412
9) Move the lower bin drive belt !9 by hand to move up the lower bin @0 so that it is on
the upper lead cam !9.
10) Move the upper bin drive belt @1 by hand to move up the lower bin @2; then, remove
the bins one by one.
@1
@0
!9 @2
Figure 3-413
B. Bin Shift Motor

1. Removing the Bin Shift Motor
1) Remove the tensioner q by removing the four screws w.
w q
Figure 3-414
2) Remove the idler e by removing the two screws r.

3) Remove the upper bin drive belt t.
t r e
Figure 3-415
4) Remove the upper bin shift motor unit y by cutting the two tie-wraps with an anchor
u, disconnecting the two connectors i, and removing the three tie-wraps o and
four screws !0.
!1
y
!0 !0
!0
Figure 3-416
5) Remove the gear !1 of the upper bin shift motor unit y by removing the two screws
!2 and the support plate !3.
!1 !1 y
!3
Figure 3-417
6) Remove the gear !4 and the belt !5 by removing the E-ring !6.
!6 !4 !5
Figure 3-418
7) Remove the motor gear !7 by loosening the set screw !8.
!8 !7
Figure 3-419
8) Remove the upper bin shift motor !9 by removing the two screws @0.
Caution:
When removing the upper bin shift motor, take care not to damage the encoder plate
@1 at the rear.
@0 @0
@1 !9
Figure 3-420
Caution:
When installing the upper bin shift motor, be sure to adjust the tension of the drive belt
and check the phase of each lead cam after the work.
2. Removing the Lower Bin Shift Motor
1) Loosen the two fixing screws w and the adjusting screw e on the tensioner q.
2) Detach the lower bin drive belt r from the pulley t.
q w
r t
e w
Figure 3-421
3) Remove the noise filter unit y by disconnecting the connector u and removing the
three screws i.
u i
Figure 3-422
4) Remove the idler o by removing the two screws !0.
!0
Figure 3-423
5) Remove the lower bin shift motor unit !1 by cutting the two tie-wraps with a clasp !2,
disconnecting the two connectors !3, and removing the two harness bands !4 and
four screws !5.
!2
!5 !4 !1 !4 !5 !4 !5
Figure 3-424
6) Remove the gear !6 by removing the two screws !7 and the support plate !8.
!7 !6
!8
Figure 3-425
7) Remove the gear !9 and the belt @0 by removing the E-ring @1.
@1 !9 @0
Figure 3-426
8) Remove the motor gear @2 by loosening the set screw @3.

@3 @2
Figure 3-427
9) Remove the lower bin shift motor @4 by removing the two screws @5.
Caution:
When removing the lower bin shift motor, take care not to damage the encoder plate
@6 at the rear.
@5 @5
@6 @4
Figure 3-428
Caution:
When installing the lower bin shift motor, be sure to adjust the tension of the drive belt
and check the phase of each lead cam after the work.
C. Lead Cam
1. Removing the Upper Lead Cam (front)
1) Remove all upper bins.

w q
w
Figure 3-429

w q
Figure 3-430
5) Remove the upper lead cam bushing mount (front) y by removing the two screws
u.
Figure 3-431
6) Remove the pulley i by loosening the two set screws o; then, remove the upper
lead cam (front) !0.
Caution:
!0
!1
o
i
o
Figure 3-432
2. Removing the Upper Lead Cam (rear)
1) Remove all upper bins.

w q
w
Figure 3-433

t r e
Figure 3-434
5) Remove the sensor mount y by removing the screw u.
Figure 3-435
6) Remove the nine harness retainers i.
i i i
Figure 3-436
7) Remove the upper bin shift motor unit o by disconnecting the two connectors !0 and
removing the five harness retainers !1 and the four screws !2.
!0 !1
o
!1 !0
!2 !2
Figure 3-437
8) Remove the lead cam guard !3 by removing the six screws !4.
!4 !4
!3
!4 !4
Figure 3-438
9) Remove the upper lead cam bushing mount (rear) !5 by removing the six screws !6.
!5
!6 !6
Figure 3-439
10) Remove the two pulleys !7 by loosening the two set screws !8 each; then, remove
the two upper lead cams (rear) !9.
Caution:
• Take care not to lose the pin @0 and the bushing @1. (The pin is found only on the
shaft equipped with a sensor flag.)
• Keep in mind that the upper lead cam (rear) equipped with a sensor flag is installed
on the right side of the machine when viewing the machine from the front.
!9
@1
@0
!8
@1
!8 !7
!8
!7
Figure 3-440
3. Removing the Lower Lead Cam (front)
1) Remove all lower bins.

2) Remove the stay q by removing the six screws w.
q
w w w
Figure 3-441
3) Loosen the two fixing screws r and the adjusting screw t on the tensioner e.
4) Detach the lower bin drive belt y from the pulley u.
e r
y u
t r
Figure 3-442
5) Remove the lower lead cam bushing mount (front) i by removing the two screws o.
o i o
Figure 3-443
6) Remove the pulley !0 by loosening the two set screws !1; then, remove the lower
lead cam (front) !2.
Caution:
!2
!3
!1
!0
!1
Figure 3-444
4. Removing the Lower Lead Cam (rear)
1) Remove all lower bins.

2) Remove the stay q by removing the six q
screws w.
w w w
Figure 3-445
3) Loosen the two fixing screws r and the adjusting screw t on the tensioner e.
4) Detach the lower bin drive belt y from the pulley u.
e r
y u
t r
Figure 3-446
5) Remove the lead cam guard i by removing the six screws o.
o i
Figure 3-447
6) Disconnect the connector !1, and remove the three screws !2; then, remove the
noise filter unit !0.
!0
!1 !2
Figure 3-448
7) Remove the idler !3 by removing the two screws !4.
!4
!3
Figure 3-449
8) Remove the lower bin shift motor unit !5 by disconnecting the two connectors !6 and
removing the seven harness bands !7 and the four screws !8.
!6
!7
!8 !7 !5 !7 !8 !7 !8
Figure 3-450
9) Remove the lower bin lower limit sensor (PI26) !9 by removing the screw @0.
@0 !9
Figure 3-451
10) Remove the sensor mount fixing screw @1.
@1
Figure 3-452
11) Cut the four harness bands @2.
@2
Figure 3-453
12) Remove the harness retainer @3.
@3
Figure 3-454
13) Remove the lower lead cam bushing mount (rear) @4 by removing four screws @5.
@5
@4 @5
Figure 3-455
14) Remove the two pulleys @6 by loosening the two set screws @7 each; then, remove
the two lower lead cams (rear) @8.
Caution:
• Take care not to lose the pin @9 and the bushing #0. (The pin is found only on the
shaft equipped with a sensor flag.)
• Keep in mind that the lower lead cam (rear) equipped with a sensor flag is installed
on the left side of the machine when viewing the machine from the front.
#0
@7
@7
@6
#0 @7
@6
@9
@7
Figure 3-456
5. Installing the Upper/Lower Lead Cam
Install the upper/lower lead cam by reversing the steps used to remove it. Thereafter,
make the following adjustments:
a. Adjusting the Tension of the Upper/Lower Bin Drive Belt

As indicated in Figure 3-457, push the drive belt at a point 200 ±5 mm from the rear
side plate down a length of 10 mm with a tension gauge. Then, adjust the tensioner so
that the reading is 200 to 250 g.
20
0_+
5m
m
5m m
m±+_
200m
m
m
10
Figure 3-457
b. Adjusting the Phase of the Upper/Lower Lead Cam

1) Loosen the two set screws for the lead cam.
Caution:
Adjust the phase only after adjusting the tension of the upper/lower bin drive belt.
q q
Figure 3-458
q q
Figure 3-459
2) Make adjustments so that the distance between the start edges of left and right is 160
mm (actual measurement); then, fix the right lead cam in place using the set screw.
160mm
160mm
Figure 3-460
3) Turn the left lead cam so that the right start edge is centered in the slit.
Center Start edge

Slit
Start edge Slit

Center
Figure 3-461
4) While maintaining the condition of step 3), turn the lead cam at the front so that the
front start edge is centered in the slit.
Start edge Start edge
Slit
Slit Center
Center
Figure 3-462
D. Guide Bar Unit

1. Removing the Upper Guide Bar Unit
Be sure to move all bins to their bottommost level in advance.

1) Remove the bin cover.
3) Remove the bin upper cover.
4) Remove the bin left cover and the bin right cover.
5) Remove the upper belt cover q by removing the four screws w.
w q w
Figure 3-463
6) Remove the reference bar retainer (upper) e by removing the screw r.

7) Remove the reference bar (upper) t.
Caution:
Take care not to lose the bushing y.
Figure 3-464
8) Remove the upper guide bar unit u by disconnecting the two connectors i and
removing the three screws o.
o u i
u o
Figure 3-465
2. Removing the Lower Guide Bar Unit
Be sure to move all bins to their bottommost level.

1) Remove the bin cover.
3) Remove the lower belt cover q by removing the two screws w.
Figure 3-466
4) Remove the lower guide bar e by removing the two screws r.
Figure 3-467
5) Remove the screw t, and remove the motor cover y.
t y
Figure 3-468
6) Remove the lower guide bar unit u by cutting the harness band i, disconnecting
the two connectors o, and removing the three screws !0.
!0 i !0
o
o u
Figure 3-469
3. Installing the Upper/Lower Guide Bar Unit
Install the upper/lower guide bar unit by reversing the steps used to remove it. Then,
make the following adjustments:
a. Adjusting the Position of the Upper Guide Bar Unit

Loosen or tighten the two screws 1 so that the guide bar and the reference bar are
parallel.
q Reference bar
Guide bar
Figure 3-470
b. Adjusting the Position of the Lower Guide Bar Unit

Loosen or tighten the two screws q so that the guide bar and the reference bar are
parallel.
q Guide bar Reference bar
Figure 3-471
E. Guide Bar Motor

1. Removing the Upper/Lower Guide Bar Motor
1) Remove the guide bar unit.

2) Slide the guide bar mount away from the motor.
q
Figure 3-472
3) Remove the guide bar motor q by cutting the harness band w and removing the two
screws e.
Caution:
When removing the lower guide bar motor, keep in mind that the harness band w was
cut when removing the lower guide bar unit.
w w
q e
Figure 3-473
V. FEEDING UNIT
A. Upper Feeding Mobile Assembly

1. Removing the Upper Feeding Mobile Assembly
1) Remove the bin upper cover, bin right cover, rear left cover, rear right cover, and non-
sort delivery assembly.
2) Remove the connector mount e by disconnecting the three connectors r and
removing the two screws t.
r e
Figure 3-501
3) Remove the upper feeding mobile assembly y in the direction of the arrow by
removing the two screws u (each at front and rear).
Figure 3-502
Caution:
When installing the upper feeding mobile assembly, make sure that the positioning pin
indicated in Figure 3-503 securely fits in the receiving hole when the upper feeding
mobile assembly is closed.
Positioning pin Receiving hole
Figure 3-503
2. Removing the Upper Feeding Fixed Assembly
1) Lower the stack processing unit in service mode.

3) Detach the paper folding unit (entire unit).
4) Remove the lever (F11).
5) Open the non-sort delivery assembly, and remove the front upper cover.
6) Remove the upper feeding mobile assembly.
7) Remove the common path feeding motor assembly.
8) Remove the mount (rear) q by removing the four screws w.
9) Disconnect the two connectors e, and free the harness from the three harness
retainers r.
q r
w e
Figure 3-504
10) Remove the belt cover t by removing the screw y.

11) Remove the timing belt u by loosening the screw i.
i u
y t
Figure 3-505
12) Remove the upper feeding assembly o by removing the seven screws !0.
o !0
!0
!0
Figure 3-506
3. Adjusting the Stroke of the Non-Sort Path Switching Solenoid (SL1)
1) Open the non-sort delivery assembly.

2) Remove the solenoid cover q by removing the two screws w.
Figure 3-507
3) Loosen the two adjusting screws e, and turn on the non-sort path switching solenoid
(SL1) r. Adjust the position of the non-sort path switching solenoid (SL1) so that the
tip of the flapper t butts against the stopper rubber y. (approximate stroke of 4 ±0.5
mm).
e
mm
0.5
4–
Figure 3-508
4. Adjusting the Stroke of the Upper Paddle Solenoid (SL5)
1) Remove the upper feeding mobile assembly.

2) Remove the upper rear cover.
3) Remove the solenoid cover q by removing the four screws w.
4) Loosen the two adjusting screws e, and adjust the position of the upper paddle
solenoid (SL5) r so that its stroke is 4 ±0.5 mm.
q
e
4–0.5mm
r
Figure 3-509
B. Vertical Path Unit

1. Removing the Vertical Path Unit
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the vertical path unit.
2) Remove the vertical path unit q by removing the four screws w. (Lift the unit to
remove.)
Figure 3-510
2. Correcting the Vertical Path Skew
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the vertical path unit.
2) Remove the vertical path cover q by removing the six screws w.
q w
Figure 3-511
3) Loosen the adjusting screw, and make adjustments by moving the adjusting plate left
and right.
Figure 3-512
C. Lower Feeding Assembly

1. Removing the Lower Feeding Assembly
1) Open the front cover, and slide out the lower feeding assembly.
2) Remove the two screws q.
3) Remove the lower feeding assembly w by removing the two stepped screws e.
e
w
e
w
q
q
Figure 3-513
2. Removing the Lower Paddle Unit
2) Remove the rear right cover.
3) Remove the belt cover.
4) Open the bin cover, and remove the lower belt cover q by removing the two screws
w.
w q
Figure 3-514
5) Move the lower bin drive belt t in the direction of the arrow by hand so that all lower
bins are at the topmost position.
figure 3-515
6) Remove the screw y, and disconnect the two connectors u; then, free the harness
from the two harness guides i.
Figure 3-516
Figure 3-517
7) Remove the lower paddle unit o by removing the two screws !0.
!0
Figure 3-518
3. Adjusting the Stroke of the Lower Paddle Solenoid (SL6)
1) Remove the lower paddle unit.

2) Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and butt the lower paddle arm w against section
A. adjust the position of the lower paddle solenoid (SL6) e so that the lower paddle
solenoid (SL6) and the E-ring r of the plunger are in contact with each other without
a gap.
w
A
r A
q q
e e
Figure 3-519
D. Inlet Unit
1. Removing the Inlet Unit

2) Detach the paper folding unit (entire unit).
3) Remove the gear cover q by removing the three screws w.
q w
Figure 3-520
4) Remove the inlet unit e by disconnecting the connector r, and removing the five
screws t and the timing belt y.
r
Point A
t
t
y e
(As viewed from point A)
Figure 3-521
2. Adjusting the Stroke of the Path Switching Solenoid (SL2)
Loosen the two adjusting screws, and turn on the path switching solenoid (SL2).
Adjust the position of the path switching solenoid (SL2) so that the tip of the flapper butts
against the stopper rubber. (stroke reference of 4.5 ±0.5 mm)
Butted
4.5–0.5mm
Figure 3-522
E. Removing the Common Path Feeding Motor (M1)

1) Open the non-sort delivery assembly, and remove the rear upper cover.
2) Remove the common path feeding motor assembly q by removing the four screws
w.
3) Remove the common path feeding motor assembly e by disconnecting the
connector r and removing the harness retainer t.
Figure 3-523
e r t
Figure 3-524
F. Removing the Upper Path Feeding Motor (M2)

1) Remove the non-sort delivery assembly.
2) Remove the upper path feeding motor PCB q by disconnecting the two connectors
w and removing the screw and three spacers r.
w r
e q
Figure 3-525
3) Open the upper feeding assembly.

4) Remove the drive belt t by loosening the screw y on the tensioner.
t y
Figure 3-526
5) Remove the feeding guide u by removing the seven screws i.
i u u i
Figure 3-527
6) Remove the upper path feeding motor o by removing the two screws !0.
!0 o
Figure 3-528
G. Removing the Lower Path Feeding Motor (M3)

3) Remove the belt cover q by removing the five screws w.
Figure 3-529
4) Remove the drive assembly cover e by removing the four screws r.
Figure 3-530
5) Remove the lower path feeding motor assembly t by disconnecting the connector
y and removing the three screws u.
t u y
Figure 3-531
6) Remove the lower path feeding motor (M3) i by removing the six screws o.
o i
Figure 3-532
VI. Stack Processing Unit
A. Stack Processing Unit

1. Fixing the Stack Processing Unit in Place
1) Turn on and then off the power switch; then, move the stack processing unit to home
position.
2) Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet; then, remove the rear right cover.
4) Remove the two metal fixings D e by removing the screw r (one each).
w
e
q
r
Figure 3-601
5) Install the two metal fixings D t to the left/right rail assembly of the stack processing
unit using the screws y removed in step 4) as indicated.
t t
Figure 3-602
6) Remove the metal fixing A u and the metal fixing B i by removing the six screws
o.
i
o
Figure 3-603
7) Open the front cover, and install the metal fixing A u and the metal fixing B i to the
finisher’s frame as indicated using the six screws o removed in step 6).
o u i
o o o
Figure 3-604
2. Removing the Stack Processing Unit Shift Motor Assembly
1) Fix the stack processing unit in place using a metal fixing.

2) Move the front gripper q by hand to the left end.
Figure 3-605
3) Remove the spring cover w by removing the three screws.

4) Remove the sensor assembly r by disconnecting the connector t and removing the
two screws y.
w y
r t
w e
Figure 3-606
5) Remove the guide u by removing the four screws i.

6) Remove the sensor o by removing the screw !0 and disconnecting the connector !1.
o !0 !1
u i
u
Figure 3-607
7) Remove the harness cover !2 by removing the screw !3.
!2 !3
Figure 3-608
8) Remove the harness guide plate !4 by disconnecting the connector !5, removing the
screw !6, and freeing the harness from the edge saddle !7.
9) Disconnect the two connectors !8, and free the harness from the edge saddle !9.
!5
!8
!9
!4 !6 !7
Figure 3-609
10) Remove the connector cover @0 by removing the screw @1.
@1 @0
Figure 3-610
11) Remove the stack processing unit shift motor assembly @2 by disconnecting the
connector @3 and removing the four screws @4.
@3
@2 @3 @4 @3
Figure 3-611
Caution:
When installing the stack processing unit shift motor assembly, be sure to attach the
drive belt to the gear securely. Further, be sure to fit the shaft of the gear in the
receiving hole as indicated.
A
A
C
B B
C
Figure 3-612
B. Removing the Side Gripper Left/Right Shift Drive Assembly

1) Lower the stack processing unit and the stacker unit in service mode.
2) Remove the two screws q, and remove the cover w.
w q
Figure 3-613
3) Disconnect the connector e.
Figure 3-614
4) Remove the side gripper left/right shift drive assembly r by removing the four screws
t.
Figure 3-615
Caution:
When installing the side gripper left/right shift drive assembly, check to make sure that
the pin y of the side gripper is securely engaged with the arm u.
r t
Figure 3-616
C. Side Gripper
1. Removing the Side Gripper
1) Lower the harness unit and the stacker unit in service mode.
2) Move the lower bin drive belt q by hand so that all upper bins are at the topmost
position.
q
Figure 3-617
3) Remove the screw w, and remove the connector cover e.
e w
Figure 3-618
4) Move the side gripper r by hand to the left until the screw comes into view.
5) While holding the side gripper unit r by hand, remove the two screws t.
Figure 3-619
6) Remove the side gripper unit r by cutting the two tie-wraps y, disconnecting the
connector u, and removing the screw i and the tie-wrap o.
i y
o u
Figure 3-620
Caution:
When installing the side gripper, be sure to connect the bearing of the side gripper to
the groove of the arm.
Bearing
Figure 3-621
2. Removing the Side Gripper Clasping Motor (M9)
1) Remove the side gripper.

2) Open the paper edge retaining solenoid assembly q by removing the two screws w.
3) Remove the paper edge retaining solenoid assembly e by disconnecting the
connector r.
4) Disconnect the two connectors r.
q r
Figure 3-622
5) Remove the gear cover y by removing the harness u and the four screws i.
6) Remove the side gripper clasping motor (M9) o by removing the gear !0 and the two
screws !1.
i u !0 !1 o
!1
y
Figure 3-623
3. Side Gripper Paper Sensor
1) Remove the side gripper

2) Remove the gear cover q by removing the three screws w and loosening the screw
e.
e w
Figure 3-624
3) Remove the paper sensor unit r by disconnecting the connector t of the sensor
cable and removing the screw y.
t y r
Figure 3-625
4) Remove the side gripper paper sensor u from the paper sensor unit r by removing
the screw i.
r
u i
Figure 3-626
4. Adjusting the Stroke of the Paper Edge Holding Solenoid (SL7)
1) Remove the side gripper, and remove the paper edge holding solenoid assembly.
2) Loosen the two adjusting screws, and adjust the position of the paper edge holding
solenoid (SL7) so that the angle made by the bottom face of the guide arm A and the
side of the arm cover when the solenoid is on is 90 ±2° (plunger stroke reference of
5.4 mm).
3) Install the guide arm B so that it is displaced by a single tooth in relation to the guide
arm A.
Adjusting screw Solenoid
90 –2
Figure 3-627
5. Adjusting the Spatial Relationship between Side Gripper and Bin Face
1) Move the side gripper to clasping position in service mode so that the gripper is
closed.
2) Open the bin cover, and remove the bin upper cover, bin right cover, and front left
cover.
3) Loosen the two adjusting screws, and adjust the height of the side gripper so that the
distance between the clasping face of the lower gripper and the bin face is 0 to 2 mm.
0~2mm
e w
Figure 3-628
D. Bin Rear End Wall Open/Close Unit

1. Removing the Bin Rear End Wall Open/Close Unit
1) Fix the stack processing unit in place with a metal fixing.

2) Open the upper cover, and open the lever (F12).
3) Remove the harness cover q by removing the screw w.
4) Disconnect the connector e.
w e
Figure 3-629
5) Turn the gear r by hand so that the bin rear end wall open/close arm t is in OPEN
position.
Figure 3-630
6) Remove the bin rear end wall open/close unit y by removing the three screws u.
y u
Figure 3-631
Caution:
When installing the bin rear end wall open/close unit, be sure to adjust the angle at
which the bin rear end wall opens.
2. Adjusting the Position of the Bin Rear End Wall Open/Close Unit
1) Put the bin rear end wall into OPEN position in service mode.
2) Loosen the three adjusting screws, and adjust the position of the bin rear end wall
open/close unit so that the tip of the bin rear end wall moves down 0 to 2 mm lower
than the bin face.
mm
2
0~
Adjusting screw
Figure 3-632
E. Stapler Front/Rear Shift Drive System
1. Removing the Stapler Front/Rear Shift Motor (M13)
1) Lower the stacker unit and the stack processing unit in service mode.
Stacker unit
Figure 3-633
2) Remove the rear right cover, and remove the belt cover.
3) Remove the sensor assembly q by removing the screw w.
4) Remove the harness cover e by removing the screw r.
5) Disconnect the connector t, and remove the tie-wrap with an anchor y; then, free
the harness u from the edge saddle i.
q e y t i
w r
u
Figure 3-634
6) Remove the spring o and three screws !0.

7) Remove the gear cover !1 by removing the two screws !2.
!1 !2 !0
o !0 !2
Figure 3-635
Caution:
When installing the spring, temporarily tighten the three screws; tighten them fully
after hooking the spring.
8) Remove the E-ring !3, and remove the drive belt !4, gear !5, gear !6, drive belt !7,
and pulley !8.
9) Remove the motor unit !9.
!6 !5
!9
!7 !3 !4
!8
Figure 3-636
Caution:
Each of the gears and the pulleys has its own orientation. Take note.
10) Remove the stapler front/rear shift motor (M13) @0 by removing the four screws @1.
@1 @0
@1
Figure 3-637
2. Adjusting the Position of the Stapler Front/Rear Shift Home Position Sensor
(PI66)
1) Open the non-sort delivery assembly, and remove the front upper cover.
2) Execute front single stapling. Loosen the adjusting screw w and adjust the position
of the stapler front/rear home position sensor (PI66) q so that stapling occurs at a
point 5 ±1 mm from the edge of paper.
q w
Figure 3-638
3. Removing the Stapler Front/Rear Shift Drive Belt
Stacker unit
Figure 3-639
2) Remove the rear right cover, and remove the belt cover.
3) Remove the sensor assembly q by removing the screw w.
4) Remove the harness cover e by removing the screw r.
q e
w r
Figure 3-640
5) Disconnect the connector t, and remove the tie-wrap with an anchor y; then, free
the harness u from the edge saddle i.
y t i
Figure 3-641
6) Remove the spring o and three screws !0.

7) Remove the gear cover !1 by removing two screws !2.
Caution:
When installing the spring, temporarily tighten the three screws first, and tighten them
fully after hooking the spring.
!1 !2 !0
o !0 !2
Figure 3-642
8) Remove the E-ring !3, and remove the drive belt !4, gear !5, gear !6, drive belt !7,
and pulley !8.
9) Remove the motor unit !9.
!6 !5
!9
!7 !3 !4
!8
Figure 3-643
Caution:
Each of the gears and the pulleys has its own orientation. Take note.
10) Remove the two screws @0, and remove the harness cover @1.
@0
@1
Figure 3-644
11) Remove the screw @2, and remove the harness cover @3.
@3
@2
Figure 3-645
12) Disconnect the two connectors @4, and remove the two screws @5; then, remove the
harness @6.
@4 @6
@5
Figure 3-646
13) Remove the screw @7, and remove the drive belt @8.
@7
@8
Figure 3-647
F. Removing the Stapler Unit

2) Move the front gripper to the right end.
3) Open the non-sort delivery assembly, and remove the staple cartridge.
4) Open the lever (F12).
5) Remove the cover q by removing the two screws w.
w q
Figure 3-648
6) Remove the connector cover e by removing the screw r. (Work as if to lift and
swing up the right side when removing the cover.)
e r
Figure 3-649
7) Disconnect the two connectors t.
Figure 3-650
8) Remove the two screws y.
Figure 3-651
9) Remove the staple dish u by removing the screw i.

10) Remove the two screws u.
i u
Figure 3-652
11) Move the stapler !0 to the center to remove.
!0
Figure 3-653
Caution:
If you must place the stapler unit on a desk or a floor after removal, take extra care
so that the waste staple outlet at its bottom will not be damaged.
Waste staple outlet
Figure 3-653-1
G. Front Gripper
1. Removing the Front Gripper

2) Move the front gripper q by hand to the left end.
Figure 3-654
3) Open the non-sort delivery assembly, and open the lever (F12) w.
4) Move the front gripper e by hand to the front.
e
w
Figure 3-655
5) Remove the two screws t, and remove the PCB cover r.

6) Disconnect the connector y, and remove the screw u and the tie-wrap i with an
anchor i from the relay PCB.
r t
y i u
Figure 3-656
7) Move the front gripper o by hand to where the four screws !0 are visible.
8) Remove the front gripper o by removing the four screws !0.
o !0
!0
Figure 3-657
2. Removing the Front Gripper Clasping Motor (M12)
1) Remove the front gripper.

2) Remove the gear cover q by removing the four screws w.
q w
Figure 3-658
3) Remove the sensor mount e by disconnecting the connector r and removing the
screw t.
e t r
figure 3-659
4) Remove the front gripper clasping motor (M12) r by removing the two screws t.
Figure 3-660
H. Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor (M10)

1. Removing the Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor (M10)
Figure 3-661

3) Cut the harness band q. Remove the harness retainer w, and disconnect the
connector w.
4) Remove the front gripper left/right shift motor (M10) e by removing the two screws
r.
r e t
q w
Figure 3-662
2. Removing the Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Drive Belt
Figure 3-663
2) Remove the front gripper left/right shift motor (M10).

3) Remove the front gripper left/right shift clock sensor (PI54) q by removing the screw
w and disconnecting the connector e.
q e w
Figure 3-664
4) Remove the two screws r, and remove the harness guide t.
Figure 3-665
5) Remove the screw y (front, rear; one each); then, loosen the tensioner u (front,
rear; one each).
u y
u y
Figure 3-666
6) Remove the belt metal fixing y (front, rear) by removing the two screws u (each).
y u
Figure 3-667
Caution:
When installing the belt metal fixing, fix it in place so that the front gripper is parallel
to the stack processing unit.
n Making Checks
a) Slide out the vertical path unit.
b) Fit the belt metal fixing where the frame of the front gripper is parallel to the frame
of the stack processing unit.
Figure 3-668
7) Remove the knob i by removing the grip ring o.

8) Remove the mounting plate !0 by removing the two screws !1.
!1
o i !1
!0
Figure 3-669
9) Remove the E-ring !2, and slide the gear !3 to the front; then, pull out the pin !4.
10) While detaching the drive belt (front) !5, move the drive shaft !6 to the rear.
!4
!3
!2
Figure 3-670
11) Remove the drive belt (rear) !7.
!7
Figure 3-671
I. Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Drive System

1. Removing the Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Motor Assembly

2) Loosen the screw q, and remove the spring w; then, remove the tensioner e.
3) Remove the front gripper front/rear shift clock sensor r (PI 59) by removing the
screw t and disconnecting the connector t.
e
w
q
r y
Figure 3-672
4) Remove the three screws u, and slide out the front gripper front/rear shift motor
assembly i.
5) Remove the PCB cover i by removing the screw o.
i o
Figure 3-673
6) Disconnect the connector !0, and remove the front gripper front/rear shift motor
assembly o.
i !0 o
i u
Figure 3-674
2. Removing the Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Drive Belt

2) Remove the front gripper.
3) Move the front gripper q by hand to the right edge.
Figure 3-675
4) Remove the tensioner w by removing the spring e and the screw r.
r w e
Figure 3-676
5) Remove the slider assembly t, two slide rails y, and fixing plate u by removing the
two screws i.
t y u i
Figure 3-677
6) Remove the belt retainer o by removing the screw !0.

7) Remove the front gripper front/rear shift drive belt !1.
!1 o !0
Figure 3-678
J. Stack Processing Unit Screen

1. Removing the Screen

2) Remove the five screws, and remove the belt cover.
3) Remove the cable cover q by removing the three screws w.
Figure 3-679
4) Remove the leading edge e of the stack processing unit by removing the two screws
r.
Caution:
Exercise care. The screen starts to roll up as soon as its tip is removed.
e r e r
Figure 3-680
5) Remove the stack processing unit screen t by removing the two screws y.
Figure 3-681
2. Installing the Screen
1) Insert the fixing shaft (longer) w into the shaft q of the screen.
q w
Figure 3-682
2) While holding down the shaft q of the screen, turn the fixing shaft (longer) w
counterclockwise 20 times to provide winding power.
w q
Figure 3-683
3) While maintaining the condition of step 2), install the screen to the stack processing
unit e together with the fixing shaft (longer) w.
Figure 3-684
4) Install the fixing shaft at the front of the screen.
Figure 3-685
5) Slide out the screen, and fix its tip as indicated with two screws e.
e e
Figure 3-686
VII. STACKER UNIT

A. Stacker Unit
1. Fixing the Stacker Unit in Place
1) Turn on and then off the power switch, and move the stacker unit to home position.
2) Disconnect the copier's power cord from the outlet, and remove the rear right cover.
Figure 3-701-1
4) Remove the two metal fixings D e by removing the screw r (one each).
Figure 3-701-2
5) Install the two metal fixings D t to the left and right rail assemblies of the stacker
unit using the screws y removed in step 4).
t t
Figure 3-702
6) Remove the metal fixing C u by removing the screw i.
i
u
Figure 3-703
7) Open the front cover, and install the metal fixing C o to the frame of the finisher with
the screw !0 removed in step 6).
!0
Figure 3-704
2. Removing the Stacker Tray Unit

Figure 3-705
3) Open the front cover, and slide out the stacker tray unit about 10 cm.
4) Turn the belt e of the lift wall motor to move the lift wall to upper position. At this time,
take care so that the lift wall t will not come into contact with the paper face sensor
r.
e r
Figure 3-706
5) Remove the cable guide y by removing the stepped screw u, disconnecting the four
connectors i, and removing the two cable retainers o.
i o
i u y
Figure 3-707
6) Remove the left/right lifter wall rail !0 by removing the three screws !1 (each on left
and right).
Caution:
• Work while holding the lift wall rail in place so as to avoid dropping it.
• Use M4×4 fixing screws for the lift wall rail; otherwise, the screw shaft can interfere
with the roller.
!1
!0
Figure 3-708
7) Remove the slide bar !2 and the stay !3 by removing the four screws !4.
8) Remove the stacker tray !5.
!5 !4 !2 !4
!3
Figure 3-709
9) Remove the motor cover !6 by removing the screw !7.

10) Remove the screw !8 and remove the harness retainer !9 and disconnect the
connector @0.
!9 @0 !8
!6 !7
Figure 3-710
11) Remove the stacker tray locking solenoid (SL9) @1 by removing the two screws @2.
@2 @1 @2
Figure 3-711
12) Turn the stacker tray shift motor (M16) @3 in the direction of the arrow, and remove
the tray base @4.
@3
@4
Figure 3-712
13) Remove the stacker tray unit @5 by removing the eight screws @6.
Caution:
When removing the stacker unit, lift the rack gear assembly A shown in Figure 3-713
to disengage the claw B found on the bottom of the stacker tray unit. Work with care.
A B
@7 @6
@7
Figure 3-713
3. Installing the Stacker Tray Unit
Install the stacker tray unit by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following
in mind:
• When fixing the rail in place, set the stacker tray inside the machine, and then slide
it out before securing it.
B. Removing the Stacker Tray Drive System

1. Removing the Stacker Tray Shift Motor (M16)
1) Turn on and then off the power switch to move the stacker unit to home position.
2) Open the front cover q, and slide out the stacker tray w.
3) Remove the slide bar e and the stay r by removing the three screws t. Remove
the stacker tray y by removing the two screws u.
Figure 3-714
4) Remove the motor cover i by removing the screw o.

5) Remove the harness retainer !0 by removing the screw !1 and disconnecting the
connector !2.
!0 !2 !1
i o
Figure 3-715
6) Remove the stacker tray locking solenoid (SL9) !2 by removing the two screws !3.
!3 !2 !3
Figure 3-716
7) Turn the ratchet gear !4 of the stacker tray shift motor (M16) in the direction of the
arrow, and remove the tray base !5.
!4
!5
Figure 3-717
8) Remove the gear !6 and the belt !7 by removing the set screw !8.
Caution:
Take care not to leave grease on the gear !9 to the belt.
!7
!8 !6 !9
Figure 3-718
9) Remove the stacker tray shift motor @0 by removing the four screws @1, disconnecting
the connector @2, and cutting the three harness retainers @3.
@2 @3 @0 @1
@1
Figure 3-719
2. Removing the Stacker Unit Shift Motor (M15)
1) Fix the stacker unit in place with a metal fixing.

2) Remove the belt retainer q (upper, lower, left, right; one each) and the drive belt w
by removing the four screws r (upper, lower, right, left; one each).
e q e
w e w
Figure 3-720
3) Remove the stacker unit drive assembly r by removing the nine screws t and
disconnecting the three connectors y.
t y t
r t y t
Figure 3-721
4) Remove the brake u by removing the three screws i.

5) Remove the sensor mount o by removing the screw !0.
Figure 3-722
6) Remove the two screws !1, and loosen the locking screw !2; then, remove the gear
!3 and the belt !4 to remove the stacker unit shift motor (M15) !5.
Caution:
When installing the gear, be sure to match the position A of the D-cut and the stop
position B of the locking screw.
!1 !5 !2 !1 !4
A
B
!3
Figure 3-723
3. Installing the Stacker Unit Shift Motor (M15)
a. Installing the Stacker Unit Drive Belt

1) Loosen the two fixing screws q (left, right; two each).
2) Loosen the tension adjusting nut w.
q q
Figure 3-724
3) Check to make sure that the stacker unit is on the metal fixing e.
e e
Figure 3-725
4) Match the let/right drive belt r against the end of the belt retainer lower t to engage.
Figure 3-726
5) Fix the drive belt r and the belt retainer lower t temporarily on the stacker unit with
four screws y.
y r t r y
Figure 3-727
6) Attach the drive belt r in the order indicated.
Caution:
When fixing the drive belt r in place by the belt retainers upper and lower t, be sure
to match the ends of the drive belts.
r t
Butted
Figure 3-728
7) Fix the belt retainer t in place with four screws u.
u t t u
u
u
Figure 3-729
b. Adjusting the Tension of the Stacker Unit Drive Belt

As shown, turn the tension adjusting nut so that the reading is 1000 g when the center
of the drive belt ( about 20 mm from the lower end of the belt metal fixing) is pushed down
over a length of 10 to 15 mm with a tension gauge.
Figure 3-730
C. Removing the Leading Edge Stopper Drive System

1. Removing the Leading Edge Stopper Motor (M18)

Figure 3-731
4) Turn the belt e of the lifter wall shift motor to move the lift wall r to upper position.
At this time, take care so that the lifter wall will not come into contact with the paper
face sensor t.
e
t
Figure 3-732
5) Remove the leading edge stopper motor cover y by removing the three screws u.
u y u
Figure 3-733
6) Remove the spring !0, and disconnect the connector !1.

7) Remove the four screws !3, and remove the leading edge stopper motor (M18) !2.
!3 !2
!0 !1 !3
Figure 3-734
2. Removing the Leading Edge Stopper Drive Belt

Figure 3-735
4) Turn the belt e of the lifter wall shift motor to move the lifter wall up about 5 cm.
Figure 3-736
5) Remove the leading edge stopper stay r by removing the three screws t.
6) Remove the slide rail (upper) y by removing the two E-rings u.
!2 !5
u y u
!4
Figure 3-737
7) Remove the belt metal fixing i from the slider !0 by removing the screw o.
i !0 o
Figure 3-738
8) Remove the belt metal fixing i by removing the two screws !1 and the spring !2;
then, loosen the screw !4 on the tensioner !3, and remove the leading edge stopper
drive belt !5.
!1 i !5 !4
!2
!1 !4 !3
Figure 3-739
3. Adjusting the Angle of the Leading Edge Stopper
1) Move the stacker tray to the upper limit in service mode.

2) Check to make sure that the leading edge stopper is at home position.
3) Loosen the two adjusting screws e to make adjustments so that the top face q of
the stacker tray and the leading edge stopper adjusting plate w are parallel.
e w q
Parallel
Figure 3-740
4. Adjusting the Leading Edge Stopper Home Position
1) Move the leading edge stopper to home position in service mode.

2) Loosen the adjusting screw to make adjustments so that the distance between
leading edge stopper and reference wall is 367 ±0.5 mm.
.5mm
7 –0
36
Figure 3-741
D. Removing the Lifter Wall Drive System

1. Removing the Lifter Wall Shift Motor (M19)

Figure 3-742
4) Remove the lifter wall shift motor e by removing the four screws r and
disconnecting the connector t.
e r
e
Figure 3-743
2. Removing the Lifter Wall Drive Belt
1) Remove the stacker tray unit.

2) Remove the guide roller q by removing the E-ring w.
q w
Figure 3-744
3) Remove the belt retainer e by removing the two screws r each at left and right.
Caution:
Be sure to support the lifter wall unit while working to prevent the lifter wall unit t from
dropping.
e t
Figure 3-745
4) Lift the lifter wall unit; then, remove the three harness retainers y, and disconnect
the connector u.
5) Remove the lifter wall drive belt i by removing the two screws o (each on left and
right) and removing the spring !0.
y u !0
o
o
Figure 3-746
Caution:
Be sure to adjust the phase of the lifter wall unit whenever you have installed the lifter
wall drive belt.
3. Adjusting the Phase of the Lifter Wall Unit

Figure 3-747
4) Turn the belt e of the lifter wall shift motor so that the top face of the left end of the
lifter wall matches the height of the tray guide rail.
Figure 3-748
5) Loosen the two fixing screws y to make adjustments so that the top face r of the
right edge of the lifter wall and the height of the tray guide rail t match. At this time,
the discrepancy in height between the left and right lifter walls must be 1.5 mm or
less.
Hight matched r t Hight matched
y
t y r
Figure 3-749
E. Adjusting the Tension of the Stacker Unit Shift Brake 2 Belt

1) Remove the common feeding motor.
2) As shown, loosen the tension fixing screw q and turn the tension adjusting nut w to
make adjustments so that the reading is 100 g when the center of the brake belt is
pushed by a tension gauge about 10 to 15 mm.
10~15
mm
Figure 3-750
Figure 3-751
w
Figure 3-752
F. Adjusting the Orientation of the Stack Tray

1) Move the stack tray to upper position in service mode.
2) Slide out the stacker unit.
3) Loosen the two screws q.
Figure 3-753
4) Adjust the mounting angle of the stack tray so that the difference in distance between
the top face of the stack tray and the top end of the reference wall is in 1 mm or less
at the end and the front (A - B 1 mm).
B
A
Figure 3-754
VIII. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

A. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB
2) Disconnect all connectors from the finisher controller PCB.
3) Remove the finisher controller PCB q by removing the nine locking supports w.
Figure 3-801
B. Removing the Stack Processing Unit Drive PCB

Stacker unit
Figure 3-802
2) Turn off the copier, and disconnect the finisher's power cable from the power outlet.
3) Remove the PCB cover q by removing the four screws w.
w q
Figure 3-803
4) Remove the grounding wire e by removing the screw r.

5) Remove the four screw t, and remove the two harness retainers y; then, slide out
the stack processing unit drive PCB u.
6) Disconnect all connectors of the PCB, and remove the stack processing unit drive
PCB i.
y u
i
Figure 3-804
C. Removing the Power Supply PCB

2) Disconnect all connectors from the power supply PCB.
3) Remove the power supply PCB q by removing the four screws w.
w q
Figure 3-805
D. Noise Filter Unit

2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the eight receptacles w and the three
screws e.
3) Remove the noise filter unit r by removing the six harness bands t.
q w w
t t r
Figure 3-806
IX. PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1

A. External Covers
Remove the covers as necessary when cleaning, checking, or repairing the inside of
the machine. Those covers that may be detached by mere removal of mounting screws
are left out of the discussions.
q r
t
w
q Upper cover (4) r Rear cover (2)

w Lower right cover (2) t Lower left cover (2)
e Front cover (3)
Figure 3-901
The number in parentheses indicates the number of mounting screws used.
B. Paper Folding Unit

1. Separating the Paper Folding Unit and the Copier
1) Disconnect the lattice connector from the copier.

2) Open the upper cover, and remove the rear cover.
3) Disengage the hook (rear) q by removing the screw w.
4) Remove the inner cover e by removing the two screws r.
5) Disengage the hook (front) t, and separate the paper folding unit from the copier.
r
e
w
q
Figure 3-902
2. Removing the Paper Folding Unit (lower)
1) Separate the paper folding unit from the copier.

2) Remove the front cover and the rear cover, and push in the folder unit.
3) Remove the two screws q.
q q
Figure 3-903
4) Remove the four screws w.

5) Slide out the folder unit slightly, and lift the paper folding unit e (lower) to remove.
w e
Figure 3-904
Caution:
• Be sure to support the paper folding unit (lower) while working.
• When installing the paper folding unit (lower), be sure to fit the bend-up of the stay
in the receiving hole in the rail mounting plate.
Cut-off Screw
Bend-up
Receiving hole
Cut-offs
Screws
Figure 3-905
• Be sure to adjust the horizontal path drive coupling assembly whenever you have
installed the paper folding unit (lower).
3. Removing the Paper Folding Unit (upper)
1) Remove the finisher's front upper cover, rear upper cover, and rear right cover.
2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Disconnect the two connectors q.
Figure 3-906
4) Remove the guide retaining spring (rear) w by removing the two screws e.
5) Remove the six screws r.
Figure 3-907
6) Remove the hook (front) t and the hook (rear) y by removing the screw u.
y
t u
u
Figure 3-908
7) Remove the paper folding unit (upper) i.
Figure 3-909
Caution:
• When performing steps 5) and 6), be sure to hold the paper folding unit (upper).
• When installing the paper folding unit (upper), be sure to fit the positioning pin in the
receiving hole. Further, be sure to set the connection switch lever properly.
Receiving hole
Positioning pin
Connection switch lever
Figure 3-910
C. Feeding System
1. Positioning the Folding Stopper
Make a check by feeding paper. If the folding position does not satisfy the
specification, adjust the position of the appropriate stopper.
No. 2 stopper
No. 1 stopper
Figure 3-911
a. No. 1 Stopper
1) Slide out the folding unit q, and remove the lower left cover w and the lower right
cover e.
2) Loosen the two adjusting screws t, and adjust the position of the stopper r.
Lower left cover
Figure 3-912
t r
r t
Figure 3-913
b. No. 2 Stopper
1) Slide out the folder unit, and open the right guide (lever 13).
Figure 3-914
3) Remove the guide plate e from the arm t by removing the E-ring r (front, rear;
one each).
t r e
r e
Figure 3-915
4) Loosen the two adjusting screws u, and adjust the position of the stopper y.
u y u
u y u
Figure 3-916
2. Adjusting the Inlet Guide
1) Remove the front cover.

2) Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and loosen the adjusting screw and make
adjustments so that the tip of the inlet guide w is 4 ±1 mm from the lower guide plate
e (not the rib top).
3) Loosen the adjusting screw y and make adjustments so that the distance between
the upper guide plate and the inlet guide t when the inlet solenoid (SL5) r is on is
4 ±1 mm.
r
4–1mm
t
4–1mm
w
e q y q
Figure 3-917
3. Adjusting the Pressure of the Folding Roller
1) Remove the front cover and the rear cover.

2) Remove the two screws, and remove the belt cover.
w q q w
Figure 3-918
3) Loosen the fixing nut, and turn the adjusting screw t so that the length of the
pressure spring is 17.5 ±3 mm.
e r t t r e
17.5–0.3mm
17.5–0.3mm
Figure 3-919
4. Adjusting the No. 1 Folding Path Guide
1) Remove the front cover and the rear cover.

2) Remove the belt cover q by removing the three screws w.
w q q w
Figure 3-920
3) Remove the folding drive PCB.

4) Fix both adjusting screws r at the front and the rear (two each) temporarily in place.
r r
Figure 3-902
5) Turn the four adjusting screws discussed in step 4) to make adjustments so that the
gap A between the top end of the lower left guide t and the roller A y and the gap
B (rib top) between the lower end of the lower left guide and the right guide u is 1.6
±0.3mm.
u
t
1.6–0.3mm
Figure 3-922
5. Adjusting the Position of the Right Guide Static Eliminator
1) Open the upper cover and slide out the folder unit.
2) Remove the lower right cover, and open the right guide (lever 13).
3) Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and make adjustments so that the protrusion of
the static eliminator w from the guide face (not the rib top) of the right guide is 1 ±0.3
mm.
1–0.3
mm
Figure 3-923
6. Adjusting the No. 2 Folding Roller Pressure
1) Remove the two springs q.
Figure 3-924
2) Remove the spring w.
Figure 3-925
3) Remove the screw e, and remove the belt cover r.
Figure 3-926
4) Loosen the two adjusting screws t (front, rear; one each).
t
t
Figure 3-927
5) Butt the outlet guide plate, and check to make sure that the latch y (front, rear) and
the bearing u are engaged; then, fix it in place by turning the screws loosened in
step 4).
Figure 3-928
D. Drive System
1. Removing the Folder Motor (FM1)

2) Remove the lower left cover.
3) Remove the belt cover q by removing the screw w.
q w
Figure 3-929
4) Push in the folder unit.

5) Remove the three screws e, and remove the drive belt r from the gear t.
r t
Figure 3-930
6) Slide out the folder unit.

7) Remove the folder motor y by disconnecting the connector u.
y u
Figure 3-931
2. Positioning the Horizontal Path Drive Coupling Assembly
1) Remove the rear cover.

3) Slide in and out the folder unit w twice or three times to position the horizontal path
drive coupling assembly e.
q
w
e
Figure 3-932
4) Push in the folder unit, and tighten the two screws loosened in step 2).
3. Adjusting the Tension of the Feeding Belt
1) Separate the paper folding unit from the copier.

2) Remove the belt cover q by removing the three screws w.
w q
q w
Figure 3-933
3) Remove the upper feeding guide e by removing the E-ring r and the shift t.
e r t
Figure 3-934
4) Remove the six screws y, and disconnect the five connectors u.
u
y
u
u
Figure 3-935
5) Push in the folder unit halfway.

6) Remove the connector assembly i and the harness guide o by removing the four
screws !0.
i o
!0 !0
Figure 3-936
7) Remove the guide plate e from the arm t by removing the E-ring r (front, rear; one
each).
t r e
r e
Figure 3-937
8) Loosen the two adjusting screws u to adjust the position of the pressure releasing
solenoid y (SL4) so that the reading of A is 2 ±0.3 mm when the solenoid turns on.
y u
Figure 3-938
E. Removing the Folder Drive PCB

2) Slide out the folder unit.
3) Remove the three screws q.
4) Push in the folder unit, and remove the belt cover w by lifting it at the rear.
q q
(rear) (front)
Figure 3-939
5) Remove the grounding wire e by removing the screw r.

6) Remove the folder driver PCB t by removing the four locking supports y and
disconnecting all connectors from the PCB.
r e t
Figure 3-940
a. Feeding Belt A
Loosen the screw a, and adjust the tensioner so that the flange distance is 5 ±1 mm.
b. Feeding Belt B
Adjust the tensioner so that the slack of the belt is 10 mm when F2 is pushed by a
tension gauge at 500 ±100 g.
c. Feeding Belt C
Adjust the tensioner so that the slack of the belt is 10 mm when F3 is pushed by a
tension gauge at 500 ±100 g.
5–
1m
m
a b
10
mm
F2
F3
10mm
Figure 3-941
4. Adjusting the Position of the Locking Solenoid (SL3)
Figure 3-942
3) Remove the guide plate e from the arm t by removing the E-ring r (front, ear; one
each).
t r e
r e
Figure 3-943
4) Loosen the two adjusting screws o to adjust the position of the releasing solenoid
(SL4) i so that the locking roll arm y and the pressure spring u come into contact
with each other at A when the solenoid turns on.
i o A
u
Figure 3-944
5. Adjusting the Position of the Releasing Solenoid
Figure 3-945
CHAPTER 4
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS ......4-1 III. SCHEDULED SERVICING ......................4-8

II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES ........4-1 A. Finisher-B1.........................................4-8
A. Finisher-B1.........................................4-1 B. Paper Folding Unit-A1 .....................4-20
B. Paper Folding Unit-A1 .......................4-7
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS

The finisher does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES

Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more because of
deterioration or damage over the period of warranty. Replace them as necessary.
A. Finisher-B1
Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q’ty Life (approx.) Remarks
1 Static eliminating brush FC2-4775 2 1,000,000 copies
(sort bin)
(delivery slot)
(non-sort delivery slot)
(copier delivery slot)
5 Stapler unit FG2-8372 500,000 staples 5,000 stapling
operations per
cartridge
Table 4-201
1. Arrangement of Static Eliminating Brushes
q q w w e
w w t
Figure 4-201
2. Removing the Stapler Unit

2) Move the front gripper to the right end.
3) Open the non-sort delivery assembly, and remove the staple cartridge.
4) Shift the lever (F12).
w q
Figure 4-202
6) Remove the connector cover e by removing the screw r. (To remove the connector
cover, lift its right as if to swing.)
e r
Figure 4-203
7) Disconnect the two connectors t.
Figure 4-204
8) Remove the tow screws y.
Figure 4-205
9) Remove the staple dish u by removing the screw i.

10) Remove the two screws u.
i u
Figure 4-206
11) Remove the stapler !0 by moving it to the center.

!0
Figure 4-207
Caution:
When placing the stapler unit on a desk or floor after removing it, be sure to exercise
care so that the waste staple outlet at the bottom of the unit will not be damaged.
Waste staple outlet
Figure 4-208
Ref. Parts name Parts No. Q’ty Life (approx.) Remarks

1 Static eliminating brush FA4-2371 1 1,000,000 copies Needs adjust-
(right) ment after instal-
2 Static eliminating brush FA1-4842 1 1,000,000 copies lation; see p. 5-19
(left) for details.
Table 4-202
Figure 4-209
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING

A. Finisher-B1
s: Clean l: Replace 5: Lubricate n: Adjust : Inspect

No. Parts Intervals* Remarks
1 Cut staple s
2 Stapler unit 5 Silicone oil
(CK-0551)
5 Silicone oil
(CK-0551)
5 Mineral oil
(CK-0451)
3 Stapler unit rail 500,000 Silicone oil
sheets (CK-0551)
4 Upper bin Wipe with alcohol
Lower bin the surface
coming into
contact with copy
paper. Do NOT
use water.
If soiled, stacking
faults may occur.
*Same as the minimum intervals for the host copier.
Table 4-301
1. Removing the Staple Chips
1) Slide out the staple chip case to the front, and dispose of the staple chips.
2) Remove the screw, and detach the jam staple case; then, dispose of the jam staples.
Staple chip Screw Jam staple case

case
Figure 4-301
2. Lubricating the Stapler Unit
a. Outline
Silicone oil (CK-0551)
20 mm (approx.)
Mineral oil (CK-0451)
Figure 4-302
b. Lubricating
Caution:
You must always perform the following steps (lubrication) whenever you have
executed the feed staple function.
Perform the following:

1. moving the upper/lower module bin
2. lubricating
3. executing the feed staple function
Moving the Upper/Lower Module

1) Touch the finisher’s display to bring up the screen. Press the ? key appearing in the
lower right corner of the screen.
Figure 4-303
2) Press [WHEN STAPLING FAILS].
Figure 4-304
3) Press [BIN SHIFT].

• The upper bin module will move up and stop at a specific position.
• The lower bin module will lower and stop at a specific position.
Figure 4-305
Lubricating
Figure 4-306
2) Holding the stapler unit grip, move the stapler unit toward the rear.
• Match t of the stapler unit and s of the finisher.
Figure 4-307
Figure 4-308
3) Release the locking lever of the stapler.
Figure 4-309
4) Apply lubricant where indicated.

20mm
Figure 4-310
5) Lock the locking lever of the stapler.
Figure 4-311

7) Open the finisher’s upper cover and upper feeding cover.
Figure 4-312
8) Remove the stapler cartridge from the stapler unit.
Figure 4-313
9) Apply lubrication to the clinching assembly and lubrication to the driver assembly of
the stapler unit.
MINERAL oil Silicone oil (CK-0551)

(CK-0451)
Figure 4-314
10) Close the finisher’s upper feeding cover and upper cover.
Executing the Feed Staple Function

Additional Function
1) Press the key on the copier’s control panel.
Reset
1 2
Guide
4 5
Additional Function
7 8
Interrupt
ID 0
Figure 4-315
2) Press [ADJUSTMENT/CLEANING].
Figure 4-316
3) Select [REPOSITIONIG STAPLES].
Figure 4-317
4) Press [START].
• Copy paper will automatically be drawn in from the copier’s tray, and stapling will
occur five times. Upon completion of the feed staple function, the display returns to
the Basic screen.
Figure 4-318
Reference:
The copier’s side tray top will be given priority when drawing in copy paper.
The sheets used for the feed staple function will not be counted.
5) Press the access key, and open the access door; then, remove the stapled paper.
Figure 4-319
Reference:
If the copier’s tray has only A3 copy paper, A3 paper will be stapled. If such is the
case, open the bin cover to remove the stapled paper.
3. Lubricating the Stapler Unit Rail
1) Open the finisher’s upper cover and the upper feeding cover.
Figure 4-320
2) Dry wipe both left and right stapler unit rails to remove dirt.
Figure 4-321
3) Apply specified grease along the stapler unit rail (right) in a thin layer.
• Recommended grease: PermaLube G2 (CK-0551)
• Do not apply grease to the stapler rail (left).
Figure 4-322
4) Move the stapler unit by hand so as to even out the grease.
Figure 4-323
5) Close the upper cover and the upper feeding cover.
s: Clean l: Replace 5: Lubricate n: Adjust : Inspect
No. Parts Intervals* Remarks

1 Folding roller (A, B, C) s Dry wipe with
2 No. 2 folding roller s moist cloth; then,
dry wipe.
*Same as the minimum intervals for the host copier.
Table 4-302
No. 2 folding roller
Folding roller B
Folding roller A
Folding roller C
Figure 4-324
1. Cleaning the Folding Roller (paper folding unit)
a. Cleaning the Folding Rollers A and B

1) Open the top cover of the paper folding unit, and slide out the folder unit.
Top cover
Folder unit
Figure 4-325
Lower left cover
Figure 4-326
3) Open the right door.
4) While rotating the folder motor clockwise, clean the folding rollers A and B.
Folding roller B
Right
guide
Folding roller A
Motor
Figure 4-327
Caution:
Keep in mind that rotating the folder motor counterclockwise can cause the folding
roller B to trap the sheet mounted under it, leading to deformation of the sheet.
b. Cleaning the Folding Roller C and No. 2 Folding Roller

1) Open the top cover of the paper folding unit, and slide out the folder unit.
Top cover
Folder unit
Figure 4-328
Lower left cover
Figure 4-329
3) Open the left guide.
4) While rotating the folder motor clockwise, clean the folding roller C and the No. 2
folding roller.
No. 2 folding rollers
Left guide
Folding roller C
Motor
Figure 4-330
Caution:
Keep in mind that rotating the folder motor counterclockwise can cause the folding
roller B to trap the sheet mounted under it, leading to the deformation of the sheet.
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
I. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS .......5-1 IV. SERVICE MODE..................................5-118

A. Mechanical System............................5-1 A. Outline ............................................5-118
B. Electrical System .............................5-25 B. Using Service Mode .......................5-118
II. TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................5-53 C. Checking the Operation .................5-121
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions ..........5-53 D. Adjustment .....................................5-129
III. ARRANGEMENT OF E. Job Mix Switch/Staple Position
ELECTRICAL PARTS ............................5-90 Adjustment .....................................5-147
A. Sensors ............................................5-90 V. SELF DIAGNOSIS ...............................5-154
B. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and A. Jam Alarm......................................5-155
Brakes ..............................................5-98 D. Errors .............................................5-162
C. Switches and Lamps......................5-100
D. Paper Folding Unit-A1 ...................5-102
E. Variable Resistors (VR),
Light-Emitting Diodes (LED),
and Check Pins by PCB ................5-104
I. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Mechanical System
1. Finisher
a. Adjusting the Upper Guide Bin Guide Bar

Turn the two screws q so that the guide bar and the reference bar are parallel.
q Reference bar
Guide bar
Figure 5-101
b. Adjusting the Lower Bin Guide Bar

Turn the two screws q so that the guide bar and the reference bar are parallel.
q Guide bar Reference bar
Figure 5-102
c. Adjusting the Stroke of the Non-Sort Path Solenoid (SL1)

Loosen the two adjusting screws e, and push in the non-sort path switching solenoid
(SL1) r into the direction of the arrow. Then, adjust the position of the non-sort path
switching solenoid (SL1) so that the end of the flapper t butts against the stopper rubber
y (approx. stroke: 4 ±0.5 mm).
Figure 5-103
d. Adjusting the Stroke of the Path Switching Solenoid (SL2)

Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and push the path switching solenoid (SL2) w
in the direction of the arrow. Then, adjust the position of the path switching solenoid (SL2)
so that the end of the flapper e butts against the stopper rubber r (approx. stroke: 4.5
±0.5 mm)
r w
Butted
4.5 +
_ 0.5mm
Figure 5-104
e. Adjusting the Stroke of the Stacker Access Solenoid (SL3)

Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and adjust the height of the solenoid unit w so
that the hinge butts against the lower of the groove in the locking lever.
Hinge
Lower of groove of locking lever

q
Figure 5-105
f. Adjusting the Stroke of the Upper Paddle Solenoid (SL5)

Loosen the two adjusting screws e, and adjust the position of the upper paddle
solenoid (SL5) so that the stroke of the upper paddle solenoid (SL5) r is 8 ±0.5 mm.
8+
_ 0.5mm
r
Figure 5-106
g. Adjusting the Stroke of the Lower Paddle Solenoid (SL6)

Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and butt the lower paddle arm w against section
A. Then, adjust the position of the lower paddle solenoid (SL6) so that there is no gap
between the lower paddle solenoid (SL6) e and the E-ring of the plunger.
w
A
q q
e e
Figure 5-107
h. Adjusting the Stroke of the De-Curling Solenoid (SL7)

1) Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and push the solenoid w in the direction of the
arrow. Then, adjust the position of the de-curling solenoid (SL7) so that the angle
formed by the lower face of the guide arm A e and the side of the arm cover is 90°
±2°. (Keep in mind that the plunger stroke is about 5.4 mm.)
2) Install the guide arm r by offsetting the gear for a single tooth in relation to the guide
arm A e.
q Solenoid
90” –2”
r
Figure 5-108
i. Adjusting the Stroke of the Bin Cover Releasing Solenoid (SL8)

Loosen the two adjusting screws q, and adjust the position of the solenoid w so that
the stroke of the plunger is 5 +0.5, -0 mm.
w
5 +0.5mm
-0mm
Figure 5-109
j. Adjusting the Tension of the Stacker Unit Up/Down Drive Belt

As shown, loosen the tension fixing screw q, and turn the tension adjusting nut w
so that the reading of the tension gauge is 1000 g when the middle of the drive belt is
pushed down by 10 to 15 mm (about 20 mm up from the lower end of the belt metal
fixing).
Belt metal
fixing Belt metal fixing
20mm
20mm
Figure 5-110
q q
Figure 5-111
k. Adjusting the Belt Tension of the Stack Processing Unit Shift Brake 2
1) Remove the common feeder motor.
2) Loose the tension fixing screw q, and turn the tension adjusting nut w so that the
reading of the tension gauge is 100 g when the center of the brake belt is push down
by the tension gauge about 10 to 15 mm.
10~15
mm
Figure 5-112
q
Figure 5-113
w
Figure 5-114
l. Adjusting the Tension of the Upper/Lower Bin Lead Cam Drive Belt
As shown, push the belt q at a point 200 ±5 mm from the finisher’s rear side plate
about 10 mm in the direction of the arrow with a tension gauge. Adjust the tensioner so
that the reading is 200 to 250 g.
20
0–
5m
m
mm
m–5
200m
m
m
10
Figure 5-115
m. Adjusting the Phase of the Lift Wall

As shown, turn the drive belt fixing screw e so that the left/right edge of the lift wall
matches the edge w of the stacker tray rail.
Align height. q w Align height.
w e q e
Figure 5-116
n. Adjusting the Angle of the Stacker Unit Leading Edge Stopper

1) In service mode, raise the stacker tray as far as it moves.
2) Check to make sure that the leading edge stopper is at home position.
3) As shown, loosen and turn the two adjusting screws e so that the upper face q of
the stacker tray and the leading edge stopper adjusting plate w are parallel.
e w q
Parallel
Figure 5-117
o. Adjusting the Leading Edge Stopper Home Position

1) In service mode, move the leading edge stopper to home position.
2) Loosen and turn the fixing screw q and turn the adjusting screw w so that the
distance between the leading edge stopper and the reference wall is 367 ±0.5 mm.
3) After adjustment, tighten the fixing screw q.
w q
m m
0.5
7±
36
Figure 5-118
p. Adjusting the Position of the Side Gripper and the Bin Surface
1) In service mode, move the stack processing unit to the bottom position.
2) In service mode, move the side gripper to clasping position.
3) Open the bin cover; then, remove the bin upper cover, bin right cover, and front left
cover.
4) Move the gripper to closing position.
5) Loosen and turn the two adjusting screws to adjust the height of the side gripper so
that the clasping face of the lower gripper and the bin surface is 0 to 2 mm.
• Be sure to check to make sure that the bin roll is at the level section of the lead cam.
0~2mm
Adjusting
screw
Bin
surface
Lower
gripper
Figure 5-119
q. Adjusting the Opening Angle of the Bin Open/Close Unit

1) In service mode, cause the bin rear end wall to assume OPEN position.
2) Loosen and turn the three adjusting screws q to adjust the position of the bin rear
end wall open/close unit so that the edge is 0 to 2 mm below the bin surface.
q
Bin surface
m
2m
0~
Bin rear
end wall
Figure 5-120
r. Skew Correction in the Vertical Path

Loosen the adjusting screw q, and move the adjusting plate w to the left and the
right to make adjustments.
Figure 5-121
s. Adjusting the Orientation of the Stacker Unit

1) Move the stack tray to the top position in service mode.
2) Slide out the stacker unit.
Figure 5-122
4) Adjust the angle at which the stack tray is installed so that the difference in distance
at front and rear betwee the top face of the stack tray the top end of the reference
wall is less thatn 1 mm.
B
A
Figure 5-123
2. Paper Folding Unit
a. Adjusting the Position of the Folding Stopper

If the folding position is not as specified after making checks, adjust the position of all
stoppers that are involved.
No. 2 stopper
For A3/294.4x431.8 mm (11"x17")

For B4
For B4 For A3/279.4x431.8 mm (11"x17")
No. 1 stopper
Figure 5-124
Study Figure 5-123 for changes in the position of folding and direction caused by
adjusting the stoppers. (The directions of the arrows in the figure above and those in the
figure below match.)
Folding by Folding by
No. 1 stopper No. 2 stopper
Feeding
direction
Copy paper
A B C D
Figure 5-125
• No. 1 Stopper
1) Loosen and turn the two adjusting screws w to adjust the position of the stopper.
w q
q w
Switching between A3 and 279.4x431.8 mm For B4

(11"x17")
Figure 5-126
• No. 2 Stopper
1) Loosen and adjust the two adjusting screws w to adjust the position of the stopper.
w q w
q w
D
Switching between A3 and 279.4x431.8 mm

(11"x17")
Figure 5-127
b. Adjusting the Inlet Guide

1) Loosen and turn the two adjusting screws q so that the height of the end of the inlet
guide w from the lower guide plate (not the rib upper) e is 4 +1, -0 mm.
2) Loosen and turn the adjusting screw y so that the height from the upper guide plate
to the inlet guide t is 4 +1, -0 mm when the inlet solenoid (SL5) r turns on.
t
+1mm
4 -0mm
+1mm
4 -0mm
w e q q
Figure 5-128
c. Adjusting the Pressure of the Folding Roller

1) Loosen the fixing nut q, and turn the adjusting screw e so that the length of the
pressure spring w is 17.5 +3 mm.
e w q
q w e
17.5–0.3mm 17.5–0.3mm
(front) (rear)
Figure 5-129
d. Adjusting the Position of the No. 1 Folding Path Guide Plate

1) Turn the two screws q each at the front and the rear so that they are tightened
halfway.
q
q
(front) (rear)
Figure 5-130
2) Turn the four adjusting screws used in step q so that the gap A between the upper
end of the lower left guide w and the folding roller A e and the gap B between the
lower end of the lower left guide and the right guide r (between rib tops) is 1.6 ±0.3
mm.
1.6–0.3mm
r
w
1.6–0.3mm
Figure 5-131
e. Adjusting the Position of the Right Guide Static Eliminating Brush

1) Loosen and turn the two adjusting screws q so that the protrusion of the static
eliminating brush w from the guide face (not the rib upper) of the right guide is 1 ±0.3
mm.
1–0.3
mm
Figure 5-132
f. Adjusting the No. 2 Folding Roller Pressure

1) Remove the two springs q.
Figure 5-133
2) Remove the spring w.
Figure 5-134
3) Remove the screw e, and remove the belt cover r.

i
Figure 5-135
4) Loosen the two adjusting screws t ( each at front and rear).

t
t
Figure 5-136
5) Butt the outlet guide plate, and check to make sure that the latch y (front, rear) and
the bearing u are engaged; then, fix it in place by turning the screws loosened in
step 4).
u
y
Figure 5-137
g. Adjusting the Position of the Coupling for the Horizontal Path

2) Slide out and then in the paper folding unit w two to three times until the position of
the coupling e used to drive the horizontal path is appropriate.
Screws
w
e
Figure 5-138
3) Push in the paper folding unit, and tighten the two screws loosened in step 1)
h. Adjusting the Tension of the Feeding Belt

• Feeding Belt A
Loosen and turn the screw a to adjust the tension so that any distance R1’ is 5 ±1
mm.
• Feeding Belt B
Loosen and turn the screw b so that the slack of the belt R2 is 10 mm when F2 is
pressed by a tension gauge with a force of 500 ±100 g.
• Feeding Belt C
Loosen and turn the screw c so that the slack of the belt R3 is 10 mm when F3 is
pressed by a tension gauge with a force of 500 ±100 g.
R1’=
5–
1m
A
m
a b
B
R2=
10
mm
F2
F3
R3=10mm
Figure 5-139
i. Adjusting the Position of the Locking Solenoid (SL3)

1) Loosen and turn the two adjusting screws r to adjust the position of the locking
solenoid (SL3) e so that the locking roll arm q and the pressure spring w come into
contact with section A when the solenoid is pushed in the direction of the arrow.
e r A
w
Figure 5-140
j. Adjusting the Position of the Releasing Solenoid (SL4)

1) Loosen and turn the two adjusting screws w to adjust the position of the releasing
solenoid (SL4) q so that A is 2 ±0.3mm when the solenoid is pushed in the direction
of the arrow.
q w
2–0.3mm
Figure 5-141
B. Electrical System
1. After Replacing Major Parts
Parts Work
• Finisher controller PCB q Adjusting the Guide Bar Swing Range
w Adjusting the paper side 1/2 sensor sensitivity
• Paper 1 sensor (LED4/PT4) q Adjusting the paper side 1/2 sensor sensitivity
• Paper 2 sensor (LED5/PT5)
• Upper guide bar motor (M6) q Adjusting the Guide Bar Swing Range
• Lower bin guide home position
sensor (PI34)
• Lower guide bar motor (M7)
• Upper bin guide bar home position
sensor (PI33)
2. Adjusting the Guide Bar Swing Range
Make the following adjustments whenever you have replaced any of the following
parts:
• Finisher controller PCB
• Upper bin guide bar home position sensor (PI33)
• Lower bin guide bar home position sensor (PI34)
• Upper bin guide bar
• Lower bin guide bar
Making Adjustments
a. Upper Bin Guide Bar
1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR copy paper free of curling.
• You will be using the copy paper for adjustment.
2) Open the bin cover, and remove all copies from the upper bins; then, insert the door
switch actuator.
4) Open the finisher’s upper cover; then, remove the two screws, and detach the upper
cover (front).
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
5) Shift bit 3 of the DIP switch SW2 and bit 1 of the DIP switch SW3 on the switch PCB
to ON; then, turn on the copier’s power switch. (LED1 and 3 on the switch PCB will
start to flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-144
6) Set the bits of the DIP switch SW1 and the DIP switch SW2 as shown.
• Take care. You must use different DIP switch settings for different paper sizes.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Any position Any position
Table 5-101
7) Place the copy paper you have prepared in the topmost bin of the upper bin module,
and press the push switch (PSW1) on the switch PCB.
• If the guide bar is not at home position, the guide bar will return to home position.
Switch PCB
PSW1
Copy paper Figure 5-145
8) Operate the push switch (PSW1) so that the guide bar is in contact with the edge of
the copy paper.
Reference:
The guide bar moves toward the copy paper about 7 mm in response to the first press
on the push switch; it then moves toward the copy paper by about 0.3 mm in response
to the second and subsequent presses.
Guide bar
Copy paper
Top view
Figure 5-146
• To move the guide bar away from the copy paper, set the bits of the DIP switches
SW1 and SW2 on the switch PCB as follows:
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 Any position 1 2 3 4 5 Any position
Table 5-102
9) While keeping the condition of step 8), shift bit 2 to ON and press the push switch
(PSW1).
• The guide bar returns to home position.
• If the adjustment has been correct, LED1 on the switch PCB keeps flashing at the
same speed.
• If the adjustment has been wrong, LED1 on the switch PCB changes its speed of
flashing temporarily (for about 3 sec.).
Switch PCB
LED1 SW1
bit 2
Figure 5-147
b. Lower Bin Guide Bar

1) Obtain a single sheet of LTR copy paper. (Make sure it is free of curling.)
switch actuator.
3) Turn off the copier.
cover (front).
Upper cover
Screws
Upper cover (front)
5) Shift bit 3 of the DIP switch SW2 and bit 1 of the DIP switch SW3 to ON on the switch
PCB; then, turn on the copier. (LED1 and LED3 on the switch PCB will start to flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-150
6) Sheet the bits on the DIP switch SW1 and DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as
shown.
• The settings differ depending on the size of the copy paper used for adjustment.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON
ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Table 5-103
7) Place copy paper in the topmost bin of the upper bin module, and press the push
switch SW1 on the switch PCB.
• If the guide bar is not at home position, it will return to home position.
Switch PCB
PSW1
Copy paper
Figure 5-151
8) Operate the push switch PSW1 so that the guide bar will come in contact with the
edge of the copy paper.
Reference:
The first press on the push switch will move the guide bar about 7 mm toward the copy
paper; the second and subsequent presses on the switch will move the bar about 0.3
mm toward the paper.
Guide bar
Copy paper
Top view
Figure 5-152
• To move the guide bar away from the copy paper, set the DIP switch SW1 and the
DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as shown.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 Any position
1 2 3 4 5
Any position
Table 5-104
9) While maintaining the condition of step 6), shift bit 2 of the DIP switch SW1 to ON;
then press the push switch PSW1.
• If the adjustment is successful, LED1 on the switch PCB flashes at the same
intervals.
• If the adjustment is not successful, LED1 on the switch PCB flashes at shorter
intervals temporarily (about 3 sec.).
Switch PCB
LED1 SW1
bit 2
Figure 5-153
3. Checking the Guide Bar Movement Range
The orientation of the guide bar can be checked using copy paper.
Steps
1) Obtain a single sheet of A4 or LTR copy paper.
• The copy paper will be used for making checks.
2) Open the bin cover, and remove all copy paper from the upper bin; then, insert the
door switch actuator.
Figure 5-154

cover (front).
Upper cover
Screws
Upper cover (front)
5) Shift bit 3 on the DIP switch SW2 and bit 1 of the DIP switch SW3 on the switch PCB
to ON; then, turn on the copier. (LED1 and LED 3 on the switch PCB will start to
flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-157
6) Set the bits on the DIP switch SW1 and the DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as
shown.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 Either side. 1 2 3 4 5 Either side.
Table 5-105
7) Place the copy paper in the topmost bin of the upper bin module, and press the push
switch PSW1 on the switch PCB.
• The guide bar will move to the point of alignment.
• If the guide bar is not at home position, press the push switch once again.
Switch PCB
PSW1
Figure 5-158
8) Check the distance (L) between the guide bar and the copy paper.
standard: L = 0 ±0.15 mm
Guide bar
L
Copy paper
(Top view)
Figure 5-159
9) If the distance L between the guide bar and the copy paper is as indicated, shift the
bits of the DIP switches (SW1, SW2, SW3) back to their initial positions; then,tuen off
and then on the copier. (Be sure to wait more than 1 sec before turning it on.)
10) If the distance (L) between the guide bar and the copy paper is not as specified,
execute “Adjusting the Guide Bar Movement Range.”

• The copy paper will be used to make checks.
2) Open the bin cover, and remove all copy paper from the lower bin; then, insert the
Figure 5-160

cover.
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
to ON, and turn on the copier. (LED1 and LED3 on the switch PCB will start to flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-163
6) Set the bits of the DIP switch SW1 and the DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as
shown.
• The settings differ depending on the size of copy paper used for adjustment.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 Either side.
1 2 3 4 5
Either side.
Table 5-106
• If the guide bar is not at home position, press the push switch PSW1 once again.
Switch PCB
PSW1
Figure 5-164
Guide bar
L
Copy paper
(Top view)
Figure 5-165
execute “Adjusting the Guide Bar Movement Range.
4. Adjusting the Paper Side 1/2 Sensor Sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper side 1/2 sensor whenever you have replaced any
of the following parts:
• Paper side 1 sensor (LED4/PT4)
Making Adjustments
2) Remove the seven screws from the rear left cover of the finisher, and remove the
cover.
Screws
Rear left cover
Screws
Figure 5-166
3) Shift all bits on the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PCB to OFF.
ON
SW1
1 2
figure 5-167
4) Turn on the copier.

• Check to make sure that the finisher’s initialization mechanism has ended.
5) Open the copier’s front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch
assembly.
6) Push the service switch over the cover with a clip or the like.
Figure 5-168
7) Press ] , 2 , and ] in sequence on the control panel.

8) Using the keypad on the copier’s control panel, enter the address of each sensor
(avoid alphabet characters), and check the display.
Sensor (notation) Address
Paper side 1 sensor (LED4/PT4) PI74
Table 5-107
9) Shift the bits of the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PCB as indicated in
Table 5-108.
Address Reading Settings on DIP switch (SW1)

ON
00D9 or
higher Shift bit 1 to OFF.
1 2
PI74
ON
Lower than
00D9 Shift bit 1 to ON.
1 2
ON
00D9 or
1 2
PI75
ON
Less than
1 2
Table 5-108
10) Turn off and then on the copier.

11) Execute ‘check sensor sensitivity’, and check the reading.
5. Checking the Sensor Sensitivity
a. Outline
You can check the sensitivity in relation to the sensors shown in Table 5-109, thereby
finding out whether each of the sensors is normal or faulty.
Sensor (notation) Remarks
Stapler edge sensor (PI68) Needs adjustment.
Upper bin inside paper sensor (LED1/PT1) Needs adjustment.
Lower bin inside paper sensor (LED2/PT2) Needs adjustment.
Edge feed sensor (LED3/PT3) Needs adjustment.
Paper side 1 sensor (LED4/PT4) Needs adjustment;

for instructions, see
Paper side 2 sensor (LED5/PT5) “Adjusting the Paper Size 1/2 Sensitivity.”
Stack sensor (LED6/PT6) Needs adjustment.
Upper bin outside paper sensor (LED7/PT7) Needs adjustment.
Lower bin outside sensor (LED8/PT8) Needs adjustment.
Table 5-109
If you have found a fault in the results of the check on the sensitivity of any sensor,
check if that sensor is mounted correctly; if it is, replace it.
For the paper side 1/2 sensor, be sure to perform the steps given under “Adjusting
the Paper Side 1/2 Sensor Sensitivity.”
b. Making Adjustments
• Check to make sure that the finisher’s initialization has ended.
assembly.
6) Press the service switch over the cover with a clip.
Figure 5-169

(avoiding alphabet characters), and check the display. If the reading is not correct,
replace the sensor. (The notation is in hexadecimal.)
Screen Display
P176: 00CF H
Indicates hexadecimal notation.
Reading
Address
Sensor (notation) Address Normal
Stapler edge sensor (PI68) PI78 00CF or higher
Upper bin inside paper sensor (LED1/PT1) PI80 00D3 or higher
Lower bin inside paper sensor (LED2/PT2) PI81 00D3 or higher
Edge feed sensor (LED3/PT3) PI76 00D3 or higher
Paper side 1 sensor (LED4/PT4) PI74 00D3 or higher
Stack sensor (LED6/PT6) PI77 00D3 or higher
Upper bin outside paper sensor (LED7/PT7) PI82 00CF or higher
Lower bin outside sensor (LED8/PT8) PI83 00CF or higher
Table 5-110
6. Checking the Photointerrupters
The finisher’s photointerrupers may be checked either by a conventional meter or by

the copier’s service mode.
a. Using a Meter
1) Set the meter to the 12VDC range.
2) Connect the - probe of the meter to TP19 (labeled SG ) of the finisher controller PCB.
3) Connect the + probe of the meter to the terminals (on the finisher controller PCB)
shown in the table.
4) Make checks as instructed.
b. Using the Copier’s Service Mode

assembly.
2) Press the service switch over the cover.
Figure 5-170 (service mode switch)
3) Press ] , 2 , and ] on the control panel.

4) Using the numeric keypad on the control panel, enter the address of the
photointerrupter in question; then, check the display.
Caution:
Exercise care. Turning off and on the sensors can start the machine’s motors.
Connector ]2] Voltage

Sensor Checks
]2] address indication (approx.)
PI 2 J11-A1 Move the When the detecting 1 0V
Non-sort path paper sensor detecting lever is not moved.
(NSPD) P128-3 lever while When the detecting 0 5V
in stand-by. lever is moved.
PI 3 JJ11-B19 Move the When the detecting 1 0V
Upper path paper sensor 1 detecting lever is not moved.
(UPD1) P128-4 lever while When the detecting 0 5V
PI 5 J11-B16 Move the When the detecting 1 0V
Upper path residual paper detecting lever is not moved.
sensor 1 P131-0 lever while When the detecting 1 5V
(URP1) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Upper path residual paper detecting lever is not moved.
(URP2) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Non-sort delivery assembly detecting lever is not moved.
paper sensor P134-7 lever while When the detecting 1 5V
(NSD) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Common path paper detecting lever is not moved.
(CPD1) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Common path paper detecting lever is not moved.
(CPD2) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Lower path paper sensor 1 detecting lever is not moved.
(LPD1) P123-7 lever while When the detecting 0 5V

Sensor Checks
Vertical path residual paper detecting lever is not moved.
(VRP1) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Lower path residual paper detecting lever is not moved.
(LRP1) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Upper bin upper limit detecting lever is not moved.
sensor P131-6 lever while When the detecting 1 5V
(UBTP) in stand-by. lever is moved.
Upper bin lower limit sensor detecting lever is not moved.
(UBBP) P127-5 lever while When the detecting 1 5V
PI 25 JJ9-B6 Move the When the detecting 0 0V
Lower bin upper limit detecting lever is not moved.
(LBTP) in stand-by. lever is moved.

Sensor Checks indication
]2] address (approx.)
PI 26 JJ19-A4 Move the When the detecting 0 0V
Lower bin lower limit sensor detecting lever is not moved.
(LBBP) P126-3 lever while When the detecting 1 5V
PI 27 J12-B6 Turn the When the upper bin 0 5V
Upper lead cam level upper bin lead is at level.
section sensor P127-3 cam while in When the upper bin 1 0V
(ULCL) stand-by. is not at level.
PI 28 JJ12-B10 Turn the When the upper bin 1 5V
Upper lead cam level upper bin lead is at level.
section No. 2 sensor P134-0 cam while in When the upper bin 0 0V
(ULCL2) stand-by. is not at level.
PI 29 J19-B9 Turn the lower When the lower bin 0 5V
Lower lead am level section bin lead cam is at level.
sensor P126-7 while in stand- When the lower bin 1 5V
(LLCL) by. is not at level.
PI 30 J19-A8 Turn the lower When the lower bin 1 0V
Lower lead cam level bin lead cam is at level.
section No. 2 sensor P134-1 while in stand- When the lower bin 0 5V
(LLCL2) by. is not at level.
PI 31 J12-A10 Turn the When the motor Alternates Alternates
Upper bin shift motor clock upper bin lead rotates. 0/1. 0/5.
sensor P126-4 cam while in 5V
(UBCLK) stand-by.
PI 32 J19-A1 Turn the lower When the motor Alternates Alternates
Lower bin shift motor clock bin lead cam rotates. 0/1. 0/5.
sensor P126-6 while in stand- 5V
(LBCLK) by.
PI 33 J12-B3 Move the At home position. 1 5V
Upper bin guide bar home upper bin guide
position sensor P127-4 cover while in Not at home 1 0V
(UGBHP) stand-by. position.
PI 34 J19-B6 Move the lower At home position. 0 5V
Lower bin guide bar home bin guide bar
position sensor P126-2 while in stand- Not at home 1 0V
(LGBHP) by. position.
Stacker unit UP position detecting lever is not moved.
(STUP) in stand-by. lever is moved.
PI 36 J25-A4 Remove the When the sensor 1 0V
Stacker unit home position sensor flag from flag is not removed.
sensor P137-6 the sensor while When the sensor 0 5V
(STHP) in stand-by. flag is removed.

Sensor Checks (approx.)
]2] address indication
PI 37 J25-B24 Block the When the sensor is 1 0V
Stacker unit DOWN sensor blocked.
position sensor P137-5 while in When the sensor is 0 5V
(STLP) stand-by. not blocked.
PI 38 J25-A1 Block the When the sensor is 1 5V
Stacker unit lower limit sensor blocked.
sensor P147-1 while in When the sensor is 0 0V
(STLL) stand-by. not blocked.
PI 39 J5-B9 Rotate the When the wall is at 1 5V
Lift wall UP position sensor wall motor by top.
(TWTP) P147-6 hand while in When the wall is 0 0V
stand-by. not at top.
PI 40 J5-A7 Rotate the At home position. 0 5V
Lift wall home position wall motor by
sensor P147-7 hand while in Not at home 1 0V
(TWHP) stand-by. position.
PI 41 J5-B4 Slide out the When the tray is 1 5V
Stacker SET sensor stack tray out.
(STS) P152-1 while in When the tray is 0 0V
stand-by. in.
Stacker tray upper limit sensor blocked.
(STTTP) stand-by. not blocked.
PI 43 J5-B13 Execute initial At home position. 1 5V
Stacker tray home position operation and
sensor P145-0 see if the state Not at home 0 0V
(STTHP) (0,1) changes. position.
Stacker tray paper sensor detecting lever is not moved.
(STTPD) P152-5 lever while When the detecting 1 5V
in stand-by. lever is not moved.
PI 45 J5-A2 Move the When the stacker Alternates Alternates
Stacker tray shift clock stacker tray is moved. 0/1. 0/5V.
sensor A ——— tray while
(STTCLKA) in stand-by.
PI 46 J5-A4 Move the At home position. 1 5V
Leading edge stopper end stopper
home position sensor P145-4 while in Not at home 0 0V
(LESHP) stand-by. position.
PI 47 J25-B15 Move the When the detecting Alternates Alternates
Stack unit shift motor clock detecting lever is moved. 0/1. 0/5V.
sensor P144-6 tray while When the detecting
(STCLK) in stand-by. lever is moved.

Sensor Checks indication (approx.)
]2] address
PI 48 J8-B16 Turn the knob At home position. 1 0V
Side gripper clasping home of the side
position sensor P144-1 gripper while Not at home 0 5V
(SGGHP) in stand-by. position.
Side gripper paper sensor detecting lever is not moved.
(SGPD) P145-7 lever while When the detecting 1 0V
PI 50 J8-A3 Move the side At home position. 1 5V
Side gripper left/right shift gripper
home position sensor P144-0 left/right while Not at home 0 5V
(SG(X)HP) in stand-by. position.
PI 51 J8-B9 Move the side When the sensor 1 0V
Side gripper motor error gripper detects the gripper.
sensor P147-3 left/right while When the sensor does 0 5V
(SGMF-D) in stand-by. not detect the gripper.
PI 52 J8-B6 Move the wall At OPEN. 1 0V
Bin rear wall OPEN in service
position sensor P145-2 mode while in When the detecting 0 5V
(BRPU) stand-by. lever is moved.
PI 53 J8-A13 Move the wall At CLOSE. 1 0V
Bin rear wall CLOSE in service
position sensor P145-3 mode while in Not at CLOSE. 0 5V
(BRPC) stand-by.
PI 54 J8-B8 Move the When the motor is Alternates Alternates
Rear end wall CLOSED front gripper rotating. 0/1. 0/5 V.
position sensor P140-0 left/right while
(FG(X)CLK) in stand-by.
PI 55 J8-B15 Move the At home position. 1 0V
Front gripper left/right shift front gripper
home positions sensor P144-2 left/right while Not at home 0 5V
FG(X)HP) in stand-by. position.
PI 56 J8-B4 Move the At left limit. 0 0V
left limit sensor P148-2 left/right while Not at left limit. 1 5V
(FG(X)LL) in stand-by.
PI 57 J8-A14 Move the At right limit. 0 0V
right limit sensor P148-1 left/right while Not at right limit. 1 5V
(FG(X)RL) in stand-by.
PI 58 J8-A15 Move the Within safety range. 0 0V
safety sensor P148-3 left/right while Not within safety 1 5V
(FG(X)S) in stand-by. range.

Sensor Checks
PI 59 J8-A11 Move the front While the motor is Alternates Alternates
Front gripper front/rear shift gripper rotating. 0/1. 0/5 V.
motor clock sensor P140-1 front/rear while 5V
(FG(Y)CLK) in stand-by.
PI 60 J8-A4 Move the front At home position. 1 0V
Front gripper front/rear shift gripper
home position sensor P144-3 front/rear while Not at home 0 5V
(FG(Y)HP) in stand-by. position.
PI 61 J8-B3 Move the front At front limit. 0 0V
front limit sensor P148-4 front/rear while Not at front limit. 1 5V
(FG(Y)FL) in stand-by.
PI 62 J8-A16 Move the front Within safety range. 0 0V
safety sensor P148-5 front/rear while Not within safety 1 5V
(FG(Y)S) in stand-by. range.
PI 63 J8-B10 Turn the knob At home position. 1 0V
Front gripper clasping of the front
home position sensor P144-4 gripper while Not at home 0 5V
(FGGHP) in stand-by. position.
Front right paper sensor detecting lever is not moved.
(FGPD) P145-6 lever while in When the detecting 1 5V
stand-by. lever is moved.
PI 65 J8-B7 Move the While the motor is Alternates Alternates
Stapler front/rear shift stapler unit rotating. 0/1. 0/5 V.
motor clock sensor P140-2 front/rear while
(STP(Y)CLK) in stand-by.
PI 66 J8-A5 Move the At home position. 1 0V
Stapler front/rear shift stapler unit
home position sensor P144-2 front/rear while Not at home 0 5V
(STP(Y)HP) in stand-by. position.
PI 67 J8-B2 Move the Within safety zone. 0 0V
Front gripper shift enable stapler unit
sensor P148-6 front/rear while Not within safety 1 5V
(STPSE) in stand-by. zone.
Stapler leading edge paper sensor blocked.
(STPPE) stand-by. not blocked.
PI 69 J8-A12 Operate the stack When the unit is Alternates Alternates
Stack processing unit shift processing unit in operating. 0/1. 0/5 V.
motor clock sensor P144-3 service mode
(SPCLK) while in stand-by.

Sensor Checks indication (approx.)
]2] address
Stack processing unit UP sensor blocked.
position sensor P147-4 while in When the sensor is 1 0V
(SPTP) stand-by. not blocked.
Stack processing unit upper sensor blocked.
limit sensor P147-0 while in When the sensor is 1 0V
(SPTP) stand-by. not blocked.
Stack processing unit lower sensor blocked.
limit sensor P145-5 while in When the sensor is 0 0V
(SPBP) stand-by. not blocked.
Stacker unit NEAR positon detecting lever is not moved.
(STA) in stand-by. lever is moved.
PI 74 J11-B4 Open/close When the cover is 1 0V
Upper cover sensor 1 the upper closed.
(UCO1) P129-2 cover while When the cover is 0 5V
in stand-by. opened.
Upper cover sensor 2 the upper closed.
(UCO2) P129-2 cover while When the cover is 0 5V
PI 76 J16-A10 Open/close When the cover is 1 0V
Bin cover sensor the bin closed.
(BCO) P129-1 cover while When the cover is 0 5V
PI 77 J11-A16 Open/close When the cover is 1 0V
Front door sensor the front closed.
(FCO) P129-0 cover while When the cover is 0 5V
PI 78 J16-A13 Install the When the screen is ——— 0V
Screen sensor screen installed.
(SC) ——— while in When the screen is ——— 5V
stand-by. not installed.
Stack processing unit sensor blocked.
DOWN position sensor P147-5 while in When the sensor is 0 5V
(SPLP) stand-by. not blocked.
Access cover sensor the access opened.
(TOCO) P152-3 cover while When the cover is 0 5V
in stand-by. closed.

Sensor Checks
PI 81 J5-B12 Move the When the stacker ——— Alternates
Stack tray shift clock stacker tray tray is moved. 0/5V.
sensor B ——— while in
(STTCLKB) stand-by.
PHOI 1 J8-A9 Block the When the sensor is 0 5V
Staple sensor sensor blocked.
(STPE) P152-4 while in When the sensor is 1 0V
stand-by. not blocked.
PHOI 2 J8-A10 Move the When the stapler is 1 0V
Stapler home position stapler at home position.
sensor P137-7 while in When the stapler is 0 5V
(STPHP) stand-by. not at home position.
II. TROUBLESHOOTING
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions
1 E501
Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action

1 Turn off and then on the copier’s YES The connector may
power switch. Is the problem have poor contact.
corrected? Check the connector.
Connector 2 Is the connection of the NO Connect the communi-
communication cable connecting the cation cable securely.
finisher and the copier normal?
Front cover, bin 3 Is the front cover, bin cover, and NO Close the front cover,
cover, upper upper cover closed securely? bin cover, and upper
cover cover securely.
Front door 4 Is each of the following sensors NO Mount the sensors
sensor (PI77), mounted properly, and is the properly, and correct
screen sensor harness normal? the harness.
(PI78), bin • Front door sensor (PI77)
cover sensor • Screen sensor (PI78)
(PI76), upper • Bin cover sensor (PI76)
cover sensor 1 • Upper cover sensor 1 (PI74)
(PI74), upper • Upper cover sensor 2 (PI75)
cover sensor 2
(PI75)
DC power 5 Is each output of the DC power YES Remove the cause of
supply PCB supply normal? the problem; then,
replace the DC power
supply PCB.
Finisher YES Replace the finisher con-
controller PCB troller PCB, and make
necessary adjustments.
(For details, see p.5-25)
2 E510

Circuit breaker 1 Has the circuit breaker (CB1) on the YES Remove the cause of
(CB1) DC power supply PCB operated? the activation; then,
press the button on the
circuit breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set the meter to the 50V range. Is NO Check to see if the volt-
the voltage between connectors age between connec-
J10-12 (+) and J10-11 (-) on the tors J2-1 (+) and J2-3
finisher controller PCB 24 V? (-) and between
connectors J2-2 (+)
and J2-3 (-) on the
finisher control PCB is
24 V.
If not 24 V, see “DC
power is absent.”
Common 3 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring to the
feeder motor Disconnect the connector J10 from feeder motor; if normal,
(M1) the finisher controller PCB. replace the common
Is there electrical continuity between feeder motor (M1).
J10-14 and J10-11 on the harness
side?
Finisher 4 Replace the finisher controller PCB. YES Replace the finisher con-
controller PCB Is the problem corrected? troller PCB, and make
necessary adjustments.
For details, see p.5-25
3 E518

(CB1) DC power supply PCB operated? the activation, and
circuit breaker.
the voltage between connectors age between connec-
J108-1 (+) and J108-2 (-) on the tors J2-1 (+) and J2-3
folder driver PCB 24 V? (-) and between con-
nectors J2-2 (+) and
J2-3 on the finisher
controller PCB is 24 V.
If not 24 V, see “DC
power is absent.”
Folder motor 3 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
(FM1) Disconnect the connector J108 from the folder motor; if
the folder driver PCB. normal, replace the
Is there electrical continuity between folder motor (FM1).
J108-1 and J10-2 and between
side?
Folder driver 4 Replace the folder driver PCB. Is YES End.
PCB the problem corrected?
Finisher NO Replace the finisher
controller PCB controller PCB, and
make necessary
adjustments. (For
details, see p.5-25.)
4 E525

Cable 1 Are the cables on the light-emitting NO Connect them properly.
side (LED1) and the light-receiving
side (PT1) of the bin paper sensor
connected to the finisher controller
PCB properly? (J9-A7, B1/J12-A6,
B8)
Light-emitting 2 Are the light-emitting side (LED1) NO Connect them properly.
side (LED1) and the light-receiving side (PT1) of
and light- the bin paper sensor mounted
receiving side properly?
(PT1) of bin
paper sensor
Light-emitting 3 Replace the light-emitting side YES End.
side (LED1) (LED1) and light-receiving side
and light- (PT1) of the bin paper sensor, and
receiving side adjust the sensitivity of the bin paper
(PT1) of bin sensor. Is the problem corrected?
paper sensor
make necessary
adjustments. (For
5 E526

Cable 1 Are the cables of the light-emitting NO Connect them properly.
side (PT2) of the bin paper sensor
connected to the finisher controller
PCB properly? (J9-B2, B3/J19-A7,
B4)
and light- the bin paper sensor connected
(PT2) of bin
paper sensor
side (LED2) (LED2) and the light-receiving side
and light- (PT2) of the bin paper sensor, and
emitting side adjust the sensitivity of the bin paper
(PT2) of bin sensor. Is the problem corrected?
paper sensor
make necessary
adjustments. (For
6 E527

Cable 1 Is the cable between the stack NO Connect it properly.
processing unit driver PCB and the
finisher controller PCB connected
properly?
side (PT4) of the paper 1 sensor
connected to the stack processing
unit driver properly? (J106, J107)
side (LED4) and the light-receiving side of the If you have replaced
and light- paper 1 sensor (LED4) connected the light-emitting side
receiving side properly? (LED4) or the light-
(PT4) of paper receiving side (PT4),
1 sensor be sure to adjust the
sensitivity of the paper
1 sensor. (For instruc-
tions, see p.5-38.)
and light- (PT4) of the paper 1 sensor, and
receiving side adjust the sensitivity of the paper 1
(PT4) of paper sensor. Is the problem corrected?
1 sensor (For steps, see p.5-40.)
controller controller PCB, and
make necessary
adjustments. (For
7 E528

Cable 1 Is the cable between the stack pro- NO Connect it properly.
cessing unit driver PCB and the fin-
isher controller connected properly?
Cable 2 Are the cables on the light-emitting NO Connect them properly.
side (PT5) of the paper 2 sensor
unit driver PCB properly? (J106,
J107)
side (LED5) and the light-receiving side (PT5) of If you have replaced
and light- the paper 2 sensor connected prop- the light-emitting side
receiving side erly? (LED5) or the light-
of paper 2 receiving side (PT5) of
sensor the paper 2 sensor, be
sure to adjust the sen-
sitivity of the paper 2
sensor. (For instruc-
tions, see p.5-38.)
and light- (PT5) of the paper 2 sensor, and
receiving side adjust the sensitivity of the paper 2
(PT5) of paper sensor. Is the problem corrected?
2 sensor
make necessary
adjustments. (For
8 E529

side (PT6) of the stack sensor con-
nected to the finisher controller
PCB? (J5-19, -20, -21, -22)
Light-emitting 2 Are the light-emitting side (LED6) NO Mount them properly.
and light- the stack sensor mounted properly?
receiving side
(PT6) of stack
sensor
and light- (PT6) of the stack sensor. Is the
receiving side problem corrected?
(PT6) of stack
sensor
make necessary
adjustments. (For
9 E530

circuit breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set the meter to the 50V range. Is NO See “DC power is
the voltage between the following absent.”
connectors on the finisher controller
PCB 24 V?
• J12-A1 (+) and J12-A5 (-)
• J12-B13 (+) and J12-A5 9 (-)
Upper bin 3 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
guide bar Disconnect the connector J12 from the upper bin guide bar
motor (M6) the finisher controller PCB. motor; if normal,
Is there electrical continuity between replace the upper bin
J12-A2 and J12-B12 and between guide bar motor (M6).
J12-A3 and J12-B11?
Finisher 4 Replace the finisher controller PCB. YES Replace the finisher
controller PCB Is the problem corrected? controller PCB, and
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
10 E531

circuit breaker.
Staple jam 2 Is there a staple jam in the stapler? YES Remove all staple jams
from inside the stapler.
24 V (absent) 3 Set the tester to the 50V range. Is NO Check to see if the volt-
the voltage between connectors age between J6-1 (+)
J103-1 (+) and J103-3 (-) and and J6-3 (-) and
between connectors J103-2 (+) and between J6-2 (+) and
J103-4 (-) on the stack processing J6-4 (-) on the finisher
unit driver PCB 24 V? controller PCB is 24 V.
If it is not 24 V, see
“DC power is absent.”
Stapler unit 4 Replace the stapler unit. Is the prob- YES End.
lem corrected?
Stack 5 Replace the stack processing unit YES End.
processing unit driver PCB. Is the problem
driver PCB corrected?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
11 E532

Circuit breaker 1 Has the circuit breaker on the DC YES Remove the cause of
(CB1) power supply PCB operated? the activation, and
circuit breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set the tester to the 50V range. Is NO Check to see if the volt-
the voltage between the following age between connec-
connectors on the stack processing tors J6-1(+) and J6-3
unit driver PCB 24 V? (-) and between con-
• J101-7 (+) and J101-5 (-) nectors J6-2 (+) and
• J101-8 (+) and J101-5 (-) J6-4 (-) on the finisher
control PCB is 24 V.
Stapler 3 Disconnect the connector J101 from NO Check the harness up
front/rear shift the stack processing unit driver to the stapler front/rear
motor (M13) PCB. Is there electrical continuity shift motor; if normal,
between the following connectors on replace the stapler
the harness side? front/rear shift motor
• J101-9 and J101-10 (M13).
• J101-11 and J101-12
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
12 E534

circuit breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set the meter to the 50V range. Is NO Check to see if
the voltage between the following between connectors
connectors on the stack processing J6-1 (+) and J6-3 (-)
unit driver PCB 24 V? and between connec-
• J101-7 (+) and J101-5 (-) tors J6-2 (+) and J6-4
• J101-8 (+) and J101-5 (-) (-) on the finisher con-
troller PCB is 24 V.
Bin rear end 3 Replace the bin rear end OPEN YES End.
wall OPEN position sensor (PI52) or the bin
position sensor rear end wall CLOSE position sen-
(PI52), bin rear sor (PI53). Is the problem corrected?
end CLOSE
position sensor
(PI53)
Bin open/close 4 Disconnect the connector J101 from NO Check the harness up
motor (M17) the stack processing unit. Is there to the bin rear end wall
electrical continuity between the open/close motor; if
following connectors? normal, replace the bin
• J101-1 and J101-2 rear end wall
open/close motor
(M17).
Stack 5 Replace the stack unit driver PCB. YES End.
processing unit Is the problem corrected?
driver PCB
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
13 E536

Cable 1 Is the cable of the stapler leading NO Connect it properly.
edge sensor (PI68) connected to the
stack processing unit driver PCB
properly? (J111)
Cable 2 Is the cable between the finisher NO Connect it properly.
controller PCB and the stack pro-
cessing unit driver PCB connected
properly?
J7, J8 on the finisher controller PCB
J104, J105 on the stack processing
unit driver PCB
Stapler leading 3 Is the stapler leading edge sensor NO Mount it properly.
edge sensor (PI68) mounted properly?
(PI68)
Stapler leading 4 Replace the stapler leading edge YES End.
edge sensor sensor (PI68), and adjust the sensi-
(PI68) tivity of the stapler leading edge
sensor. Is the problem corrected?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
14 E537

circuit breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set the meter to the 50V range. Is NO See “DC power supply
the voltage between the following is absent.”
PCB 24 V?
• J205- (+) and GND (-)
• J20-6 (+) and GND (-)
Lower bin 3 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
guide bar Disconnect the connector J20 from the lower bin guide bar
motor (M7) the finisher controller PCB. motor; if normal,
Is there electrical continuity between replace the guide bar
J20-7 and J20-8 and between J20-9 motor (M7).
and J20-10 on the harness side?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
15 E540

circuit breaker.
connectors 24 V?
• J20-5 (+) and GND (-)
• J20-6 (+) and GND (-)
Upper bin shift 3 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
motor (M4) Disconnect the connector J13 from the upper bin shift
the finisher controller PCB. motor; if normal,
Is there electrical continuity between replace the upper bin
connectors J13-1 and J13-2 on the shift motor (M4).
harness side?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
16 E541

Upper bin shift 1 Is the upper bin shift motor clock NO Mount it properly.
motor clock sensor mounted properly?
sensor (PI31)
Cable 2 Is the cable of the upper bin shift NO Connect it properly.
motor clock sensor connected to the
finisher controller PCB properly?
(connectors J12-A11, -A10, -B4)
Upper bin shift 3 Replace the upper bin shift motor YES Replace the upper bin
motor clock clock sensor. Is the problem correct- shift moor clock sensor.
sensor (PI31) ed?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
17 E542

(CB1) DC power supply PCB operated? the circuit breaker
(CB1), and press the
button on the circuit
breaker.
PCB 24 V?
• J20-5 (+) and GND (-)
• J20-6 (+) and GND (-)
Lower bin shift 3 Set the tester to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
motor (M5) Disconnect the connector J21 from the lower bin shift
the finisher controller PCB. motor; if normal,
Is there electrical continuity between replace the lower bin
J21-1 and J21-2 on the harness shift motor (M5).
side?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
details, see p. 5-25.)
End.
18 E543

Lower bin shift 1 Is the lower bin shift motor clock NO Mount it properly.
motor clock sensor mounted properly?
sensor (PI32)
Cable 2 Is the cable of the lower bin shift NO Connect it properly.
motor clock sensor connected to the
(connectors J19-A2, -A1, -B10)
Lower bin shift 3 Replace the lower bin shift motor YES Replace the lower bin
motor clock clock sensor. Is the problem correct- shift moor clock sensor.
sensor (PI32) ed?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
19 E560

circuit breaker.
connectors on the stack processing
unit driver PCB 24 V?
Upper path 3 Replace the upper path feeder YES End.
feeder motor motor (M2). Is the problem
(M2) corrected?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
20 E561

circuit breaker.
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Lower path 3 Replace the lower path feeding YES End.
feeder motor motor (M3). Is the problem
(M3) corrected?
Finisher NO Replace the finisher,
controller PCB and make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
21 E564

side (PT7) of the upper bin outside
paper sensor connected to the
(J12-A12, B2/J9-A5, B5)
and light- the upper bin outside mounted prop-
receiving side erly?
(PT7) of upper
bin outside
paper sensor
and light- (PT7) of the upper bin outside paper
receiving side sensor, and adjust the sensitivity of
(PT7) of upper the upper bin outside sensor. Is the
bin outside problem corrected?
paper sensor
make necessary
adjustments. (For
22 E565

side (PT8) of the lower bin outside
paper sensor (LE8) connected to
the finisher controller PCB properly?
(J12-A12, B2/J9-A5, B5)
and light- the lower bin outside paper sensor
receiving side mounted properly?
(PT8) of lower
bin outside
paper sensor
and light- (PT8) of the lower bin outside paper
receiving side sensor, and adjust the sensitivity of
(PT8) of lower the lower bin outside sensor. Is the
bin outside problem corrected?
paper sensor
make necessary
adjustments. (For
23 E570

press the button of the
circuit breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set the meter to the 50V range. Is NO Check to make sure
the voltage between the following that the voltage
connectors 24 V? between J6-1 (+) and
• J103-1 (+) and J103-3 (-) J6-3 (-) and between
• J103-2 (+) and J103-4 (-) J6-2 (+) and J6-4 (-) on
the finisher controller
PCB is 24 V.
If the voltage is not 24
V, see “DC power is
absent.”
Side gripper 3 Replace the side gripper clasping YES End.
clasping home home position sensor (PI48). Is the
position sensor problem corrected?
(PI48)
Side gripper 4 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
grip motor (M9) Disconnect the connector J101 from the side gripper motor;
the stack processing unit driver if normal, replace the
PCB. side gripper grip motor
Is there electrical continuity between (M9).
side?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
24 E571

circuit breaker.
the voltage between the following age between connec-
connectors on the stack processing tors J6-1 (+) and J6-3
unit driver PCB 24 V? (-) and between con-
• J103-1 (+) and J103-3 (-) nectors J62 (+) and J6-
• J103-2 (+) and J103-4 (-) 4 (-) on the finisher
controller PCB is 24 V.
If the voltage is not 24
V, see “DC power is
absent.”
Front gripper 3 Replace the front gripper clasping YES End.
clasping home home position sensor (PI63). Is the
position sensor problem corrected?
(PI63)
Front gripper 4 Set the tester to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
grip motor Disconnect the connector J122 from the front gripper grip
(M12) the relay PCB 2. motor; if normal,
Is there electrical continuity between replace the front grip-
J122-1 and J122-2 on the harness per grip motor (M12).
side?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
25 E572

(CB1) DC controller PCB activated? the activation, and
circuit breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set meter to the 50V range. Is the NO See “DC power is
voltage between the following con- absent.”
nectors on the stack processing unit
driver PCB 24 V?
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Side gripper 3 Replace the side gripper left/right YES End.
left/right shift shift motor sensor (PI51). Is the
motor sensor problem corrected?
(PI51)
Side gripper 4 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
left/right shift Disconnect the connector J101 from the side gripper
motor (M8) the stack processing driver PCB. left/right shift motor; if
Is there electrical continuity between normal, replace the
J101-15 and J101-16 and between side gripper left/right
J101-17 and J101-18? shift motor (M8).
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
26 E573

(CB1) DC power supply PCB operated? activation, and press
the button on the circuit
breaker.
24 V (absent) 2 Set the mete to the 50V range. Is NO See “DC power is
unit driver 24 V?
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Front gripper 3 Replace the front gripper left/right YES End.
left/right shift shift motor error sensor (PI54). Is
motor error the problem corrected?
sensor (PI54)
Front gripper 4 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
left/right shift Disconnect the connector J110 from the front gripper
motor (M10) the stack processing unit driver left/right shift motor; if
PCB. normal, replace the
Is there electrical continuity between front gripper left/right
connectors J110-3 and J110-4 and shift motor (M10).
between connectors J110-5 and
J110-6?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
27 E574

(CB1) DC power supply PCB operated? activation, and press
the button on the circuit
breaker.
connectors 24 V?
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Front gripper 3 Replace the front gripper front/rear YES End.
front/rear shift shift motor clock sensor (PI54). Is
motor clock the problem corrected?
sensor (PI54)
Front gripper 4 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
front/rear shift Disconnect the connector J120 from the front gripper
motor (M11) the relay PCB 2. front/rear shift motor; if
Is there electrical continuity between normal, replace the
J120-25 and J120-26 on the front gripper front/rear
harness side? shift motor (M11).
processing unit driver PCB. Is the problem correct?
driver PCB
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
28 E575

circuit breaker.
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Stack 3 Set the tester range to ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
processing unit Disconnect the connector (J110) the stack processing
shift brake from the relay PCB 2. unit; if normal, replace
(BK2) Is there electrical continuity between the stack processing
connectors J110-7 and J110-8 on unit shift brake (BK2).
the harness?
4 Replace the stack processing unit YES End.
Stack clock sensor (PI69). Is the problem
processing unit corrected?
clock sensor 5 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
(PI69) Disconnect the connector J109 from the stack processing
Stack the stack processing unit driver unit shift motor; if
processing unit PCB. normal, replace the
shift motor Is there electrical continuity between stack processing unit
(M14) J109-1 and J109-2? shift motor (M14).
6 Replace the stack processing unit YES End.
driver PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
Stack NO Replace the finisher
processing unit controller PCB, and
driver PCB make necessary
Finisher adjustments. (For
controller PCB details, see p.5-25.)
End.
29 E576

Cable 1 Are cables of the light-emitting side NO Connect them properly.
(LED3) and the light-receiving side
(PT3) of the edge feeding sensor
unit driver PCB properly? (J106-A8,
B18/J106-A7, B19)
and light- the edge feeding sensor mounted
(PT3) of edge
feeding sensor
and light- (PT3) of the edge feeding sensor,
receiving side and adjust the sensitivity. Is the
(PT3) of edge problem corrected?
feeding sensor
make necessary
adjustments. (For
30 E580

circuit breaker.
PCB 24 V?
• J20-5 (+) and GND (-)
• J20-6 (+) and GND (-)
Stacker tray 3 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
motor (M16) Disconnect the connector J4 from the stacker tray motor;
the finisher controller PCB. if normal, replace the
Is there electrical continuity between stacker tray motor
J4-3 and J4-4 on the harness side? (M16).
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
31 E581

(CB1) DC power supply operated? the activation, and
circuit breaker.
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Stacker unit 3 Set the tester to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
shift brake Disconnect the connector J23 from the stacker unit shift
(BK1) the finisher controller PCB. brake; if normal,
Is there electrical continuity between replace the stacker unit
connectors J23-7 and J23-8 on the shift brake (BK1).
harness side?
Stacker unit 4 Replace the stacker unit shift motor YES End.
shift motor clock sensor (PI47). Is the problem
clock sensor corrected?
(PI47)
Stacker unit 5 Set the tester to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
shift motor Disconnect the connector J22 from the stacker unit shift
(M15) the finisher controller PCB. motor; if normal,
Is there electrical continuity between replace the stacker unit
connectors J22-1 and J22-2 on the shift motor (M15).
harness side?
processing unit diver PCB. Is the problem
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
32 E582

circuit breaker.
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Leading edge 3 Replace the leading edge home YES End.
stopper home position sensor. Is the problem
position sensor corrected?
(PI46)
Leading edge 4 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
stopper motor Disconnect the connector J4 from the leading edge stop-
(M18) the finisher controller PCB. per; if normal, replace
Is there electrical continuity between the leading edge stop-
connectors J4-7 and J4-8 and per motor (M18).
between connectors J4-NA and J4-
10?
Stack 5 Replace the stacker unit driver PCB. YES End.
processing unit Is the problem corrected?
driver PCB
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
33 E583

circuit breaker.
connectors on the DC stack pro-
cessing unit driver PCB 24 V?
• J23-14 (+) and J23-13 (-)
Lift wall home 3 Replace the lift wall home position YES End.
position sensor sensor (PI40). Is the problem cor-
(PI40) rected?
Lift wall UP 4 Replace the lift wall UP position YES End.
position sensor sensor (PI39). Is the problem cor-
(PI39) rected?
Lift wall motor 5 Set the meter to the ×1Ω range. NO Check the wiring up to
(M19) Disconnect the connector J4 from the lift wall motor; if
the finisher controller PCB. normal, replace the lift
Is there electrical continuity between wall motor (M19).
connectors J4-11 and J4-12 on the
harness side?
make necessary
adjustments. (For
34 E713

1 Turn off and then on the copier’s YES The connector may
power switch. Is the problem correct- have poor contact.
ed? Check the connector.
Front cover, bin 2 Is the front cover, bin cover, and NO Close the front cover,
cover, upper upper cover closed securely? bin cover, and upper
cover cover securely.
Front cover 3 Is each of the following sensors NO Mount the sensors
sensor (PI77), mounted properly and is the har- properly, and correct
screen sensor ness normal? the harness.
(PI78), bin • Front cover sensor (PI77)
cover sensor • Screen sensor (PI78)
(PI76), upper • Bin cover sensor (PI78)
cover sensor 1 • Bin cover sensor (PI76)
(PI74), upper • Upper cover sensor 1 (PI74)
cover sensor 2 • Upper cover sensor 2 (PI75)
(PI75)
Fuse (F1) 4 Is the output of the DC power YES Remove the cause of
supply PCB normal? the problem; then,
replace the DC power
supply PCB.
Emergency 5 Is the emergency stop button YES Remove any jam from
stop button pressed? the copier and the
finisher, and reset the
emergency stop button.
make necessary
adjustments. (For
End.
35 AC power is absent.

Power switch 1 Is the copier’s power switch turned NO Turn on the copier’s
(copier) on? power switch.
Auto shut-off 2 Has the copier’s auto shut-off func- YES Turn off and then on
(copier) tion operated? the copier’s power
switch.
Power plug 3 Is the power plug connected to the NO Connect the power
power outlet? plug to the power out-
let.
Cable (finisher) 4 Is the finisher’s cable connected to NO Connect the finisher’s
the copier? cable to the copier.
Covers 5 Are the front cover, upper cover, and NO Close all covers
bin cover closed securely? securely.
Main power 6 Is the rated voltage present at the NO The problem is not of
supply power outlet? the finisher. Advise the
100V model: 85 to 133 VAC user.
200V model: 187 to 276 VAC
Circuit breaker 7 Check the circuit breaker (CB1) for NO Disconnect the finish-
(CB1) electrical continuity across both its er’s power plug, and
terminals. Is it 0 ? press the button on the
circuit breaker; then,
check for electrical con-
tinuity once again. If
not 0Ω, replace the cir-
cuit breaker (CB1).
Power cord, YES Check the electrical
noise filter cord and the noise
(NF1) filter; if there is no elec-
trical continuity, replace
them.
Finisher 8 Is the connector terminals on the NO If LED1 on the finisher
controller PCB DC power supply supplied with AC controller PCB is off,
power? check the finisher cable
• between J1-1 and J1-2 for connection, and
• between J1-3 and J1-4 replace the finisher
controller PCB.
Thereafter, perform the
work for the needed
adjustments. (For
AC line YES Check the wiring from
the finisher controller
PCB to the DC power
supply PCB; correct
any faults.
36 DC power is absent.

AC power 1 Are the following connector NO See “AC power is
supply terminals on the DC power supply absent.”
PCB supplied with AC power?
• J1-1 and J1-2
• J1-3 and J1-4
Wiring, DC Turn off the copier’s power switch, YES Turn off the copier’s
load and disconnect the following power switch, connect
connectors from the DC power one connector at a
supply PCB. time, and turn on the
• J2 power switch. Repeat
• J3 this work for all the
Set the meter to the 30VDC range, connectors to find out
connect the finisher’s power plug, which activates the pro-
turn on the copier’s power plug, and tection circuit. Then,
measure the voltage between the check the wiring and
terminals shown in Table NA. Are loads related to that
the voltages as indicated? connector.
DC power Replace the DC power supply PCB. YES Repalce the DC power
supply PCB Is the problem corrected? supply PCB.
Connector J2 J3
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
Output GND + 5V + 5V GND GND GND + 12V Remote + 24V + 24V GND GND
Tolerance – + 3.5 + 3.5 – – – ± 5.0 – ± 5.0 ± 5.0 – –
(%) – 1.5 – 1.5
MEMO
III. ARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
A. Sensors
PI 5
PI 4
PI 7
PI 6
PI 8
PI 15 PI 3
PI 2
PI 12
PI 14 PI 10
PI 9 PI 16
PI 21
PI 17
PI 20
PI 19 PI 18
PI 13
Figure 5-301
Symbol Name Notation Description

Photointer- PI 2 Non-sort path paper detection
rupter PI 3 Upper path paper detection 1
PI 4 Upper path paper detection 2
PI 5 Upper path paper detection 3
PI 6 Upper path residual paper detection 1
PI 7 Upper path residual paper detection 2
PI 8 Non-sort path delivery assembly paper detection
PI 9 Common path paper detection 1
PI 10 Common path paper detection 2
PI 12 Lower path paper detection 1
PI 16 Vertical path residual paper detection 1
PI 19 Lower path residual paper detection 1
Table 5-301
PI 27
PI 28
PI 23
PI 31
PI 33
PI 24
PI 25 PI 35
PI 32
PI 29
PI 30
PI 26 PI 36
PI 47
PI 34
PI 37
PI 38
Figure 5-302

Photointer- PI 23 Upper bin upper limit detection
rupter PI 24 Upper bin lower limit detection
PI 25 Lower bin upper limit detection
PI 26 Lower bin lower limit detection
PI 27 Upper lead cam level section detection
PI 28 Upper lead cam No. 2 level section detection
PI 29 Lower lead cam level section detection
PI 30 Lower lead cam No. 2 level section detection
PI 31 Upper bin shift clock detection
PI 32 Lower bin shift clock detection
PI 33 Upper bin guide bar home position detection
PI 34 Lower bin guide bar home position detection
PI 35 Stacker unit UP position detection
PI 36 Stacker unit home position detection
PI 37 Stacker DOWN position detection
PI 38 Stacker lower limit detection
PI 47 Stacker unit shift clock detection
Table 5-302
PI 68
PI 70
PI 53 PI 65
PI 71
PI 49 PI 52
PI 56 PI 72
PI 55
PI 51 PI 54
PI 48 PI 58
PI 67 PI 61
PI 50 PI 66 PI 64 PI 73 PI 57
PI 59
PI 60
PI 63 PI 62
PI 69
PI 46
PI 39
PI 43 PI 41
PI 44
PI 40
PI 42
PI 45
Figure 5-303

Photointer- PI 39 Lift wall UP position detection
rupter PI 40 Lift wall DOWN position detection
PI 41 Stacker SET detection
PI 42 Stacker tray upper limit detection
PI 43 Stacker tray lower limit detection
PI 44 Stacker tray paper detection
PI 45 Stacker tray shift clock detection A
PI 46 Leading edge stopper home position detection
PI 48 Side gripper clasping home position detection
PI 49 Side gripper paper detection
PI 50 Side gripper left/right shift home position detection
PI 51 Side gripper motor error detection
PI 52 Bin rear end wall OPEN position detection
PI 53 Bin rear end wall CLOSE position detection
PI 54 Front gripper left/right shift clock detection
PI 55 Front gripper left/right shift home position detection
PI 56 Front gripper left/right shift left limit detection
PI 57 Front gripper left/right shift right limit detection
PI 58 Front gripper left/right shift safety detection
PI 59 Front gripper front/rear shift clock detection
PI 60 Front gripper front/rear shift home position detection
PI 61 Front gripper front/rear shift front limit detection
PI 62 Front gripper front/rear shift safety detection
PI 63 Front gripper clasping home position detection
PI 64 Front gripper paper detection
PI 65 Stapler front/rear shift clock detection
PI 66 Stapler front/rear shift home position detection
PI 67 Front gripper shift enable detection
PI 68 Stapler leading edge detection
PI 69 Stack processing unit shift clock detection
PI 70 Stack processing unit home position detection
PI 71 Stack processing unit home position detection
PI 72 Stack processing unit lower limit detection
PI 73 Stacker unit NEAR detection
Table 5-303
LED 1 LED 7
PI 76
PT 7
PT 1 PT 3
PI 79
PI 77
LED 8 LED 3 PI 74
LED 2
PHOT 1 LED 5
PI 75
PHOT 2 LED 4
PT 5
PT 6
PT 8 PT 4
PI 80 LED 6
PI 81
PT 2
PI 78
Figure 5-304

Photointer- PI 74 Upper cover detection 1
rupter PI 75 Upper cover detection 2
PI 76 Bin cover detection 1
PI 77 Front cover detection
PI 78 Screen detection
PI 79 Stack processing unit DOWN position detection
PI 80 Access cover open/close detection
PI 81 Stacker tray shift clock detection B
PHOT1 Stapler home position sensor

PHOT2 Staple sensor
LED1/ Upper bin paper detection

PT1
LED2/ Lower bin paper detection
PT2
LED3/ Edge feeding detection
PT3
LED4/ Paper surface 1 detection
PT4
LED5/ Paper surface 2 detection
PT5
LED6/ Stack detection
PT6
LED7/ Upper bin outside paper detection
PT7
LED8/ Lower bin outside paper detection
PT8
Table 5-304
B. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and Brakes
M4
M6
SL 8
SL 5 SL 2
M2 M5
M1 BK 4
CL 2
M3
SL 6
CL 1 SL 1 BK 1
M7 BK 3
M 15
SL 3
M 20
M 13
SL 7
M9 M 10
M 17 BK 2
M 11
M8
M 14
M 12
M 18
M 19
SL 9
M 16
Figure 5-305

Motor M1 Common path feeder motor
M M2 Upper path feeder motor
M3 Lower path feeder motor
M4 Upper bin shift motor
M5 Lower bin shift motor
M6 Upper bin guide bar motor
M7 Lower bin guide bar motor
M8 Side gripper left/right shift motor
M9 Side gripper grip motor
M10 Front gripper left/right shift motor
M11 Front gripper front/rear shift motor
M12 Front gripper grip motor
M13 Stapler front/rear shift motor
M14 Stacker processing unit shift motor
M15 Stacker unit shift motor
M16 Stacker tray shift motor
M17 Bin rear end wall open/close motor
M18 Leading edge stopper motor
M19 Lift wall shift motor
M20 Stapler motor
Clutch CL1 Upper path roller clutch

CL
CL2 Lower path roller clutch
Solenoid SL1 Non-sort path switching solenoid

SL
SL2 Path switching solenoid
SL3 Access door solenoid
SL5 Upper paddle solenoid
SL6 Lower paddle solenoid
SL7 De-curling solenoid
SL8 Bin cover locking solenoid
SL9 Stacker tray retaining solenoid
Brake BK1 Stacker unit shift brake

BK BK2 Stack processing unit shift brake 1
BK3 Stack processing unit shift brake 2
BK4 Stacker unit shift brake 2
Table 5-305
C. Switches and Lamps
11
SW 1 10
14
1 13
8 3
6
MSW 1 SW 2
4 SW 3
2
LP 1
5
9
SW 4
12 SW 5
Figure 5-306

Lamp LP1 Lamp 1
Microswitch SW1 Bin cover switch

SW2 Upper cover switch
SW3 Front cover switch
SW4 Access door switch
SW5 Emergency stop button
MSW1 Interlocking switch
Table 5-306 a
Ref. Name
q Finisher controller PCB
w Stack processing unit driver PCB
e Stack processing unit driver relay PCB 1
r Stack processing unit driver relay PCB 2
t Stacker tray relay PCB
y Power supply PCB
u LCD controller PCB
i Back light power supply PCB
o Switch PCB
!0 Copy end indicator PCB
!1 LCD volume PCB
!2 Stacker unit status indicator PCB
!3 Upper path feeder motor controller PCB
!4 LCD unit
Table 5-306 b
D. Paper Folding Unit-A1
F-PI 6
F-MS 1
F-PI 7
F-MS 2
F-PI 5
F-PI 1
F-SL 4
F-S 1
F-SL 2
F-SL 5
F-PI 2
F-SL 3
F-PI 4
F-M 1
1
F-LED 1
F-PI 3
F-SL 1
F-PT 1
Figure 5-307

Motor F-FM1 Folder motor
M
SL Solenoid F-SL1 B4 Z-folding No. 1 stopper solenoid

F-SL2 B4 Z-folding No. 2 stopper solenoid
F-SL3 Locking solenoid
F-SL4 Releasing solenoid
F-SL5 Inlet solenoid
Photointer- F-PI1 Feeding path No. 1 paper detection

rupter F-PI2 Folding path residual paper detection 1
F-PI3 Folding path residual paper detection 2
F-PI4 Folding path residual paper detection 3
F-PI5 Level section path residual paper detection
F-PI6 Upper cover open/closed detection
F-PI7 Folder SET detection
F-S1 Feeding path No. 2 paper detection
F-LED1 Feeding path No. 3 paper detection

F-PT1 Feeding path No. 3 paper detection
Switch MS1 Upper cover open/close switch

MS2 Folder SET switch
Folder driver q Paper folding unit drive

PCB
Table 5-307
E. Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED),

and Check Pins by PCB
Of the LEDs and check pins used in the machine, those needed in the field are
discussed.
Caution:
Do not touch any check pins that are not found herein. They are intended for use in
the factory, and must be adjusted to high accuracy requiring special tools and
instruments.
1. Finisher Controller PCB
32 2 1B 17B 1B 7B 24 2
1B 20B
4 J6 1 31 J7 1 17A J8 1A 7A J9 1A 23 J10 1
13B 1A 20A J11 1A
13A 1B
J5
J12
1B 13A TP19
1A 13B
1 2
J13
J4 1
IC2
12
2
J3
1 2
J14
LED3
1
2
J2
1 RY1
1
6
J1 LED2 IC9 J15
LED1
8 1
25B 1A 15A 1B
J16
J25
1A 15B
ON 12A 1B
SW1
1B 25A 12 J17
10B 1A
1A 12B
J24
1 17 4 1 2 1 1 J20 10 1A J19 10A 1A J18 25A
1B 10A
2 J23 18 J22 J21 10B 1B 25B 1B
Figure 5-308
Functions of LEDs
The LEDs on the finisher controller PCB are used to indicate the status of power
supplied to the finisher’s loads.
LED ON OFF Remarks

• The finisher is • The REMOTE signal • In response to the
connected to the from the copier is not REMOTE signal, the
LED1 copier, and the received. finisher turns on the DC
REMOTE signal from power supply PCB.
the copier is received.
(The relay RY1 is ON.)
• The power (+24 V) to • The power (+24 V) to all • When OFF, the finisher’s
all loads of the feeding loads of the feeding operation mode is in
LED2 system except the system except the emergency mode.
common feeder motor common feeder motor is
is being supplied. not being supplied.
• The power for the • The power for the loads
loads of the stacker of the stacker unit and
unit and the power the power (+24 VP) for
LED3 (+24 VP) for the loads the loads of the stack
of the stack processing unit are not
processing unit are being supplied.
being supplied.
2. Stack Processing Unit Driver PCB
J109 J110
2 1 8 1
B13 A1
J108
B1 A13
B8 A1
J107
17 18
B1 A8
J101
B25 A1
1 2
J106 1
J102
4 2
J103
B1 A25
1 31 A1 A17 A1 A4 1 7 1
2 J105 32 B17 J104 B1 B4 J111 B1 2 J112 8
Figure 5-309
3. LCD Controller PCB
1 3 2 1
J805 J806
25 26
J801
1 50
J804 J803 J802

2 18 2 18 2 14
1 17 1 17 1 13
Figure 5-310
4. Switch PCB
2 1
LED3
LED4
LED1
LED2
J305 PSW2 PSW1
ON ON
SW3 SW1 SW2
OFF OFF
1 51 4
24 23
Figure 5-311
Functions of LEDs
The LEDs on the switch PCB indicate the status of the two CPUs (IC1, IC8) of the
finisher.
CPU LED ON Flashing OFF

IC1 LED1 • Normal (flashes at • Power OFF or IC1
about 1-sec intervals) error.
— • Jam (between copy slot
and bin; flashes at
about 0.3-sec intervals)
LED2 • Any of the doors is • Power OFF, or
open. • All doors are
Stacker set (PI41) closed.
Upper cover (PI74,
PI75)
Bin cover (PI76) —
Front door (PI77)
Screen (PI78)
Access cover
Interlock switch
(PI80)
IC8 LED3 • IC8 error • Normal (flashes at • Power OFF or IC8
about 1-sec intervals) error.
• Jam (between bin and
stack tray; flashes at
about 0.3-sec intervals)
LED4 • An error has • Error (flashes at about • Power OFF, or
occurred and 0.3-sec intervals) • Normal
emergency mode
has turned on.
Sw1 and Sw2 Configuration

Mode SW1 SW2 Description
Common feeding ON ON
• Rotates the common feeding motor
operation (M1).
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Any position
Folding feeding ON ON • Rotates the folder motor (FM1) of the

operation paper folding unit.
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Any position
Upper feeding • Turns on the upper path roller clutch

ON ON
operation (CL1), and rotates the common feeding
motor (M1).
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Any position
Lower feeding ON ON • Turns on the lower path roller clutch

operation (CL2), and rotates the common feeding
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 motor (M1).
Any position
Common feeding ON ON • Turns on both upper path roller clutch

operation (CL1) and lower path roller clutch
(turning on both 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 (CL2), and rotates the common feeding
CL1 and CL2) motor (M1).
Any position
Upper module ON ON • Turns on the upper path roller clutch

feeding (CL1), and rotates the common feeding
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 motor (M1).
• Rotates the upper path feeding motor
Any position
(M2).
Lower module ON ON • Turns on the lower path roller clutch
feeding (CL2), and rotates the common feeding
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 motor (M1)).
• Rotates the lower path feeding motor
Any position
(M3).
Full feeding ON ON • Turns on both upper path roller clutch
operation. (CL1) and lower path roller clutch
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 (CL2), and rotates the common feeding
motor (M1).
Any position
• Rotates the upper path feeding motor
(m2).
• Rotates the lower path feeding motor
(M3).
Table 5-308a

Solenoid ON ON • Each press on the push switch (PSW1)
operation 1 turns on and off the following solenoids
1 2 3 4
inside the finisher in sequence:
1 2 3 4 5
non-sort path switching solenoid (SL1),
Any position path switching solenoid (SL2), upper
paddle solenoid (SL5), lower paddle
solenoid (SL6), bin cover releasing
solenoid (SL8)
1 2 3 4
inside the paper folding unit in
1 2 3 4 5
sequence:
Any position inlet solenoid (SL5), B4 Z-folding No. 1
stopper solenoid (SL1), B4 Z-folding
No. 2 stopper solenoid (SL2), releasing
solenoid (SL4), locking solenoid (SL3)
Top bin module ON ON • Each press on the push switch (PSW1)
ascent operation moves up the top bin module by a
1 2 3 4
single step.
1 2 3 4 5
Any position
Top bin module ON ON • Each press on the push switch (PSW1)

descent moves down the top bin module by a
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 single step.
Any position
Bottom bin ON ON • Each press on the push switch (PSW1)

module ascent move up the bottom bin module by a
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 single step.
Any position
Bottom bin ON ON • Each press on the push switch (PSW1)

module descent moves down the bottom bin module by
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 a single step.
Any position
Copy End ON ON • The Copy End indicator flashes.

indicator check
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Any position
Table 5-308b

Upper bin mod- ON ON
ule bar move-
ment range
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
adjustment
(NEAR direction Any position
for A4)
Upper bin module ON ON For details, see p. 5-26.
bar movement
range adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
(AWAY direction
Any position
for A)
Lower bin mod- For details, see p. 5-29.
ON ON
ule guide cover
movement range
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
adjustment
for A4)
Lower bin module ON ON For details, see p. 5-29.
guide cover move-
ment range adjust- 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
ment (AWAY direc-
Any position
tion for A4)
Upper bin mod- ON ON For details, see p. 5-26.
ule guide bar
movement range 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
registration
Any position
(for A4)
Lower bin mod- ON ON For details, see p. 5-29.
ule guide bar
registration
Any position
(for A4)
ule guide bar
movement range 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
check
Any position
(for A4)
ule guide bar
check (for A4)
Any position
Table 5-308c

ule guide bar
movement range 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
adjustment
for LTR)
ule guide bar
adjustment
Any position
(AWAY direction
for LTR)
ule guide bar
adjustment
Any position
(NEAR direction
for LTR)
ule guide bar
adjustment
Any position
(AWAY direction
for LTR)
ule guide
registration
Any position
(for LTR)
ule guide bar
registration
Any position
(for LTR)
ule guide bar
check
Any position
(for LTR)
Lower bin ON ON For details, see p. 5-32.
module guide
bar movement 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
range check
Any position
(for LTR)
Table 5-308d
Item SW3 setting Description

Normal copying ON • When all bits are set to OFF, normal copying
mode turns on.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Side gripper ON If the side gripper is at home position,

left/right shift • It moves to clasping position (cannot be
operation stopped in the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the side gripper is not at home position,
• It moves to home position.
Side gripper ON • The side gripper opens (cannot be stopped in
clasping the middle).
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • The side gripper closes (cannot be stopped in

the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front gripper ON If the front gripper is at home position,

left/right shift • It moves to the point of reception (cannot be
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the front gripper is at the right limit,
• It moves to home position (cannot be stopped
in the middle).
If the front gripper is at the left limit,
• It moves to the point of reception for A4
stacking (cannot be stopped in the middle).
If the front gripper is at a position other than the
above,
• It moves to the right limit.
front/rear shift • It moves to the front sensor.
operation If the front gripper is not at home position,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front gripper ON • The front gripper opens (cannot be stopped in
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • The front gripper closes (cannot be stopped

in the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stapler front/rear ON If the stapler is at home position,

shift operation • It moves to the LTR2 rear position (cannot be
stopped in the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the stapler is not at home position,
Table 5-309a

Stack processing ON • It moves to home position.
unit up/down
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • It moves to DOWN position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack unit ON • It moves to UP position 1.

up/down
operation mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stacker tray ON If the stacker tray is at the lower limit,

up/down • It moves to the point of paper surface
operation detection or to UP position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the stacker tray is not at the lower limit,
• It moves to DOWN position.
Stapling ON • Stapling is executed.
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bin rear end wall ON • The bin rear end wall closes (cannot be
open/close stopped in the middle).
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • The bin rear end wall opens (cannot be

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Leading edge ON If the leading edge stopper is at home position,

stopper • It moves to a point suited to B5 size.
operation mode If the leading edge stopper is not at home
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
position,
Table 5-309b

Lift wall up/down ON • It moves to home position (cannot be stopped
operation in the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • It moves to UP position (cannot be stopped in

the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stacker solenoid ON • The stacker solenoid remains on for 1 sec.

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Curling solenoid ON • The curling solenoid remains on for 0.5 sec.

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack processing ON • The stack processing unit moves to UP

unit/stacker unit position, and the stacker unit moves to the
up/down point of access.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
operation
Indicator test ON • The stack level LEDs turn on for 0.5 sec in
sequence.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack processing ON • The stack processing unit and the stacker unit
unit/stacker unit moves to the upper stacking position at the
up/down same time.
operation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • The stack processing unit and the stacker unit

move to the lower stacking position at the
same time.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Back-up RAM ON • The back-up RAM is initialized.

reset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 5-309c
5. Folder Driver PCB
1 6 7 1
J108
4 J106
J103
1 4
10
J101
1
J104
1
14
1 J102
J105
6 1
1 J107 8
Figure 5-312
IV. SERVICE MODE
A. Outline
The finisher has the following modes:
Mode Description
Operation check The finisher may be operated on its own for checking its operation.
Adjustment The finisher’s major parts may be adjusted.
Job mix switch/ • The job mix function may be enabled or disabled.
stapling position • The stapling position may be adjusted in each direction.
adjustment
Emergency The finisher’s operation mode may be returned to normal mode.
operation mode
disable
B. Using Service Mode
1. Operation Check and Adjustment Mode

2) Open the upper cover; then, remove the two screws, and detach the upper cover
(front).
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
3) Shift bit 3 of SW2 and bit 1 of SW3 on the switch PCB to ON, and turn on the copier’s
power switch. (LED1 and LED3 on the switch PCB will flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
Bit 1
Bit 3
Figure 5-403
4) Set the DIP switch to suit the desired function, and press the appropriate push switch
(PSW1 or PSW2).
5) To end service mode, shift bit 3 of SW2 and all bits of SW3 to OFF, and turn off and
on the copier’s power switch.
2. Job Mix Switch/Stapling Position Adjustment, and Emergency Operation Disable

Mode

2) Open the upper cover; then, remove the two screws, and detach the upper cover
(front).
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
3) Shift bit 8 of SW3 on the switch PCB to ON, and turn on the copier’s power switch.
(The finisher’s display will show the Job Mix Switch screen and the Stapling Position
Adjustment screen.)
Switch PCB
Bit 8
Figure 5-406
4) To end service mode, shift bit 8 of SW3 to OFF, and turn off and then on the copier’s
power switch. (Be sure to wait at least 1 sec before turn it on.)
C. Checking the Operation
1. Sorter Unit (upper feeding assembly, lower feeding assembly, common

feeding assembly, upper/lower bin module) and the Paper Folding Unit
The operation of the sorter unit and the paper folding unit may be checked using the
DIP switches (SW1, SW2) and the push switch (PSW1).
SW1 is used to check the sorter unit and the paper folding unit, while SW2 is used to
specify the presence/absence of the paper folding unit as well as to set SW1 to operation
check mode, adjustment mode, or normal operation.
When using SW1, go through the following after performing up to step 4) of 1.
“Operation Check Mode and Adjustment Mode” under “Using Service Mode.”
1) Set SW1 and SW2 to suit the desired function.
Switch PCB
SW1 SW2
Figure 5-407
2) Press the push switch (PSW1) corresponding to SW1. (Operation will start.)
Switch PCB
PSW1
Figure 5-408
3) To stop the operation, press the push switch (PSW1) once again.
4) To use a different function, set SW1 to the desired function, and press the push
switch (PSW1) twice to start operation.

Common feeding ON ON • The common feeder motor (M1)
operation rotates.
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Any position
Folding feeding ON ON • The folder motor (FM1) of the paper

operation folding unit rotates.
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Any position
Upper feeding ON ON • The upper path roller clutch (CL1)

operation turns on, and the common feeder
1 2 3 4 motor (M1) rotates.
1 2 3 4 5
Any position
Lower feeding ON ON • The lower path roller clutch (CL2) turns

operation on, and the common feeder motor
1 2 3 4 (M1) rotates.
1 2 3 4 5
Any position
Table 5-401a

Common feeding ON ON • The upper roller clutch (CL1) and the
operation (both lower path roller clutch (CL2) turn on,
CL1 and CL2 are 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 and the common feeder motor (M1)
on) rotates.
Any position
Upper module ON ON • The upper path roller clutch (CL1)

feeding turns on, and the common feeder
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 motor (M1) rotates.
• The upper path feeder motor (M2)
Any position
rotates.
Lower module ON ON • The lower path roller clutch (CL2) turns
feeding on, and the common feeder motor
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 (M1) rotates.
• The lower path feeder motor (M3)
Any position
rotates.
Full feeding ON ON • The upper path roller clutch (CL1) and
operation the lower roller clutch (CL2) turn on,
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 and the common feeder motor (M1)
rotates.
Any position • The upper path feeder motor (M2)
rotates.
• The lower path feeder motor (M3)
rotates.
Solenoid ON ON • Each press on the push switch
operation 1 (PSW1) turns on and off the following
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 solenoids of the finisher in sequence:
non-sort path switching solenoid (SL1),
Any position path switching solenoid (SL2), upper
paddle solenoid (SL5), lower paddle
solenoid (SL6), bin cover releasing
solenoid (SL8).
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 of the paper folding unit in sequence:
inlet solenoid (SL5), B4 Z-folding No. 1
Any position
stopper solenoid (SL1), B4 Z-folding
No. 2 stopper solenoid (SL2), releasing
solenoid (SL4), locking solenoid (SL3).
Upper bin ON ON • Each press on the push switch
module up (PSW1) causes the upper bin module
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 to move up for a single bin.
Any position
Table 5-401b

Upper bin ON ON • Each press on the push switch (PS1)
module down causes the upper bin module to move
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 down for a single bin.
Any position
Lower bin mod- ON ON • Each press on the push switch

ule up operation (PSW1) causes the lower bin module
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 to move up for a single bin.
Any position
Lower bin ON ON • Each press on the push switch

module down (PSW1) causes the lower bin module
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 to move down for a single bin.
Any position
Copy End ON ON The Copy End indicator flashes.

indicator check
operation 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Any position
Table 5-401c
2. Finisher Unit (stack processing unit, stacker unit)
To check the operation of the finisher unit, use the DIP switch (SW3) and the push
switch (PSW2).
When using SW3, go through the following after performing up to step 4) of 1.
“Operation Check Mode and Adjustment Mode” under “Using Service Mode.”
1) Set SW3 to suit the desired function.
Switch PCB
SW3
Figure 5-409
2) Press the push switch (PSW2) corresponding to SW3.
Switch PCB
PSW2
Figure 5-410
3) The operation in question will be executed. (With the exception of a few modes, you
may stop most on-going operations by pressing PSW2.)
4) To use a different function, set SW3 to the desired function, and press the push
switch (PSW2) twice to start operation.
Switch PCB
PSW2
Figure 5-411

Normal copying ON • When all bits are set to OFF, normal copying
mode turns on.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Side gripper ON If the side gripper is at home position,

left/right shift • It moves to clasping position (cannot be
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the side gripper is not at home position,
Side gripper ON • The side gripper opens (cannot be stopped in
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • The side gripper closes (cannot be stopped in

the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

left/right shift • It moves to the point of reception (cannot be
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the front gripper is at the right limit,
• It moves to home position (cannot be stopped
in the middle).
If the front gripper is at the left limit,
• It moves to the point of reception for A4
stacking (cannot be stopped in the middle).
If the front gripper is at a position other than the
above,
• It moves to the right limit.
front/rear shift • It moves to the front sensor.
operation If the front gripper is not at home position,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front gripper ON • The front gripper opens (cannot be stopped in
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • The front gripper closes (cannot be stopped

in the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stapler front/rear ON If the stapler is at home position,

shift operation • It moves to the LTR2 rear position (cannot be
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the stapler is not at home position,
Table 5-402a

Stack processing ON • It moves to home position.
unit up/down
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack unit ON • It moves to UPPER 1 position.

up/down
operation mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stacker tray ON If the stacker tray is at the lower limit,

up/down • It moves to the point of paper surface
operation detection or to UP position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the stacker tray is not at the lower limit,
• It moves to DOWN position.
Stapling ON • Stapling is executed.
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bin rear end wall ON • The bin rear end wall closes (cannot be
open/close stopped in the middle).
operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • The bin rear end wall opens (cannot be

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Leading edge ON If the leading edge stopper is at home position,

stopper • It moves to a point suited to B5 size.
operation mode If the leading edge stopper is not at home
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
position,
Table 5-402b

Lift wall up/down ON • It moves to home position (cannot be stopped
operation in the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON • It moves to UP position (cannot be stopped in

the middle).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stacker solenoid ON • The stacker solenoid remains on for 1 sec.

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Curling solenoid ON • The curling solenoid remains on for 0.5 sec.

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack processing ON • The stack processing unit moves to UP

unit/stacker unit position, and the stacker unit moves to the
up/down point of access.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
operation
Indicator test ON • The stack level LEDs turn on for 0.5 sec in
sequence.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Stack processing ON • The stack processing unit and the stacker unit
unit/stacker unit moves to the upper stacking position at the
up/down same time.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
operation
ON • The stack processing unit and the stacker unit

move to the lower stacking position at the
same time.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Back-up RAM ON • The back-up RAM is initialized.

reset
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table 5-402c
D. Adjustment
1. Outline
The adjustment work consists of the following five items:

a. adjusting the guide bar swing range.
b. checking the guide bar swing range.
c. adjusting the paper face 1/2 sensor sensitivity.
d. checking the sensor sensitivity.
2. Adjusting the Guide Bar Swing Range
Make the following adjustments whenever you have replaced any of the following
parts:
• Upper bin guide bar home position sensor (PI33)
• Lower bin guide bar home position sensor (PI34)
• Upper bin guide bar
• Lower bin guide bar
Making Adjustments
1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR copy paper free of curling.
• You will be using the copy paper for adjustment.
switch actuator.
4) Open the finisher’s upper cover; then, remove the two screws, and detach the upper
cover (front).
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
to ON; then, turn on the copier’s power switch. (LED1 and 3 on the switch PCB will
start to flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-414
6) Set the bits of the DIP switch SW1 and the DIP switch SW2 as shown.
• Take care. You must use different DIP switch settings for different paper sizes.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Any position Any position
Table 5-403
7) Place the copy paper you have prepared in the topmost bin of the upper bin module,
and press the push switch (PSW1) on the switch PCB.
• If the guide bar is not at home position, the guide bar will return to home position.
Switch
Switch PCB
PCB
PSW 1
PSW1
Copy paper Figure 5-415
8) Operate the push switch (PSW1) so that the guide bar is in contact with the edge of
the copy paper.
Reference:
The guide bar moves toward the copy paper about 7 mm in response to the first press
on the push switch; it then moves toward the copy paper by about 0.3 mm in response
to the second and subsequent presses.
Guide bar
Copy paper
Top view
Figure 5-416
• To move the guide bar away from the copy paper, set the bits of the DIP switches
SW1 and SW2 on the switch PCB as follows:
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Table 5-404
9) While keeping the condition of step 8), shift bit 2 to ON and press the push switch
(PSW1).
• The guide bar returns to home position.
• If the adjustment has been correct, LED1 on the switch PCB keeps flashing at the
same speed.
• If the adjustment has been wrong, LED1 on the switch PCB changes its speed of
flashing temporarily (for about 3 sec).
Switch PCB
LED1 SW1
bit 2
Figure 5-417

1) Obtain a single sheet of LTR copy paper. (Make sure it is free of curling.)
switch actuator.
cover (front).
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
5) Shift bit 3 of the DIP switch SW2 and bit 1 of the DIP switch SW3 to ON on the switch
PCB; then, turn on the copier. (LED1 and LED3 on the switch PCB will start to flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-420
6) Sheet the bits on the DIP switch SW1 and DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as
shown.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Table 5-405
7) Place copy paper in the topmost bin of the upper bin module, and press the push
switch SW1 on the switch PCB.
• If the guide bar is not at home position, it will return to home position.
Switch
SwitchPCB
PCB
PSW1
PSW 1
Copy paper
Figure 5-421
8) Operate the push switch PSW1 so that the guide bar will come in contact with the
edge of the copy paper.
Reference:
The first press on the push switch will move the guide bar about 7 mm toward the copy
paper; the second and subsequent presses on the switch will move the bar about 0.3
mm toward the paper.
Guide bar
Copy paper
Top view
Figure 5-422
• To move the guide bar away from the copy paper, set the DIP switch SW1 and the
DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as shown.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON
ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Table 5-406
9) While maintaining the condition of step 8), shift bit 2 of the DIP switch SW1 to ON;
then press the push switch PSW1.
• If the adjustment is successful, LED1 on the switch PCB flashes at the same
intervals.
• If the adjustment is not successful, LED1 on the switch PCB flashes at shorter
intervals temporarily (about 3 sec).
Switch
SwitchPCB
PCB
LED1 SW1
LED1
bit 2
Figure 5-423
3. Checking the Guide Bar Movement Range
The orientation of the guide bar can be checked using copy paper.
Steps
• The copy paper will be used for making checks.
2) Open the bin cover, and remove all copy paper from the upper bin; then, insert the
Figure 5-424

cover (front).
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
5) Shift bit 3 on the DIP switch SW2 and bit 1 of the DIP switch SW3 on the switch PCB
to ON; then, turn on the copier. (LED1 and LED 3 on the switch PCB will start to
flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-427
6) Set the bits on the DIP switch SW1 and the DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as
shown.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Figure 5-407
• If the guide bar is not at home position, press the push switch once again.
Switch
SwitchPCB
PCB
PSW1
PSW1
Figure 5-428
Guide bar
L
Copy paper
(Top view)
Figure 5-429
bits of the DIP switches (SW1, SW2, SW3) back to their initial positions; then, turn off
execute “Adjusting the Guide Bar Movement Range.”

• The copy paper will be used to make checks.
2) Open the bin cover, and remove all copy paper from the lower bin; then, insert the
Figure 5-430

cover.
Upper cover Screws
Upper cover (front)
to ON, and turn on the copier. (LED1 and LED3 on the switch PCB will start to flash.)
Switch PCB
LED3 LED1
bit 1
bit 3
Figure 5-433
6) Set the bits of the DIP switch SW1 and the DIP switch SW2 on the switch PCB as
shown.
• The settings differ depending on the size of copy paper used for adjustment.
A4 LTR
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2
ON ON ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Table 5-408
• If the guide bar is not at home position, press the push switch PSW1 once again.
Switch PCB
PSW1
Figure 5-434
Guide bar
L
Copy paper
(Top view)
Figure 5-435
bits of the DIP switches (SW1, SW2, SW3) back to their initial positions; then, turn off
execute “Adjusting the Guide Bar Movement Range.
4. Adjusting the Paper Side 1/2 Sensor Sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity of the paper side 1/2 sensor whenever you have replaced any
of the following parts:
Making Adjustments
2) Remove the seven screws from the rear left cover of the finisher, and remove the
cover.
Screws
Rear left cover
Screws
Figure 5-436
3) Shift all bits on the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PCB to OFF.
ON
SW1
1 2
Figure 5-437

• Check to make sure that the finisher’s initialization mechanism has ended.
assembly.
6) Push the service switch over the cover with a clip or the like.
Figure 5-438

(avoid alphabet characters), and check the display.
Sensor (notation) Address

Table 5-409
9) Shift the bits of the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PCB as indicated in
Table 5-108.
Address Reading Settings on DIP switch (SW1)

ON
00D9 or
1 2
PI74
ON
Lower than
1 2
ON
00D9 or
1 2
PI75
ON
Less than
1 2
Table 5-410
10) Turn off and then on the copier.

11) Execute ‘check sensor sensitivity’, and check the reading.
5. Checking the Sensor Sensitivity
a. Outline
You can check the sensitivity in relation to the sensors shown in Table 5-109, thereby
finding out whether each of the sensors is normal or faulty.
Sensor (notation) Remarks
Stapler edge sensor (PI68) Needs no adjustment.
Upper bin inside paper sensor (LED1/PT1) Needs no adjustment.
Lower bin inside paper sensor (LED2/PT2) Needs no adjustment.
Edge feed sensor (LED3/PT3) Needs no adjustment.
Paper side 1 sensor (LED4/PT4) Needs adjustment;

for instructions, see
Paper side 2 sensor (LED5/PT5) “Adjusting the Paper Size 1/2 Sensitivity.”
Stack sensor (LED6/PT6) Needs no adjustment.
Upper bin outside paper sensor (LED7/PT7) Needs no adjustment.
Lower bin outside sensor (LED8/PT8) Needs no adjustment.
Table 5-411
If you have found a fault in the results of the check on the sensitivity of any sensor,
check if that sensor is mounted correctly; if it is, replace it.
For the paper side 1/2 sensor, be sure to perform the steps given under “Adjusting
the Paper Side 1/2 Sensor Sensitivity.”
b. Making Adjustments
• Check to make sure that the finisher’s initialization has ended.
assembly.
6) Press the service switch over the cover with a clip.
Figure 5-439

(avoiding alphabet characters), and check the display. If the reading is not correct,
replace the sensor. (The notation is in hexadecimal.)
Screen Display
P176: 00CF H
Indicates hexadecimal notation.
Reading
Address
Sensor (notation) Address Normal
Stapler edge sensor (PI68) PI78 00CF or higher
Upper bin inside paper sensor (LED1/PT1) PI80 00D3 or higher
Lower bin inside paper sensor (LED2/PT2) PI81 00D3 or higher
Edge feed sensor (LED3/PT3) PI76 00D3 or higher
Stack sensor (LED6/PT6) PI77 00D3 or higher
Upper bin outside paper sensor (LED7/PT7) PI82 00CF or higher
Lower bin outside sensor (LED8/PT8) PI83 00CF or higher
Table 5-412
E. Job Mix Switch/Staple Position Adjustment

1. Job Mix Switch
Use the finisher’s touch panel for job mix switch mode and staple position adjustment
mode.
When using job mix switch mode, go through the following after performing up to step
4) of 2. “Job Mix Switch/Stapling Position Adjustment, and Emergency Operation Mode
” under “Using Service Mode.”
If you selected “enable job mix”, be sure to install the stack sub cover.
Reference:
The term job refers to a series of operations executed in response to a press on the
Copy Start key.
The finisher is set to ‘disable job mix’ at time of shipment, and will not accept a com-
mand for a second job if paper remains in a bin or stacker tray.
When it is set to ‘enable job mix’, the finisher will accept a command for a second job
even if paper remains in the bin, non-sort delivery assembly, or the stacker tray.
However, stacking may not be as efficient as otherwise if ‘enable mix job’ is selected.
a. Making Settings
1) Press “multiple jobs” on the touch panel.
Figure 5-440
2) Press the appropriate job notation on the touch panel.

• The notation on the touch panel turns to ‘1’ or ‘0’.
No: enable job mix
Yes: disable job mix
Figure 5-441
3) Turn off/on the finisher.
b. Installing the Stacker Support Bar

1) Open the finisher’s front cover; remove the screw w, and remove the stacking
support bar q.
Figure 5-442
2) Slide out the stacker tray, and install the stacking support bar q with a screw w.
Figure 5-443
2. Stapling Position Adjustment Mode
a. Stapling Position X
For stapling position X, the position (A) shown in Figure 5-444 may be varied in units
of about 0.25 mm in + and - directions in relation to the default (6 mm; each ‘1’ on the
touch panel represents about 0.25 mm). The setting may be changed between -6 (-1.5
mm) and +6 (+1.5 mm).
For double stapling, both rear and front are adjusted simultaneously (not
independently of each other).
Corner Stapling Double Stapling Single Stapling
A A
+ direction - direction
A A
+ direction - direction + direction - direction
Figure 5-444
1) Press Stapling position X’ on the touch panel.

• The Stapling Position X Update screen will appear.
Figure 5-445
2) Enter the new setting using the symbols and numbers on the keypad of the touch
panel.
• The entered setting will appear in section A of the touch panel.
Figure 5-446
3) After checking the setting indicated in section A of the touch panel, press ‘ENTER’.
• The setting indicated in section A of the touch panel will also appear in section B,
indicating the end of the setting operation.
Figure 5-447
4) Shift bit 8 of SW2 to OFF, and turn off and then on the copier; then, execute staple
sorting to check the stapling position.
Switch PCB
Bit 8
Figure 5-448
b. Stapling Position Y
For stapling position Y, the position (A) shown in Figure 5-449 may be varied in units
of about 0.17 mm in + and - directions (each ‘1’ on the touch panel represents about 0.17
mm). The setting may be changed between -31(-5.3mm) and +32(+5.3mm).
Both rear and front directions for double stapling are affected, and independent
adjustment is not possible.
A
Corner Stapling Double Stapling Single Stapling
+ direction + direction
- direction - direction
A
A
+ direction + direction
- direction - direction
Figure 5-449
1) Press ‘stapling position Y’ on the touch panel.

• The Stapling Position Y Update screen will appear.
Figure 5-450
2) Enter the new setting using the symbols and numbers on the keypad of the touch
panel.
• The entered setting will appear in section A of the touch panel.
Figure 5-451
3) After checking the setting indicated in section A of the touch panel, press ‘ENTER’.
• The setting indicated in section A of the touch panel will also appear in section B,
indicating the end of the setting operation.
Figure 5-452
4) Shift bit 8 of SW2 to OFF, and turn off and then on the copier; then, execute staple
sorting to check the stapling position.
Switch PCB
Bit 8
Figure 5-453
V. SELF DIAGNOSIS
The CPU (IC1) on the finisher’s controller CPB is equipped with a function to check
the condition of the machine as needed, indicating an appropriate code upon detection
of a fault.
The copier indicates the state of the finisher on the control panel as necessary. For
jams, you can make use of the copier's service mode for checks (*1*; control display
mode).
\ 1\ DISPLY
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHHH JJJJJ

Jam code
Jam codecolumn
column
The number"2"
The number “2”isisindicated
indicated if aifjam
a jam
occurs ininthe
occurs thefinischer
finisherororthethe
paper
paperfolding
folding
unit.
A. Jam Alarm
1. Power-On Jam
Power-On Jam (1/2)
Code Error Sensors Finisher Copier

xx07 See p. 2-57 • Feeding path No. 1 sensor (PI1)* Does not Stops
• Feeding path No. 2 sensor (S1)* operate
• Feeding path No. 3 sensor
(LED1/PT1)*
• Folding path residual paper sensor
(PI2)*
2 (PI3)*
3 (PI4)*
• Level section path residual paper
sensor (PI5)*
• Non-sort path sensor (PI2)
• Upper path paper sensor 1 (PI3)
• Upper path residuals paper sensor
1 (PI6)
• Upper path residual paper sensor 2
(PI7)
• Common path paper sensor 1 (PI9)
• Common path paper sensor 2
(PI10)
• Lower path paper sensor 1 (PI12)
• Vertical path residual paper sensor
1 (PI16)
2 (PI17)
3 (PI18)
• Lower path residual path sensor 1
(PI19)
(PI20)
(PI21)
• Upper bin outside paper sensor
(LED7/PT7)
• Lower bin outside paper sensor
(LED8/PT8)
*Sensor inside the paper folding unit.
Power-On Jam (2/2)

xx80 See p. 2-57. • Side gripper paper sensor (PI49) Does not Does not
• Front gripper paper sensor (PI64) operate operate
• Stapler leading edge sensor (PI68)
• Edge feeding sensor (LED3/PT3)
2. Door Open Jam

xx08 The cover in • Stacker SET sensor (PI41) Does not Stops
question is • Upper cover sensor 1 (PI74) operate
opened during • Upper cover sensor 2 (PI75)
operation. • Bin cover sensor (PI76)
• Front cover sensor (PI77)
• Access cover switch (SW4)
• Interlocking switch (MSW1)
• Upper cover open/closed sensor
(PI6)*
• Folder SET switch (MS1)*
3. Delay Jam
xx11 See p. 2-57. Feeding path No. 1 • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
sensor (PI1)* tion immediately.
• If a stack, stops feeding opera-
tion after finishing delivery to
the upper or lower bin module.
sensor (S1)* tion immediately.
sensor (LED1/PT1)* tion immediately.
xx14 See p. 2-57. Common path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
sensor 1 (PI9) tion immediately.
xx16 See p. 2-57. Non-sort path sensor • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
(PI2) tion immediately.
xx17 See p. 2-57. Upper path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops

xx1A See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
xx1B See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
xx1C See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
xx1D See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
4. Stationary Jams
sensor (PI1)* tion immediately.
sensor (S1)* tion immediately.
sensor (LED1/PT1)* tion immediately.
xx26 See p. 2-57. Non-sort path sensor • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
(PI2) tion immediately.

xx2A See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
xx2B See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
xx2C See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
xx2D See p. 2-57. Lower path paper • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
xx2E See p. 2-57. Upper bin outside • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
sensor (LED7/PT7) tion immediately.
xx2F See p. 2-57. Lower bin outside • If a copy, stops feeding opera- Stops
sensor (LED8/PT8) tion immediately.
5. Stack Feeding Jam

xx81 When the side gripper • Stapler leading • If a copy, stops feeding operation Stops
moves a stack from the bin, edge sensor immediately.
the stapler leading edge (PI68) • If a stack, stops feeding operation
sensor (PI6*) does not immediately.
detect the leading edge of
the stack even after travel
over a specific distance.
xx82 When the side gripper • Edge feeding • If a copy, stops feeding operation Stops
moves a stack from the bin sensor immediately.
and stops at a specific posi- (LED3/PT3) • If a stack, stops feeding operation
tion, the edge feeding immediately.
sensor (LED3/PT3) detects
the leading edge of the sack
(skew).
xx83 When the front gripper • Edge feeding • If a copy, stops feeding operation Stops
moves a stack to the stacker sensor immediately.
tray, the edge feeding sen- (LED3/PT3) • If a stack, stops feeding operation
sor (LED3, PT3) detects the immediately.
trailing edge of the stack
even after travel over a
specific distance.
xx84 Even though the side grip- • Side gripper After the side gripper ends opening Stops
per has ended clasping paper sensor operation,
operation, the side gripper (PI49) • If a copy, stops feeding operation
paper sensor (PI49) does immediately.
not detect a stack. • If a stack, stops feeding operation
immediately.
xx85 Even though the side grip- • Front gripper After the front gripper ends opening Stops
per has ended clasping paper sensor operation,
operation, the front gripper (PI74) • If a copy, stops feeding operation
paper sensor (PI64) does immediately.
not detect a stack. • If a stack, stops feeding operation
immediately.
xx86 Before the side gripper • Edge feeding • If a copy, stops feeding operation Stops
left/right shift motor (M8) sensor immediately.
starts to operate, the edge (LED3/PT3) • If a stack, stops feeding operation
feeding sensor (LED3/PT3) immediately.
detects a stack.
xx87 After the side gripper has • Stapler leading • If a copy, stops feeding operation Stops
returned a stapled stack to edge sensor immediately.
the bin, the stapler leading (PI68) • If a stack, stops feeding operation
edge sensor (PI68) detects immediately.
the trailing edge of the
B. Errors
Code Cause Description
Communication failure (finisher) An error has occurred in the commu-
E501 nication within the finisher.
Common path feeder motor (M1) After the motor drive signal has been
failure generated, the common path feeder
E510 motor does not generate clock sig-
nals within 1 sec for a feed length of
100 mm.
Folder motor (M1) failure After the motor drive signal has been
generated, the common path feeder
100 mm.
Upper bin paper sensor (LED1/PT1) Auto adjustment of the upper bin
E525 auto adjustment failure paper sensor (LED1/PT1) has failed.
Or, an error has occurred in the auto
adjustment value.
Lower bin paper sensor (LED2/PT2) Automatic adjustment of the lower bin
E526 automatic adjustment failure paper sensor (LED2/PT2) has failed.
Or, an error has occurred in the auto
adjustment value.
Paper surface 1 sensor (LED4/PT4) Automatic adjustment of the paper
E527 automatic adjustment failure surface 1 sensor (LED4/PT4) has
failed. Or, an error has occurred in
the automatic adjustment value.
Paper surface 2 sensor (LED5/PT5) Automatic adjustment of the paper
E528 automatic adjustment failure surface 2 sensor (LED5/PT5) has
Stack sensor (LED6/PT6) automatic The stack sensor (LED6/PT6) has
E529 adjustment failure failed. Or, an error has occurred in
Upper bin guide bar motor (M6) After the motor drive signal has been
E530 failure generated, the operation does not
end within 2.5 sec.
Stapler motor (M20) failure After the motor drive signal has been
E531 generated, the operation does not
end within 0.5 sec.

Stapler front/rear shift motor (M13) Although specific pulse signals have
failure been generated to drive the motor,
E532 clock signals corresponding to the
pulse signals are not received from
the stapler front/rear shift motor clock
sensor (PI65).
Bin rear end wall open/close motor After the motor drive signal has been
E534 (M17) failure generated, the operation does not
end within 0.3 sec.
Stapler leading edge sensor (PI68) Automatic adjustment of the stapler
E536 automatic adjustment failure leading edge sensor (PI68) has failed.
Or, an error has occurred in the
automatic adjustment value.
Lower bin guide bar motor (M7) After the motor drive signal has been
E537 failure generated, the operation does not
end within 2.5 sec.
Upper bin shift motor (M4) failure After the motor drive signal has been
generated, the following condition has
occurred:
• The signal of the upper lead cam
level section sensor (PI27) has not
changed.
• Both upper bin lower limit sensor
(PI23) and lower bin lower limit sen-
E540 sor (PI24) have turned on at the
same time.
• During upward movement, the
upper bin upper limit sensor (PL23)
has turned on.
• During a search for home position,
the upper bin lower limit sensor
(PI24) has turned on, and it has
remained on even after a shift by a
single bin.

Upper bin shift motor (clock) failure Pulse signals do not arrive from the
E541 upper bin shift motor clock sensor
(PI31).
Lower bin shift motor (M5) failure After the motor drive signal has been
generated, the following condition
has occurred:
• The signal of the lower lead cam
level section sensor (PI29) has not
changed.
• Both lower bin upper limit sensor
(PI25) and lower bin lower limit
E542 sensor (PI26) have turned on at the
same time.
• During upward movement, the
lower bin lower limit sensor (PL25)
has turned on.
• During a search for home position,
the lower bin lower limit sensor
(PI26) has turned on, and it has
remained on even after a shift by a
single bin.
Lower bin shift motor (clock) failure Pulse signals does not arrive from
E543 the lower bin shift motor clock sensor
(PI32).
Upper feeder motor (M2) failure After the motor drive signal has been
E560 motor does not generate clock
signals within 1 sec for a feed length
of 100 mm.
Lower path feeder motor (M3) failure After the motor drive signal has been
100 mm.
Upper bin outside paper sensor Automatic adjustment of the upper
E564 (LED7/PT7) automatic adjustment
failure
bin paper sensor (LED7/PT7) has
Lower bin outside paper sensor Automatic adjustment of the lower
(LED8/PT8) automatic adjustment bin sensor (LED8/PT7) has failed.
E565 failure Or, an error has occurred in the
automatic adjustment value.

Side gripper grip motor (M9) failure After the motor drive signal has been
end in 520 ms.
Front gripper grip motor (M12) failure After the motor drive signal has been
end in 0.5 sec.
Side gripper left/right shift motor (M8) Although specific pulse signals have
E572 failure been generated to drive the motor,
signals do not arrive from the side
gripper error sensor (PL51).
Front gripper left/right shift motor Although specific pulses have been
(M10) failure generated to drive the motor, corre-
E573 sponding clock signals do not arrive
from the front gripper left/right shift
motor clock sensor (PI54).
Front gripper front/rear shift motor After the motor drive signal has been
end within 0.5 sec.
Stack processing unit shift motor After the motor drive signal has been
end within 2.5 sec.
Edge feeding sensor (LED3, PT3) Automatic adjustment of the edge
E576 automatic adjustment failure feeding sensor (LED3/PT3) has
Stacker tray shift motor (M16) failure After the motor rive signal has been
end within 8 sec.
Stacker unit shift motor (M15) failure After the motor drive signal has been
end within 2.5 sec.
Leading edge stopper motor (M18) After specific pulse signals have
failure been generated to drive the motor,
E582 signals do not arrive from the leading
edge stopper home position sensor
(PI46).
Shift motor (M19) failure After the motor drive signal has been
end within 2.3 sec.
Communication failure An error has occurred in the
E713 communication between the finisher
and the copier.
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ....................A-1 E. SPECIAL TOOLS ..................................A-13

B. SIGNAL AND ABBREVIATIONS .............A-5 F. SOLVENTS AND OILS ..........................A-13
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ..............A-7
D. PAPER FOLDING UNIT GENERAL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM...............................A-11
1. Initializing Operations
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART
Copy power switch ON
Folder motor (F-M1)

sensor (F-PI1)
Folder unit
Inlet solenoid (F-SL5)

Feeding path No. 2 Paper
sensor (F-S1)
Common path paper sensor
(PI9)
Common path feeding motor
(M1)
Upper path feeding motor
(M2)
Feeder unit
(M3)
Non-sort path switching
solenoid (SL1)
Path switching solenoid
(SL2)
Upper path paper sensor 2
(PI4)
(PI5)
Lower path paper sensor 3
(PI14)
(PL15)
Upper bin module
motor (M6)
Upper bin guide bar home

Upper bin lower limit sensor
yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
(PI24)
Upper lead cam level
sensor (PI27)
Upper lead cam No. 2 level
sensor (PI28)
motor (M7)
Lower bin module

yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
Lower bin lower limit sensor
(PI26)
Lower lead cam level
sensor (PI29)
Lower lead cam No. 2 level
sensor (PI30)
yyyy
,,,,
Stack processing unit shift
motor (M14)
brake 1 (BK1)
brake 2 (BK4)
Stack processing unit DOWN
Bin rear end wall open/close
motor (M17)
yyy
,,,
Finisher
,,,
yyy
motor (M8)


Side gripper home position
sensor (PI48)
Stapler front/rear shift motor
yy
,,
,,
yy
(M13)
Stapler front/rear shift home
Stapler leading edge paper
sensor (PI68)
Stapler motor (M20)

yyyyy
,,,,,
,,,,,
yyyyy
motor (M10)
(M12)
Front gripper grip home
yy
,,
motor (M11)
Paper surface sensors
(LED4/PT4, LED5/PT5)
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
yyyyyy
(M15)
(BK2)
Stacker unit shift brake 2
(BK3)
sensor (PI35)
sensor (PI36)
sensor (PI37)
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
Stacker unit
(M16)
Stacker tray holding
solenoid (SL9)
sensor (PI43)
sensor (PI42)
Stack sensor (LED6/PT6)

Leading edge stopper motor
(M18)

sensor (PI40)
Lift wall up position sensor
(PI39)
COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON FINISHER-B1 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-1
2. A3 Size 2 Originals 2 Stapling (double stapling) Sort Copy
2 sorting to upper bin module Pull out 2 copys on the upper module once, then put them back to the upper bin module again
Copy start key ON
Folder motor (F-M1)

sensor (F-PI1)
Folder unit

sensor (F-S1)
Common path paper sensor
(PI9)
Common path feeding motor
(M1)
(M2)
Feeder unit
(M3)
solenoid (SL1)
(SL2)
(PI4)
(PI5)
(PI14)
(PL15)
y
, yy
,, y
, yy
,, ON
y
, yy
,,
OFF
,
y ,,
yy ,
y ,,
yy ,
y ,,
yy
Upper bin module
motor (M6)
,,,,,
yyyyy ,,,,,,
yyyyyy
Upper bin lower limit sensor
(PI24)
,,,,,
yyyyy ,,,,,,
yyyyyy
sensor (PI27)
sensor (PI28)
motor (M7)
Lower bin module


Lower bin lower limit sensor
(PI26)
sensor (PI29)
sensor (PI30)
motor (M14)
brake 1 (BK1)
brake 2 (BK4)
Bin rear end wall open/close Open Close Open Close
motor (M17)
yy
,, ,,
yy yyy
,,, yy
,,
Finisher
Side gripper left/right shift Move to LEFT Move to LEFT Put back the stack on the bin Move to LEFT Move to LEFT Put back the stack on the bin
motor (M8)

,,
yy
Move to RIGHT ,,
yy ,,,
yyy
Move to RIGHT ,,Return to HP
yy
Stapler front/rear shift motor
y
, Clasping
yyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,, Releasing Clasping
yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,, Releasing
(M13)
,
y ,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyy
Return to HP ,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy
Return to HP
sensor (PI68)
Stapler motor (M20)

Front gripper left/right shift Stapling Stapling Stapling Stapling
motor (M10)
(M12)
motor (M11)
(M15)
(BK2)
Stacker unit shift brake 2
(BK3)
sensor (PI35)
sensor (PI36)
sensor (PI37)
Stacker unit
(M16)
solenoid (SL9)
sensor (PI43)
sensor (PI42)

Leading edge stopper motor
(M18)

sensor (PI40)
(PI39)
A-2 COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON FINISHER-B1 REV.0 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3. A3 Size 2 Originals 2 Staplings Z folding (double stapling) Sort Copy
1 sorting to upper bin module 1 sorting to lower bin module
Staple 1 copy on the upper bin module, then feed them on the stacker tray Staple 1 copy on the lower bin module, then feed them on the stacker tray Stack removal preparation
Copy start key ON
Folder motor (F-M1)

sensor (F-PI1)
Folder unit

sensor (F-S1)
Common path paper
sensor (PI9)
Common path feeding
motor (M1)
(M2)
Feeder unit
(M3)
solenoid (SL1)
(SL2)
(PI4)
(PI5)
(PI14)
(PL15)
yy
,, yy
,, yy
,,
,,,
yyy
Upper bin module guide To OFF position Putting copies into order Putting copies into order ON To OFF position Return to HP
Upper bin module
bar motor (M6)


Upper bin lower limit
sensor (PI24)
yyy
,,,
sensor (PI27)
yy
,, yy
,,
sensor (PI28)
,,
yy ,,
yy
Lower bin module
(M7)
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
Move to access position Move to HP
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
Lower bin lower limit
sensor (PI26)
sensor (PI29)
sensor (PI30)
motor (M14)
yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,Brake releasing
Move to HP
Brake releasing
brake 1 (BK1)
Stack processing unit shift Brake releasing Brake releasing
brake 2 (BK4)
Bin rear end wall open/ Open Close Open Close
close motor (M17)
Finisher

yyy
,,, yy
,,
Side gripper left/right shift Move to LEFT Move to RIGHT Move to LEFT Move to RIGHT
motor (M8)
(SL7)
,,,
yyy Return to HP ,,
yy Return to HP
Side gripper grip motor Releasing Releasing

(M9)
yy
,, yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, y
, yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
Stapler front/rear shift Clasping Clasping
motor (M13)
Stapler front/rear shift home Return to HP Return to HP
sensor (PI68)
yyyy
,,,, yyy
,,,
Stapler motor (M20)
Front gripper left/right shift Stapling Stapling Return to HP Stapling Stapling Return to HP
motor (M10)
,,,,
yyyy ,,,
yyy
Front gripper grip motor Releasing
(M12)
y
, y
,
Front gripper front/rear Clasping Releasing Clasping Return to HP
shift motor (M11)
Front gripper front/rear shift Move approx. 20mm to front
(M15)
Move to UP position
Brake releasing
yyyyyy
,,,,,,
Move to DOWN position
Brake releasing
Move to HP
Brake releasing
(BK2)
Stacker unit shift brake 2 Brake releasing Brake releasing Brake releasing
(BK3)
sensor (PI35)
sensor (PI36)
Stacker unit DOWN
yy
,, yyyy
,,,,
,,
yy ,,,,
yyyy
Stacker unit
(M16)
solenoid (SL9)
sensor (PI43)
sensor (PI42)

motor (M18)

sensor (PI40)
(PI39)
4. A4 Size 2 Originals 7 Staplings (double stapling) Sort Copy
5 sorting to upper bin module 2 sorting to lower bin module
Removal preparation of a stack Stack removal

Staple 5 copys on the upper bin module, then feed them on the stacker tray Staple 2 copys on the LOWER module, then feed them on the stacker tray
Copy start key ON on the LOWER bin module preparation
Folder motor (F-M1)

sensor (F-PI1)
Folder unit

Releasing solenoid
(F-SL4)
sensor (F-S1)
Common path paper
sensor (PI9)
Common path feeding
motor (M1)
(M2)
Feeder unit
(M3)
solenoid (SL1)
(SL2)
Upper path paper sensor
2 (PI4)
Upper path paper sensor
3 (PI5)
Lower path paper sensor
3 (PI14)
Lower path paper sensor
4 (PL15)
yy ,y ,,
,, yy ,,
yy yy
,, ,,
yy ,y ,,
yy ,,
yy y
, yy
,, y
, y,,,
, yyy
Upper bin module guide To OFF position ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Return to HP
Lower bin module Upper bin module
bar motor (M6)

,,,
yyy ,,,
yyy ,,,
yyy ,,,
yyy yyy
,,, ,,,
yyy
,,,,
yyyy
,,,
yyy
,,,yyy
yyy ,,,yyy
,,,yyy
,,,
To access position
,,,
yyy ,,,
yyy
,,,,
yyyy
,,,
yyy
Return to HP
Upper bin lower limit
sensor (PI24)
sensor (PI27)
yy
,,
,, ,,
yy
,, y
,
y yy
,, yy
,, y
,
,yyy
,,,
sensor (PI28)
yy yy , ,,
yy ,,
yy y ,,,
yyy
Lower bin module guide To OFF position OFF ON OFF Return to HP
bar motor (M7)

Lower bin lower limit
sensor (PI26)
yyyy
,,,, To access position
yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,
sensor (PI29)
sensor (PI30)
motor (M14)
brake 1 (BK1)
yyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,, Move to DOWN position
Brake releasing
Return to HP
Brake releasing
Stack processing unit shift Brake releasing Brake releasing

brake 2 (BK4)
Bin rear end wall open/ Bin rear end wall open Bin rear end wall close Bin rear end wall open Bin rear end wall close Bin rear end wall open Bin rear end wall close Bin rear end wall open Bin rear end wall close Bin rear end wall open Bin rear end wall close Bin rear end wall open Bin rear end wall close Bin rear end wall open Bin rear end wall close
close motor (M17)
Finisher

yy
,, yy
,, y
, yy
,, yy
,, yy
,, yy
,,
motor (M8)
(SL7)
Side gripper grip motor Releasing Releasing Releasing Releasing Releasing Releasing Releasing
(M9)
yy
,, yyyy
,,,, yyy
,,, yyyy
,,,, yyy
,,, yyy
,,, yy
,, yyy
,,, yyy
,,,
Stapler front/rear shift HP detecting Clasping Clasping Clasping Clasping Clasping HP detecting Clasping Clasping
motor (M13)
sensor (PI68)
Stapler motor (M20)

motor (M10)
yy
,, Return to HP
yyy
,,, Return to HP
yy
,, Return to HP
yyy
,,, Return to HP
yy
,, Return to HP
yyy
,,, Return to HP
yy
,, Return to HP

(M12)
yy
,, yy
,, yy
,, y
, ,
y yy
,, y
,
Front gripper front/rear Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing Clasping Releasing
shift motor (M11)
Front gripper front/rear shift Move approx. 20mm to front Move approx. 20mm to front Move approx. 20mm to front
,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy
Stacker unit shift motor Move to UP position Move to DOWN position Return to HP
(M15)
Stacker unit shift brake Brake releasing Brake releasing Brake releasing
(BK2)
Stacker unit shift brake 2 Brake releasing Brake releasing Brake releasing
(BK3)
sensor (PI35)
sensor (PI36)
Stacker unit DOWN
Stacker unit

(M16)
solenoid (SL9)
y
, yy
,, y
, y
, yy
,, y
, y
,
sensor (PI43)
sensor (PI42)
motor (M18)

sensor (PI40)
(PI39)
B. SIGNAL AND ABBREVIATIONS
BCO Bin Cover Open/Closed Detection signal LLCL2 Lower Lead Cam No. 2 Level Detection signal SL2D Path Switch Solenoid Drive signal
BK1D Stacker Unit Shift Brake Drive signal LP1D Lamp ON signal SL3D Stacker Access Solenoid Drive signal
BK2D Stack Processing Unit Brake 1 Drive signal LPD1 Lower Path Paper Detection signal 1 SL5D Upper Paddle Solenoid Drive signal
BK3D Stack Processing Unit Shift Brake 2 Drive signal LPD2 Lower Path Paper Detection signal 2 SL6D Lower Paddle Solenoid Drive signal
BK4D Stacker Unit Shift Brake 2 Drive signal LPD3 Lower Path Paper Detection signal 3 SL7D De-curling Solenoid Drive signal
BRPC Bin Shift Close Position Detection signal LPD4 Lower Path Paper Detection signal 4 SL8D Bin Cover Lock Solenoid Drive signal
BRPO Bin Shift Open Position Detection signal LRP1 Lower Path Paper Detection signal 1 SL9D Stacker Tray Hold Solenoid Drive signal
CL1D Upper Path Roller Clutch Drive signal LRP2 Lower Path Paper Detection signal 2 SPCLK Stack Processing Unit Shift Clock signal
CL2D Lower Path Roller Clutch Drive signal LRP3 Lower Path Paper Detection signal 3 SPHP Stack Processing Unit Up Position Detection signal
CPD1 Common Path Paper Detection signal 1 M1 CLK Common Path Feed Motor Clock signal SPLP Stack Processing Unit Upper Limit Detection signal
CPD2 Common Path Paper Detection signal 2 M1 ON Common Path Feed Motor Drive signal SPTP Stack Processing Unit Down Position Detection signal
DP3 Feed Path No. 3 Detection signal M1 SRP Common Path Speed Reference signal STA Stacker Unit Near Position Detection signal
EMON Emergency Mode ON signal M12D Front Gripper Clasp Motor Drive signal STBP Stacker Lower Limit Detection signal
FCO Front Cover Open/Closed Detection signal M17D Bin Shift Motor Drive signal STCLK Stacker Unit Shift Clock signal
F-DP1 Feed Path No. 1 Paper Detection signal M2 CLK Upper Path Feed Motor Clock signal STHP Stacker Home Position Detection signal
F-S2D Feed Path No. 2 Paper Sensor LED ON signal M2 F/R Upper Path Feed Motor Rotation Direction signal STLP Stacker Down Position Detection signal
F-SL1D B4 Z-Fold No. 1 Stopper Solenoid Drive signal M2 LOCK Upper Path Feed Motor Lock signal STP (Y) CLK Stapler Front/Rear Shift Clock signal
F-SL2D B4 Z-Fold No. 2 Stopper Solenoid Drive signal M2 ON Upper Path Feed Motor Drive signal STP (Y) HP Stapler Front/Rear Shift Home Position Detection signal
F-SL3D Lock Solenoid Drive signal M2 SRP Upper Path Feed Motor Speed Reference signal STPED Stapler Staple Absent Detection signal
F-SL4D Release Solenoid Drive signal M3LOCK Lower Path Feeder Motor Constant Speed State signal STPHP Stapler Home Position Detection signal
F-SL5D Inlet Solenoid Drive signal M3SRP Lower Path Feeder Motor Reference Pulse STPPE Stapler Leading Edge Detection signal (light-emitting, receiving)
FG (X) CLK Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Clock signal M3CLK Lower Path Feeder Motor Clock Pulse STPSE Stapler Front/Rear Shift Safety Detection signal
FG (X) HP Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Home Position Detection signal M3ON Lower Path Feeder Motor Drive signal STS Stacker Cassette Detection signal
FG (X) LL Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Left Limit Detection signal MSF/R Lower Path Feeder Motor Rotation Direction signal STTCLKA Stacker Tray Shift Clock signal
FG (X) RL Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Right Limit Detection signal M4PWM Upper Bin Shift Motor Rotation Speed signal STTCLKB Stacker Tray Shift Clock signal B
FG (X) SE Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Safety Detection signal M5PWM Lower Bin Shift Motor Rotation Speed signal STTHP Stacker Tray Home Position Detection signal
FG (Y) CLK Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Clock signal M8PC Side Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor Phase Control signal STTPD Stacker Tray Stack Detection signal
FG (Y) FL Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Front Limit Detection signal M8F/R Side Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor Rotation Direction signal STTTP Stacker Tray Upper Limit Detection signal
FG (Y) HP Front Gripper Front/Right Shift Home Position Detection signal M8DCC Side Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor Current Switch signal STUTOP Stacker Unit Up Position Detection signal
FG (Y) SE Front Gripper Front/Rear Shift Safety Detection signal M9D Side Gripper Clasp Motor Drive signal TODD Access Door Detection signal
FGGHP Front Gripper Clasp Home Position Detection signal M10PC Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor Phase Control signal TWHP Reference Wall Home Position Detection signal
FGPD Front Gripper Paper Detection signal M10F/R Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor Rotation Direction signal TWTP Reference Wall Up Position Detection signal
FPD Folded Paper Detection signal M10DCC Front Gripper Left/Right Shift Motor Current Switch signal UBBP Upper Bin Lower Limit Detection signal
FSET Fold Path Set Detection signal M13PC Stapler Front/Rear Shift Motor Phase Control signal UBCLK Upper Bin Shift Clock signal
FUCO Upper Cover Open/Closed Detection signal M13F/R Stapler Front/Rear Shift Motor Rotation Direction signal UBGHP Upper Guide Home Position Detection signal
HPD Horizontal Path Paper Detection signal M13DCC Stapler Front/Rear Shift Motor Current Switch signal UBIP Upper Bin Inside Paper Detection signal
LBBP Lower Bin Lower Limit Detection signal M15PWM Stacker Unit Shift Motor Rotation Speed signal UBOP Upper Bin Outside Paper Detection signal
LBCLK Lower Bin Shift Clock signal M18VC Leading Edge Stopper Motor Voltage Switch signal UBTP Upper Bin Upper Limit Detection signal
LBGHP Lower Guide Home Position Detection signal M18PC Leading Edge Stopper Motor Phase Control signal UCO1 Upper Cover Open/Closed Detection signal 1
LBIP Lower Bin Inside Paper Detection signal M18F/R Leading Edge Stopper Motor Rotation Direction signal UCO2 Upper Cover Open/Closed Detection signal 2
LBOP Lower Bin Outside Paper Detection signal NSD Non-Sort Delivery Assembly Paper Detection signal ULCL Upper Lead Cam Level Detection signal
LBTP Lower Bin Upper Limit Detection signal NSPD Non-Sort Path Paper Detection signal ULCL2 Upper Lead Cam No. 2 Level Detection signal
LED1D Upper Bin Inside Paper Sensor LED ON signal PD Stack Detection signal UPD1 Upper Path Paper Detection signal 1
LED2D Lower Bin Inside Sensor LED ON signal PED Edge Feed Detection signal UPD2 Upper Path Paper Detection signal 2
LED3D Edge Feed Sensor LED ON signal PF1 Paper Side 1 Detection signal UPD3 Upper Path Paper Detection signal 3
LED4D Paper Side 1 Sensor LED ON signal PF2 Paper Side 2 Detection signal URP1 Upper Path Paper Detection signal 1
LED5D Paper Side 2 Sensor LED ON signal SC Screen Detection signal URP2 Upper Path Paper Detection signal 2
LED6D 1.2K Sensor LED ON signal SG (X) HP Side Gripper Left/Right Shift Home Position Detection signal VRP1 Vertical Path Paper Detection signal 1
LED7D Upper Bin Outside Paper Sensor LED ON signal SGGHP Side Gripper Clasp Home Position Detection signal VRP2 Vertical Path Paper Detection signal 2
LED8D Lower Bin Outside Paper Sensor LED ON signal SGMED Side Gripper Motor Error Detection signal VRP3 Vertical Path Paper Detection signal 3
LESHP Leading Edge Stopper Home Position Detection signal SGPD Side Gripper Paper Detection signal
LLCL Lower Lead Cam Level Detection signal SL1D Non-Sort Path Switch Solenoid Drive signal
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (1/2)
Not available
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (2/2)
< Front gripper unit >
< Front gripper >
Front gripper grip Front gripper Front gripper front/ Front gripper Front gripper Front gripper Front gripper
home position sensor Front gripper Front gripper front/rear shift rear shift home front/rear shift left/right shift front/rear shift front/rear shift motor
paper sensor grip motor front limit sensor position sensor safety sensor safety sensor motor clock sensor
Front gripper left/right Stack processing Stack processing Stack processing Front gripper Stacker unit Front gripper
Paper surface1 Paper surface 2
shift motor unit shift motor unit shift brake 1 sensor sensor
unit shift motor left/right shift NEAR position left/right shift motor PI63 PI64 M12 PI61 PI60 PI62 PI58 M11 PI59
clock sensor right limit sensor sensor clock sensor
(light-receiving) PT (light-receiving) PT J461 J462 J459 J458 J460 J456 J457
PT4 PT5 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
M10 M14 BK2 PI69 PI57 PI73 PI54
J467 J455 J471 J452 rie t uy r ty iuq o!2 w !5 !4 e J511 1 2 !3 !1 !0
J130G J130I J512 1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 !6 !7
qwe i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 qw
wq re
J531 1 2 ASM-F gripper
J510 1 2 3 4 5 6
qwerty
qwertyui q wertyuio!0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 212223 2425 26
J514 1 2 3 4 qwe
SG
+5V(LED)
SG
FG(Y)SE
NC
FG(Y)CLK
M12D
PG
+5V(LED)
FGGHP
FGPD
+5V(LED)
SG
SG
NC
NC
NC
NC
+5V(LED)
NC
NC
SG
+5V(LED)
SG
FGY(HP)
NC
NC
NC
FG(X)SE
SG
M11CW
M11CCW
+5V
+5V
FG(Y)FL
!0 o ui J642 1 2 3
tyu
J122B J121B J120B J8 J7 J6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314151617 1819 20 1 2 3 ✽ ✽ 3334 1 2 ✽ ✽ 3132 1 2 3 4
#3 #0 #1 ✽ ✽ ^5 ^6 qw ✽ ✽ #1 #2 qwer FG FG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13141516 1718 19 20

t y
J121A
J120A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12131415 16 1718 19 2021222324 2526
r e@1 !0@2 @4 !3 !9 tyuoi!2 !6!5 !1 @0 !4 @5 @6 @3 !7 !8 w q
qwertyui o!0 qwertyuio!0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 qwertyui o!0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 #3 #4 #5 ✽ ✽ ^5 ^6 qw ✽ ✽ #1 #2 qwer FG

A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 1 13 2 12 3 11 4 10 5 9 6 8 7 7 8 6 9 5 10 4 11 3 12 2 13 1 1 2 3 33 34 1 2 3132 1 2 3 4
SG
PF1
SG
PF2
SPCLK
SG
+5V(LED)
FG(X)RL
SG
+5V(LED)
STA
SG
+5V(LED)
FG(X)CLK
SG
+5V(LED)
M11CW
M11CCW
M12D
PG
FG(Y)FL
SG
+5V(LED)
FG(Y)HP
SG
+5V(LED)
FG(Y)SE
SG
+5V
FG(Y)CLK
SG
+5V(LED)
FG(X)SE
SG
+5V
SG
FGPD
+5V(LED)
SG
FGGPH
SG
+5V(LED)
+24V
+24VP
BK2D*
+24VP
M10A
M10A*
M10B
M10B*
M14CW
M14CCW
J104 J105 J103
J110 J109 J107 J108

J106 J101 J102 J111 J112
STP(Y)CLK
+24V(M13)
+24V(M13)
STP(Y)HP
STPLEDD
STP(Y)SE
+5V(LED)
+5V(LED)
+5V(LED)
+5V(LED)
+5V(LED)
+5V(LED)
+5V(LED)
+5V(LED)
+24V(M8)
+24V(M8)
M20CCW
SG(X)HP
FG(X)HP
PG(M17)
FG(X)LL
SGGHP
SGMFD
M20CW
PG(M9)
STPCD
STPHP
STPED
STPPE
LED3D
LED4D
LED5D
+24VP
M13A*
M13B*
SPT`P
SL7D*
SGPD
BRPO
BRPC
SPHP
SPBP
M17D
M13B
M13A
SPLP
+5VS
+5VS
M8A*
M8B*
LP1D
+12V
M9D
PED
M8A
M8B
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
NC
NC
NC
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 131415 16 1718 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 25 2 24 3 23 4 22 5 21 6 20 7 19 8 18 9 17 10 16 11 15 12 14 13 13 14 12 15 11 16 10 17 9 18 8 19 7 20 6 21 5 22 4 23 3 24 2 25 1 A B A B A B A B
5 @7@8 @9 #0 #1 ##
!9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @@6 2 3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8#9 $0$1 $2 $3$4 $5 $6$7 $8 $9 %0%1 %2 %3 %4%5 %6%7 %8%9^0 ^1^2^3 ^4^5 qwertyuio!0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 o!0 qwertyui qwertyui
!1
yter@2 @3 @4 !9 @0 @1 qw#9 $0 $1 $2 $3 $4 !1
J646 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ui
J647 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 qwertyui o!0
qwertyui J643 J520 J535 1 2
qwertyuio!0 %4 %5 %6 ^3 ^4 ^5 ^0 ^1 ^2%7 %8 %9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
J645 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 qwertyui
#1 #2 #5 #6 #7 #8 q wertyuio!0!1 !2
wqe try
1 2 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 1 2 3
io !0 er qw !2 !4 !5 !7 !6 !8 J487 J488 J489 i!0 o !1 u !3
J465 J464
1 2 1 2 J508 qw J513 1 2 3 4 5 6 PI67 PI66
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 LP1
#4 #3 J517 1 2 uy i
J447 J509 J527
tyu @6 @5 @7 @8 @9 #0 uyi ert J466 1 2 3
qw 1 2 qw qw Stapler front/ Stapler front/ Lamp 1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 $5 $6 $7 $8 $9 %0 %1 %2 %3 wqe try uio !1 !0 !2 rear shift rear shift home
J446 J130F J451 J450 qwert enable sensor position sensor

PI49 M9 SL7 J448 J449 M17 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
PI48 PI50 M8 PI51 PI53 PI52 M13 PI68 Stapler
PT3 LED3 LED4 LED5 J454 J453 J463 J468 J469 J470 J477 M20
PI56 PI55 PI65 PI70 PI71 PI72 PI79
Side gripper Side gripper Side gripper Paper holding Side gripper Side gripper Edge feeding Edge feeding Paper surface Paper surface Bin rear end wall Bin rear end wall Bin rear end
sensor sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor CLOSE position OPEN position wall open/ Stapler front/rear Stapler leading Stapler motor
paper sensor grip home grip motor solenoid left/right shift Side gripper motor error
(light-receiving) (light-emitting) (light-emitting) (light-emitting) sensor sensor close motor shift motor edge paper
position sensor home position left/right shift sensor Front gripper Front gripper left/ Stapler front/ Stack process- Stack process- Stack process- Stack process- < Stapler unit >
sensor
sensor motor left/right shift right shift home rear shift motor ing unit home ing unit upper ing unit lower ing unit DOWN
left limit sensor position sensor clock sensor position sensor limit sensor limit sensor position sensor
D. PAPER FOLDING UNIT GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Not available
APPENDIX
E. SPECIAL TOOLS
You will need the following special tools in addition to the standard tools set.
No. Name Use Composition Remarks Use

1 Spring gauge CK-0054-000 B For adjusting
the tension of
the drive belt.
F. SOLVENTS AND OILS

No. Name Use Composition Remarks
1 Alcohol Cleaning: e.g., Carbon sulfide of • Do not bring near fire.
glass, plastic, bin, fluorine family,
and rubber parts; Alcohol,
external covers. Surface active
agent, Water
2 Lubricant Preventing wear: Silicone oil Tool No.: CK-0551 (20 g)
e.g., friction parts;
stapler.
3 Lubricant Stapler Mineral oil (paraf- Tool No.: CK-0451 (100 cc)
fin family)
APPENDIX
Prepared by
Office Imaging Products Technical Support Department 1
Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center
CANON INC
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (MAY 1997) (28353/30359)
7-5-1, Hakusan, Torideshi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

This publication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 0597AB2.21-1

Finisher - B1sm PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Finisher - B1sm PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FINISHER-B1

PAPER FOLDING UNIT-A1

NO PARTS CATALOGUE AVAILABLE

MAY 1997 FY8-13EW-000

THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN.

ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Use of this manual should be strictly

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1

7-5-1, Hakusan, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

This Service Manual consists of the following chapters:

Chapter 1, “General Description,” gives the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1’s fea-

Chapter 2, “Operations and Timing,” explains the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1’s

Chapter 3, “Mechanical System,” discusses the Finisher-B1/Paper Folding Unit-A1’s

Chapter 4, “Maintenance and Servicing,” contains tables of periodically replaced

Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting,” sets forth steps used to troubleshoot possible faults in

CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS AND TIMING

CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. FEATURES ..............................................1-1 A. Control Panel ...................................1-10

2. Shorter stapling time.

3. Three modes of auto stapling.

4. Easier jam removal.

5. Better paper feeding.

6. Easier access to copies.

7. Folding function (accessory).

* Stacking will be to the upper bin module in excess of 1200 sheets.

Double A3, A4 B4, B5

88.5 ±2mm 88.5 ±2mm

68.5 ±2mm 68.5 ±2mm

279.4 × 431.8mm (11" × 17"), LTR

Specifications subject to change without notice.

B. Paper Folding Unit-A1

Specifications subject to change without notice.

III. NAMES OF PARTS

q Bin cover o Front door

2. Paper Folding Unit-A1

q Folding unit upper cover

q Upper bin module i Path switching flapper

2. Paper Folding Unit-A1

q No. 2 stopper u No. 1 stopper

IV. Operating the Machine

Ref. Name Description

B. Adjusting the Brightness

2) If the display is off, touch it so that the

3) Turn the Contrast adjusting dial to

4) Close the bin cover.

C. Making User Mode Settings

1. Staple Feed Function

2. Set Staple Width Function

1) Press the key on the control panel. Reset

2) Press the [CUSTOM SETTING] key.

3) Press s / t until ‘change width of

4) Press + or – , and enter the appro-

5) When done, press the [END] key.

D. Supplying the Stapler

1) Open the upper cover.

2) Release the stapler locking lever.

3) Remove the empty staple cartridge.

4) Obtain a new staple cartridge.

5) Set the new staple cartridge.

6) Lock the stapler locking lever in

7) Open the front door.